Skip to main content

Full text of "The primary synopsis of universology and Alwato : the new scientific universal language"

See other formats 


:'fe>fe>:         •&$ 

«$. 

•I*®;' 

' 

w 

&>&>&$& 

-&>&$ 

>  - 


>-« 


I  - 

felM 
$>|>: 

.>fe->fe>>;: 

Ifii 

•»:4>>M4. 
. ->^>»^: 
1>IP>|; 

j<&<<y\(ty.&?.Ji$ 


>ft»vW^w^«».\< 

/<•'%•'•-' 

|>M« 

••»XK4: 
•%/>! 

, 


•»};.•) 


<«W» 


v     y     \v     v     y 


I  .          <  v 

•  • 

mm  .  . 


• 


. 
.     I 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 


BEQUEST  OF 


Alice  R.  Hilgard 


VAL. 


ON  T 


AS 


(Formerly  of  142  Nassau  Street,) 


REMOVED  TO 

141  Fulton  anb  20  Ann  Streets, 


Between  Nassau   Street  and   Broadway, 

*    •* 


,  ,87i. 


Standard  and  Rare  Books,  For  Sale,  Cheap  ! 


THE  PRIMARY  SYNOPSIS 


OP 


UNIVERSOLOGY 


AND 


A.  L  "W  A.  T  O 

(Pronounced  ahl-wa-to), 

THE  NEW  SCIENTIFIC   UNIVERSAL  LANGUAGE. 


BY 

STEPHEN  PEARL  ANDREWS, 

MEMBKR  OF  THE   AMERICAN   ACADEMY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES;  OF  THE  A.MKBICAN 

ETHNOLOGICAL  SoOIKTY,  ETC. 

AUTHOR  OF  "THE  SCIENCE  OF  SOCIETY,"  "DISCOVKRIKS  IN  CHINESE," 
"TIJK  BASIC  OUTLINE  OF  UN1VEK80LOGY,"    ETC. 


In  the  beginning  was  the  WORD,  and  the  Word  was  with  God,  and  the  Word 
was  GOD.   John  1 : 1.    (Text  19,  p.  17.) 


NEW  YOKE:  : 

DION  THOMAS,  141  FULTON  STREET. 

1871. 


f  -  -          i    V  -.  -*  +  ,     . 

^        / 


GIFT 

U'/CI 

f' 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1871,  by 

STEPHEN  PEARL  ANDREWS, 
In  the  O.Tice  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


Stereotyped  by  SMITH  &  McDouoAi.,  82  Beekman  Street. 


TO 


MRS.    E*    THOMPSON, 


M860782 


PREFACE. 


"THE  Basic  .Outline  of  Universology "  lias  been 
announced  by  my  publisher  to  appear  earlier  than 
the  present  date.  Reconsideration  and  the  advice 
of  scientific  friends  in  whose  judgment  I  have  great 
confidence  have  resulted  in  some  change  in  the  order 
of  publication. 

It  is  urged  on  me  by  my  advisers,  who  have  read 
and  who  express  their  great  interest  in  the  success 
of  the  larger  work,  that,  while  I  have  regarded  it  as 
an  Introduction  merely  to  the  Science  of  Universology, 
it  needs ,  itself,  to  be  introduced  ;  and  not  alone  by  Intro- 
ductions which  speak  about  the  science,  descriptively, 
("  The  Basic  Outline '  is  itself  prefaced  by  several 
such),  but  by  a  smaller  work,  less  technical  and 
elaborate,  giving,  nevertheless,  some  real  insight  into 
the  nature  and  principles  of  the  science  itself,  and 
some  intelligible  illustrations  of  the  working  of  those 
principles,  upon  so  limited  a  scale  as  to  be  accessible 
by  the  whole  intelligent  public. 

It  is  urged  that  the  larger  work,  by  its  bulk  and 
expensiveness,  and  by  the  greater  difficulty  which 
attaches  to  its  more  technical,  and  consequently  less 
popular  form,  will  be  necessarily  restricted  to  a 
smaller  public;  that  it  may  even  incur  neglect,  if 
not  misapprehension  and  a  temporary  unpopularity, 


IV  PREFACE. 

from  the  prevalence  of  new  terras  and  methods  of 
treatment,  unless  a  previous  interest  is  secured,  on 
the  part  of  readers,  l)y  a  specimen,  at  least,  of  'the 
subject  first  presented  in  a  simpler  and  less  laborious 
way.  The  very  great  advantage  of  the  technicalities 
of  the  science,  as  contained  and  used  in  "  The  Basic 
Outline,"  is  not  for  a  moment  questioned ;  but  it  is 
again  urged,  that  an  appetite  for  a  new  article  of 
mental  food,  as  well  as  in  the  case  of  physical  nutri- 
ment, must  first  be  cultivated,  to  some  extent,  before 
the  people  will  appreciate,  and  take  the  trouble  to 
learn  to  use,  the  machinery,  however  simple  in  itself, 
by  which  the  acquisition  and  preparation  of  such 
food  are  to  be  facilitated. 

I  have  yielded  to  the  force  of  these  arguments, 
and  shall  delay  the  publication  of  "  The  Basic  Out- 
line of  Universology '  until  after  that  of  this  Pre- 
amble, or  "  Synopsis,"  which  has  been  prepared  with 
a  view  to  meet  the  special  demand  so  laid  upon  me, 
with  what  success  the  readers  of  this  little  prelim- 
inary work  must  judge.  Brunei,  when  he  had  built 
"  The  Great  Eastern,"  found  nearly  as  much  diffi- 
culty in  launching  her  as  he  had  met  and  overcome 
in  the  construction.  If,  by  the  judicious  advice  of 
friends,  or  by,  in  a  word,  the  use  of  all  appropriate 
means,  I  can  succeed  in  projecting  this  new  science 
on  the  world  in  such  a  manner  as  to  secure  its 
earliest  and  most  favorable  acceptance,  a  slight 
change  of  programme,  which  postpones,  for  a  little, 
the  publication  of  a  particular  work,  already  electro- 
typed  and  in  proofs,  will  be  of  small  moment ;  and 


PREFACE.  V 

the  subscribers   for   "  The    Basic    Outline r    will,   I 
doubt  not,  excuse  the  temporary  disappointment. 

Considerable  preparation  has  already  been  made, 
in  the  public  mind,  for  such  favorable  reception  of 
"the  New  Science,  by  the  publication  of  the  following 
card,  signed  by  gentlemen  who  are  at  once  recog- 
nized as  among  those  most  competent  to  form  a  just 
opinion  upon  a  subject  of  this  nature  : 

"  UNIVERSOLOGY."— A  CARD. 

The  undersigned  having  listened  to  Mr.  STEPHEN  PEARL 
ANDREWS'S  preliminary  statement  of  "  Universology,"  and  been 
impressed  with  the  importance  and  originality  of  the  new  scien- 
tific claim,  as  well  as  with  the  profound  research  implied  in  it,  do 
cordially  concur  in  urging  the  publication  of  the  work  at  the  ear- 
liest possible  date. 

PARKE  GODWIN. 

ISAAC  LEWIS  PEET,  Prin.  N.  Y.  Inst.  for  Deaf  and  Dumb. 

F.  A.  P.  BARNARD,  President  of  Columbia  College. 
Prof.  E.  L.  YOUMANS. 

GEORGE  OPDYKE. 
Rev.  0.  B.  FKOTHIXGHAM. 

CHARLES   P.  DALY,   President   of  the   American   Geo- 
graphical and  Statistical  Society. 

Rev.  BENJ.  N.  MARTIN,  Professor,  New  York  University. 
C.  GOEPP. 

E.  R.  STRAZNICKY,  Assistant  Librarian,  As  tor  Library. 
CHAS.  F.  TAYLOR,  M.D. 
FREDERIC  R.  MARVIN. 
GEO.  WAKEMAN. 
N.  B.  EMERSON,  M.D. 
TITUS  MUNSON  Co  AN,  M.D. 

J.  WEST  NEVINS,  late  U.  S.  Vice-Consul  at  Genoa,  Italy. 
JOHN  II.  STAATS. 
T.  B.  W  AXEMAN. 

G.  W.  MADOX. 


VI  PREFACE. 

I  cut  from  the  "Washington  Chronicle,"  of  Janu- 
ary 13, 1870,  the  following  very  brief  and  lucid  appre- 
ciation of  the  fundamental  character  of  Universologv. 

o*/ 

Emanating  from  another  source,  it  is,  perhaps,  better 
adapted  to  give,  in  a  few  words,  a  first  proper  im- 
pression of  the  whole  matter,  than  any  thing  which 
I  may  have  said,  or  may  be  able  to  say,  on  the 
subject  : 

"  UNIVERSOLOGY — DEVELOPMENT  OF  A  NEW  SCIENCE. 
— Mr.  Stephen  Pearl  Andrews,  of  New  York,  claims 
to  have  discovered  a  new  science,  which  he  calls 
Universology,  and  which  is  so  inclusive  in  its  scope 
as  to  exhibit  the  fundamental  laws  which  pervade 
and  govern  the  universe.  These  laws,  he  contends, 
are  few  in  number,  but  infinite  in  their  application, 
and  so  modified  by  the  necessities  of  the  various 
domains  of  thought,  being,  or  action,  in  which  they 
manifest  themselves,  as  to  present  myriads  of  phe- 
nomena apparently  unrelated  to  each  other.  There 
is,  according  to  Mr.  Andrews,  really  but  one  science, 
what  are  now  called  sciences  being  merely  sub- 
sciences,  or  so  many  different  manifestations  of  one 
universal  law,  varied  in  its  application  according  to 
the  sphere  of  its  operations. 

u  Just  as  the  mathematician  recognizes  all  the  ap- 
plications of  arithmetic  to  be  merely  different  ways, 
for  different  purposes,  of  adding  numbers  to  or  sub- 
tracting them  from  each  other ;  just  as  he  sees  in  the 
pair  of  scales,  the  pair  of  scissors,  and  the  propul- 
sion of  a  boat  by  an  oar  or  a  paddle,  precisely  the 
same  principle,  the  lever,  but  so  necessarily  modi- 


P  B  E  F  A  C  E  .  Vll 

fiecl  in  its  application,  in  each  case,  as  to  be  unrecog- 
nized by  the  superficial  observer,  so  Mr.  Andrews 
claims  that  all  the  so-called  sciences,  abstract  and 
concrete — and,  if  we  understand  him,  all  arts,  all 
things,  are  inter-related — are,  in  fact,  but  so  many 
varied  manifestations  of  one  Supreme  Law,  or  God's 
"Will.  And  it  is  this  law  and  its  boundless  opera- 
tions that  Mr.  Andrews  claims  to  have  discovered 
and  is  about  to  publish.  Such  a  discovery,  if  really 
made,  would  so  far  transcend  any  past  achievement 
of  man,  and  seems  altogether  so  doubtful,  that  the 
most  sanguine  progressive  scientist  might  well  be 
excused  for  receiving  the  announcement  with  an 
incredulous  smile,  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  the 
New  York  papers  contain  a  highly  complimentary 
card,  signed  by  Professor  Youmans,  President  Bar- 
nard, of  Columbia  College,  Judge  Daly,  ex-Mayor 
Opdyke,  Parke  Godwin,  and  a  dozen  other  equally 
eminent  men,  who  have  partially  investigated  Mr. 
Andrews'  claims,  calling  upon  him  to  publish  his 
discoveries." 

It  is  evident  that  the  discovery  of  Universology 
will  not  only  exert  a  revolutionary  influence  on  the 
positive  body  of  systematized  knowledge  in  the 
world,  as  such,  that  is  to  say  upon  science  itself,  but 
equally  upon  the  Art  of  Communicating  Scientific 
Knowledge  ;  that  it  will,  in  other  words,  reconstitute 
the  whole  business  of  Education.  It  will  establish 
Unity  of  System  in  the  Educational  Domain,  for  the 
world,  and  will  be  to  the  rapid  extension  of  learning 
what  the  rail-road  is  for  travel,  and  the  telegraph  for 


V1I1  PREFACE. 

the  transmission  of  news.  The  future  students  of 
Science,  instead  of  coming  up  laboriously  to  some 
imperfect  mastery  of  the  whole  subject  through  the 
details  of  two  or  three  special  Sciences,  will  begin  in 
the  knowledge  of  Universal  Principles,  and  will  come 
down  upon  the  whole  substrate  mass  of  Scientific 
specialties  from  a  previously  attained  height  of  Uni- 
versal Scientific  knowledge  equally  applicable  to 
every  domain.  This  subject  is  too  large  to  be  more 
than  alluded  to  in  this  place,  but  its  importance 
cannot  fail  to  be  appreciated.  The  masses  of  the 
people,  in  all  countries,  in  the  future,  instead  of 
arriving  at  a  mere  knowledge  of  the  rudiments  of 
education,  will  possess,  in  an  astonishing  degree, 
the  theory  and  details  of  all  the  sciences.  Science 
will  become  popularized  beyond  any  conception  of 
the  possibility  of  such  a  result  which  has  prevailed 
hitherto.  The  whole  people  will  enjoy  the  eleva- 
ting influences  and  the  new  powers  conferred  by 
literary  and  scientific  acquisitions  vastly  be}rond 
what  is  now  meant  by  "  a  liberal  education." 

The  discovery  of  this  new  Centralizing  and  Uni- 
tary Science  will  demand  the  founding  of  a  special 
UNIVERSITY,  vastly  larger,  in  design,  than  any  now  or 
ever  heretofore  extant,  devoted  to  the  promulgation 
of  Universal  Principles,  to  the  introduction  of  this 
New  System  of  Education  for  the  Planet,  and  to 
serve  as  the  nucleus  of  a  New  Universal  or  Planetary 
Government,  which  should  accompany  the  Unification 
of  the  Science  and  that  of  the  Language  of  tho 


PREFACE.  ix 

Human  Race.     The  ivealtli  of  the  world  may  le  legiti- 
mately levied  upon  for  that  end. 

The  classically  educated  reader  may  be  impatient 
at  times  with  the  pains-taking  explanation  of  the 
meaning  of  terms  which  he  will  find  in  my  writings ; 
but  I  write,  equally,  for  the  non-classical ;  and  I  know 
how  necessary  and  grateful  such  aids  of  the  under- 
standing often  are  to  them. 

S.  P.  A. 

NEW  YORK,  February,  1870. 


NOTICE    TO    THE    READER :— DIRECTIONS    AND 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

The  Paragraphs  are  numbered  in  this  work, 
throughout,  for  ease  of  reference.  The  figures 
(alone)  inserted  in  parentheses,  in  the  body  of  the 
work,  refer  to  the  Paragraphs  of  the  work  itself. 
The  letter  t.  means  Text  or  Paragraph.  Preceded 
by  the  letters  B.  O.,  the  figures  refer  to  "  The  Basic 
Outline  of  Universology,"  (t.  to  the  Text,  c.  to  the 
Commentary,  and  a.  to  the  Annotation  of  that  work.) 

1.   Old  and  New  Technical  Terminations. 

-ism,  as  a  termination,  denotes  a  Principle,  as 
tm-ism,  meaning  the  Abstract  Principle  or  Spirit  of 
the  Number  ONE,  (Lat.  UN-MS,  ONE.) 

-ismal  is  the  adjective  termination  derived  from 
-ism,  as  un-ismal,  meaning  related  to  un-ism. 

-ismus  is  the  termination  of  a  new  or  derived  sub- 
stantive, meaning  The  Realm  or  Domain  in  which 
the  Principle  (-ism)  prevails,  as  un-ism  us,  the  B/ealm 
or  Domain  of  Things  in  which  un-ism  prevails ;  -ismi 
is  the  Plural  ending. 

-oid,  or  -oidal  signifies  like  or  resembling;  nearly 
equivalent  to  the  uneuphoneous  English  ending  -ish. 

2.  Abbreviations. 

Eng.  for  English  ;  Fr.  for  French  ;  Gr.  for  Greek  ; 
Ger.  for  German  ;  Ital.  for  Italian  ;  Lat.  for  Latin ; 
Span,  for  Spanish  ;  Cf.  (Lat.  confer,  from  conferre)  is 
used  to  mean  compare. 

The  sign  =  denotes  that  the  ideas  compared  l>y  the 
sign  are  equivalent  one  to  the  other. 


VOCABULARY 

Of  Foreign,  Unusual,  and  New  Terms,  not  including,  however, 
Words  properly  belonging  to  the  New  Language,  for  which  sse 
Body  of  the  Work.  See  also  the  Index,  for  Texts  where  some  of 
these,  and  some  proper  Alwaso  terms  are  further  denned.  -Ism, 
-ismiis,  -ismal,  and  -aid  are  riot  Alwaso  endings,  but  Anglicised  ter- 
minations, from  Latin  and  Greek  sources. 


A. 

AD  LIBITUM,  (Latin),  freely,  without  constraint ;  at  will. 

ANTHOGENE,  (Gr.  aner,  andr-ost  MAN,  and  gurie,  WOMAN),  having  the  two 
sexes,  male  and  female  (blended,  as  of  the  two  parents  in  the  child.) 

AUTISM,  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Art — Composite,  gently  modulated, 
curving,  graceful,  as  Hogarth's  Line  of  Beauty, 

AETISMAL,  (Adj.),  relating  to  Artism. 

ARTISMUS,  the  Domain  or  Kealm  of  Being,  Evolution,  or  Progress,  in 
which  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Art,  or  of  that  which  is  Cognate  or  Analo- 
gical with  Art,  predominates  or  prevails. 

ARTISTIC  MODIFICATION,  the  graceful  deviation  from  Primitive  Outlay, 
or  Type-Forms,  in  process  to  completion,  in  which  Nature,  like  any  other 
artist,  indulges  and  delights.  (See  B.  0.  Index.) 

ARTOLOGY,  the  Science  of  the  Artismus,  or  of  that  Third  (or  Tertiary) 
Department  of  Being,  or  Stage  of  Evolution,  in  which  ARTISM,  the  Spirit 
or  Principle  of  Art  (or  of  that  which  is  analogous  with  Art)  preponderates. 

B. 

BI-TRINACRIA,  a  figure  having  six  (twice  three)  Legs,  or  Liniar  exten- 
sions, at  Eight  Angles  to  each  other. 

D. 

DUISM,  The  Second  Universal  Principle  (in  Natural  Order  ;  the  First  in 
Logical  Order),  derived  from  and  related  to  the  Number  Two. 
DTTISMAL,  (Adj.),  relating  to  Duism. 
DUISMUS,  the  Domain  or  Realm  in  which  Duism  governs  or  prevails. 

E. 

EOHOSOPHIST,  a  Positivist,  in  the  enlarged,  un-technical  sense ;  not 
meaning,  especially,  a  disciple  of  the  Comtean  School.  (B.  0,  Index.) 


Xll  YOCABULARY. 

ENDO-LEXIC,  (Greek),  within  the  word,  interior  to  the  construction  of 
the  individual  word. 
ET  PASSIM,  (Latin),  and  at  various  points. 

F. 

FUND  AMENTA,  (Latin),  plural  of  fundamentum. 

FUNDAMENTUM,  (Latin),  foundation,  basis ;  whatever  is  at  bottom. 

H. 

HYBRIDITT,  Lingual,  the  mixing  of  different  languages,  as  in  the  com- 
position of  words ;  Sociology  from  the  Latin  socius,  a  COMPANION,  and 
Greek  logos,  A  DISCOURSE,  etc. 

I. 

IDIOMATISM,  the  Spirit  of  Idioms,  or  of  Differentiation  in  Language  of 
Speech. 

IN  SITU,  (Latin),  in  its  natural  position  ;  unremoved. 

M. 

MODELIC,  adjective  from  model ;  serving  as  a  Model  or  Pattern. 

N. 

NATURISM,  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Nature — irregular,  free,  chaotic,  etc. 

NATURISMAL,  (Adj.),  relating  to  Naturism. 

NATURCSMUS,  the  Domain  or  Eealin  of  Being,  Evolution,  or  Progress,  in 
which  jtfaturism,  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Nature,  or  of  that  which  is 
cognate  or  analogical  with  Nature,  predominates  or  prevails. 

NATUROLOGY,  the  Science  of  the  Naturismus,  or  of  that  Primitive  De- 
partment of  Being,  or  Stage  of  Evolution  in  which  NATCBISM,  or  the 
Spirit  or  Principle  of  Nature,  preponderates— -free,  absolute,  spontaneous, 
irregular  ',  characterized  by  swelling  rotundities,  deviations  ;  or  by  odd  and 
exceptional  manifestations  ;  as  of  Circles  ;  Breaks,  Spurs,  etc.  (See  Index.) 

o. 

ORIENTATION,  the  fixing  of  the  Cardinal  (and  other)  Points  of  the  Com- 
pass by  a  primary  reference  to  the  East  (the  Orient.) 

P. 

PATHAGNOMIO  LINES,  Lines  of  Direction  in  accordance  with  what  tho 
mental  energies  of  the  Brain  act  or  express  themselves — Buchanan. 

PLUMB-CENTERING,  the  fixing,  as  by  a  Plumb-line,  of  the  Central  Per- 
pendicular. 

PROPRIUM,  (Lat.  OWN  or  PROPERTY),  that  which  is  essential  to  tho  self- 
hood; underivcd;  personally  distinctive,  as  essential  property — Swedenborg. 

PBOTO  PRAGMATA  (Greek  ;  literally  FIRST  THINGS)  ;  Eutieal  or  Ontologicol 


VOCABULARY.  Xlll 

Natural  Elements,  from  which  all  things  are  composed :  as  Substance. 
Form,  Space,  etc.;  distinguished  from  PRINCIPLES,  which  are  Mathemat- 
ical and  Logical,  as  Unism,  Duism,  etc. 

PUNCTUK  VIT^J,  (Lat.  POINT  OF  LIFE),  The  Centre  of  Vitality;  a  Vital 
Centre. 

s. 

SCIENTIC,  relating  to  Science. 

SCIENTISM,  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Science — regular,  excic1.,  precise, 
etc. 

SCIENTISMAL,  (Adj.),  relating  to  Scientism. 

SCIENTISMI'S,  the  Domain  or  Realm  of  Being,  Evolution,  or  Progress,  in 
which  Scientism,  the  Spirit  or  Principle  of  Science,  or  of  that  which  is  Cog- 
nate or  Analogical  with  Science,  predominates  or  prevails. 

SCIENTOLOGY,  the  Science  of  the  Scientismus,  or  of  that  Secondary  De- 
partment of  Being,  or  Stage_of  Evolution,  in  which  SCIENTISM,  the 
Spirit  or  Principle  of  Science  (or  of  that  which  is  analogous  with  Science) 
preponderates — strict,  legal,  and  law-abiding  ;  FORMAL,  regular;  character- 
ized by  straight  ness,  accuracy,  and  adjustment ;  as  of  Straight  Lines, 
Parallelisms,  Rectangular  ities,  Squares,  Gu~bes,  etc.  (See  Index.) 

SESQUISM,  (Lat.  sesqui,  ONE-AND-A-HALF),  the  Principle  which  interme- 
diates between  Unism  and  Duism,  and  is  the  Ghostly  Centre  and  Spirit  of 
Trinism  (t.  214.) 

T. 

TACTUS  ERUDITUS,  (Latin),  the  learned  touch ;  delicacy  of  touch  or 
handling  acquired  by  practice. 

THEANDRIO,  (Gr.  Theos,  GOD,  and  aner,  andr-os,  MAN),  jointly  including 
the  Divine  and  tte  Human,  or  God  and  Man,  (and,  by  license,  Angels, 
Spirits,  and  all  Eational  Existences,  proven  or  assumed),  as  contrasted 
with  the  Lower  Cosmos. 

TRINISM,  The  TJiird  Universal  Principle  (in  both  Natural  and  Logical 
Order;  First  in  order  of  observation,  or  the  most  Ostensible,  t.  175), 
derived  from  and  related  to  the  Number  THREE. 

TRINISMAL,  (Adj.),  relating  to  Trinism. 

TBIXISMUS,  the  Domain  or  Realm  in  which  Trinism  governs  or  pre- 
vails. 

u. 

UNISM,  The  First  Universal  Principle  (in  Natural  Order),  derived  from, 
iui'1  related  to  the  Number  ONE. 
UMSMAL,  (adj.),  relating  to  Unism. 

UNISMUS,  the  Domain  or  Realm  in  which  Uuism  governs  or  prevails. 
UNISMI,  etc.,  Plural  forms  for  Unismus,  etc. 
UNIVERSOLOGICAL.  relating  to  Universology. 


XIV  VOCABULARY. 

UNIVERSOLOGICALLY,  after  the  method  of  Universology;  or  in  accordance 
with  Universology. 

UNIVERSOLOGY,  the  Science  of  the  Universe  ;  the  Science  of  the  Whole, 
as  distinguished  from  the  Special  Sciences  of  the  Parts. 

.    V. 

VEBBUM,  the  -Latin  for  "  Word  "  in  English,  and  "  Logos  "  in  Greek  ; 
see  LOGOS  ;  has  important  analogy  with  the  Verb,  in  Grammar. 
VIT^E  PUNCTUM  ;  see  punctum  vita?. 
VOCALITY,  the  Vowel  quality,  property,  or  element,  in  Speech. 

w. 

"  WOED,"  as  "  Verbum,"  or  Logos,  which  see  ;  in  the  Swedenborgian 
sense,  The  Scriptures. 

WORD-BUILDING,  the  Etymological  Composition  of  words. 

» 

z. 

ZERO,  The  Naught  or  Auglit  of  Mathematics  or  Number;  but,  universo- 
logically,  the  Analogue  of  Nothing,  or  the  Kantian  Category  of  Negation. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

TITLE-PAGE 1 

PREFACE iiUix 

NOTICE  TO  READER,  AND  ABBREVIATIONS x 

VOCABULARY xi-xiii 

TABLE  OP  CONTENTS xv 

CONDENSED  STATEMENT  OP  METHOD xvi 

INTRODUCTION * 

CHAPTER  I. 
PRELIMINARY  DISCRIMINATIONS  AND  DEFINITIONS  :  OBJECTIONS  ANSWERED     17 

CHAPTER  II. 
PRIMITIVE  DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  UNIVERSE 31 

CHAPTER  m. 

FURTHER  DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  UNIVERSE.  LANGUAGE,  AS  AN  EPITOME 
OP  THE  UNIVERSE,  DISTRIBUTED 52 

CHAPTER  IV. 
INHERENT  MEANINGS  OP  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 66 

CHAPTER  V. 

JUSTIFICATION  OP  THE  ASSIGNMENT  (AS  MADE  IN  CHAPTERS  III  AND 
IV)  OF  THE  MEANINGS  OP  THE  ELEMENTS  or  LANGUAGE 76 

CHAPTER  VI. 

DISCRIMINATION  OF  THE  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATPVE  ;  THE  CHAOTIC  AND 
THE  ORDEPVLY  ;  THE  HOMOGENEOUS  AND  THE  HETEROGENEOUS  ;  WITH 
OTHER  FUNDAMENTAL  ONTOLOGICAL  DIFFERENCES  ;  AND  WITH  THE 
CORRESPONDING  LINGUAL  AND  ALPHABETICAL  CLASSIFICATIONS 90 

CHAPTER  VLL 
METHOD  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS  OP  ALWATONI  WORD-BUILDING 103 

CHAPTER  VIH. 

CONTINUED  EXPOSITION  OP  THE  PRINCIPLES  AND  METHOD  OF  ALWASO 
WORD-BUILDING 12 1 

CHAPTER  IK. 
SPECIAL  CONSIDERATION  OF  THE  ARSTRACT  AND  THE  CONCRETE 138 

CHAPTER  X. 

RE-STATEMENT  AND  EXPANSION  OF  THE  CLASSIFICATION  OP  THE  REALMS 
OR  DOMAINS  OP  BEING  ;  WITH  THEIR  NAMINGS  IN  THE  TERMINATIONS 
-10,  -so,  AND  -TO 149 

CHAPTER  XI. 

SPECIAL  AND  TECHNICAL  INSTANCES  OF  THE  COMPOSITION  OP  ALWASO 
WORDS.  ILLUSTRATION  OF  ALWASO  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 158 

CHAPTER  XII. 

FINAL  RrisrME  OF  TUS  SUBJECT 170 

APPENDIXES    pp.  180-201 ;  Index pp.  203-2:24 


CONDENSED    STATEMENT    OF    METHOD. 

(The  Universological.) 

1.  BADICAL  ANALYSIS,  down  to  PRIME  ELEMENTS,  of 
each  Sphere,  and  so,  of  all  Spheres,  of  Being ;  as  of 
Number,  Form,  Matter  (Chemical),  Speech,  etc. 

2.  IDENTIFICATION  (with  each  other),  by  ECHO  OF 
SAMENESS,   (which  is  Correspondence  or  Analogy),   of 
the  Prime  Elements  of  All  Spheres  of  Being. 

3.  Ideal  and,  thence,  Practical  Constructions  (Scien- 
tific and,  thence,  Artistic ')  from  the  Prime  Elements 
(in  Nature)  ;   in  CO-ORDINATE  BADIATIONS  from  the 
same  centre  of  Virtual  Identity ; — the  Logos  or  God" 
like  Centre  of  Abstract  Truth. 

4.  The  Choice   of  a  Modelic  or  Guiding  Sphere, 
and  Eange  of  Development  or  Construction,  in  which 
the  Logos  or  Pure  Beason   (Lat.  "  verbum,"  "  The 
Word  ")  is  most  conspicuous  ;  which  Guiding  Sphere 
is  Language,  the  Prime  Elements  in  which  are  con- 
tained and  summed  up  in  THE  ALPHABET. 

5.  A   New    Cardinary    (or   Transcendental)    and 
Transcendent    Importance    conferred    on   Phonetic 
Analysis,  and  the  Study  of  Language,  and  especially 
of  the  true  or  Universe  Alphabet  of  Human  Speech, 
and  of  Altuato,  the  New  Scientific  Universal  Lan- 
guage ; — in  a  word,  the  Be-installation  and  Benewed 
Glorification  of  the  Acquisition  of  the  Alphabet  (our 
A,  B,  C,  in  a  New  and  Higher  sense),  as  the  Begin- 
ning of  All  perfect  Learning,   and  of  the  Supreme 
Practical  Power  of  the  Human  Bace  ; — with  the  found- 
ing of  a  University  to  promulgate  this  learning. 

Or,  in  short  : 

1.  ANALYSIS  DOWN  TO  ELEMENTS,  2.  COMPARISON  OF 
ELEMENTS,  3.  CONSTRUCTIVE  COMBINATION  OF  ELEMENTS, 
4.  ILLUSTRATIVE  MODEL. 

1  Up  to  Universal  Societary  Organization  and  Government,  the 
Supreme  Art. 


INTRODUCTION. 


1.  An  effort  is  made,  in  the  body  of  this  work,  to 
give  a  very  incipient,  inductive,  and  simple  presenta- 
tion of  the  newly  discovered  Science  of    the   Uni- 
verse.     It  is  thought,  however,   that  it  will  not  be 
inappropriate  to  make  in  this  Introduction  a  some- 
what more  formal  Scientific  Statement  of  the  general 
character  of  Universology. 

2.  There  are,  it  is  discovered,  only  Three  Funda- 
mental PKINCIPLES  in  the  Universe.     These  are  prop- 
erly named  UNISM,   DUISM,   and   TKINISM,    because 
they   are  derived  from,  and  stand  definitely  related 
to,  the  numbers  ONE,  Two,  and  THKEE,  respectively. 
(Unu?,  Duo,  and  Tres  are  the  Latin  words  for  ONE, 
Two,  and  THREE,  and  furnish  the  namings  for  these 
Three  Primordial  Principles.) 

3.  It  is,  however,  convenient  to  speak,  at  times,  of 
other  special  aspects  of  Being  as  Principles,  but  these 
will  be   all  found  to  be  mere  Branchings  of  one  or 
another  of  the  Three  Basis  Principles  just  stated. 

4.  The  first  two  of  these  three  Principles,  UNISM 
and   DUISM,   crop   out   and    reappear    under    many 
forms,  and,  in  the  absence,  heretofore,  of  any  suf- 
ciently  compendious   Generalization,  they  have   re- 


2  INTRODUCTION. 

ceived  a  variety  of  narnings,  fclius :  UNISM  is  called 
Unity,  Sameness,  Centralizing  or  Centripetal  Tend- 
ency, Gravitation,  Arrival,  Conjunction,  Thesis  or 
Synthesis,  Integration,  Combination,  Contraction, 
Generality,  Simplicity,  etc.,  etc.  It  is  the  tendency 
to  unite,  or  towards  Unity,  or  the  manifestation  of  the 
presence  or  results  of  that  tendency,  in  thousands 
of  modes,  in  every  sphere  of  Being. 

5.  DUISM  is  called,  Diversity,  Difference  or  Variety, 
Decentralizing  or  Centrifugal  Tendency,  Repulsion, 
Departure,    Separation,    Antithesis,   Analysis,    Dif- 
ferentiation, Diffusion,  Expansion,  Speciality,  Com- 
plexity, etc.,  etc.     It  is  the  tendency  to  disparting  or 
dividing,  or  the  manifestation  of  the  presence  or  re- 
sults of  that  tendency,  in  thousands  of  modes,   in 
every  sphere  of  Being.     By  its  nature,  it  not  only 
departs  from  the  Unism,  but  it  also  bifurcates  or  di- 
vides, in  departing,  into  Two  (or  more)  Branches,  like 
the  Tines  of  a  fork  ;  and,  in  all  senses,  manifests  an 
inherent  alliance  with  Plurality,  and  PKIMAKILY  or  TYP- 
ICALLY ivith  the  number  Two. 

6.  TBINISM    is    the   Principle   symbolized  by    the 
Totality  of  Being,  or  of  any  particular  being.     It  is 
compounded  of  Unism  and  Duism   as  its  Factors, 
Constituents,  or  Elements.     Hence  it  is  a  Cardinated 
or  Hingewise  Principle,  Entity,  or  Manifestation,  as 
loetween  the  handle  of  the  fork,  which  is  One,   on 
the  one  hand,  and  the  Tines  of  the  fork,  which  are 
Two  (or  moie),  on  the  other  hand.   Trinism  is,  there- 
fore, the  Type  or  Representative  of  the  whole  Fork, 
or  other  Compound  and  Resultant  Object,  and,  so  of 


INTRODUCTION.  d 

All  CONCRETE  or  BEAL  Being — Unism  and  Duism 
being  Abstract  Elements  of  Being  merely,  or,  as  it 
were,  Parts  not  united  in  any  whole.  (The  Latin 
Cardo  means  a  HINGE,  hence  we  have  Cardinal,  Car- 
dinated,  and,  finally,  CARDINISM,  for  the  Hinging- 
Principle.) 

7.  For  this  Compound  Principle,  Trinisin  (if  the 
term  Compound  is  permissible  in  respect  to  a  Prin- 
ciple), there  is  not  only  no  such  multiplicity  of  nara- 
ings  as  there  is  for  Unism  and  Duism   (4,  5),  but 
there  is,  on  the  contrary,  an  almost  complete  deficit 
of  any  naming  whatsoever,  other  than  in  this  new 
Technicality  of    Universology,     Trinisin  itself  ;   this 
Hinging  Complexity,  which  is  the  Type  or  Plan  of  all 
Eeal  Existence,  being  so  subtle  as  to  have,  in  a  great 
measure,  escaped  observation.     The  "  Synthesis  '    of 
Fichte  and  Hegel,  as  differing  from  "  Thesis,"  means, 
however,  virtually  Trinism.     (B.  O.  t.  380.) 

8.  This  is,  then,  the  first  statement  of  strictly  Uni- 
versal and  Exhaustive  Principles,  in  Science.     The  im- 
portance of  the  discovery  which  has  led  to  the  pos- 
sibility of  formulating  such  a  statement  will  gradually 
appear.     As   these   same   Principles   recur,   like  an 
echo,  in  every  department  of  being,  and  consequently, 
in  all  the  sciences,  simply  disguised  by  superficial  dif- 
ferences, it  results  that  there  exists  a  Grand  Under- 
lying Unity  of  the  Sciences  ;  that  there  is,  in  fine,  but 
one  Science,  of  which  the  Special  Sciences  are  merely 
branches  or  special  manifestations.     This  One  Science 
is  UNIVERSOLOGY.     It  is  based  on  Universal  Analogy, 
or  the  Universal  System  of  Occult  Correspondences, 


INTRODUCTION. 

which  results,  in  tarn,  from  this  constant  re-echoing 9 
but  in  new  and  specific  relations,  of  the  same  three 
Primitive  Principles,  (Unism,  Duism,  and  Trinism), 
throughout  all  Domains.  (62,  ). 

9.  The   first   and   simplest   action   of  the   human 
mind,  when  it  begins  to  attend,  is  governed  by  the 
perception  of  Analogy ;  but  as  the  LAW  of  Analogy 
is  not  then  understood,  the  result  is  a  riot  of  the 
imagination,  and  a  total  want  of  the  spirit  of  scien- 
tific exactitude.     Thus  we  may  suppose  some  early 
speculator,  fascinated  by  the  idea  of  a  natural  har- 
mony of  numbers,  affirming  that  there  must  be  24 
chemical    elements   because   there   are    twenty-four 
hours   in   the   day  (12.)     This  loosely  generalizing 
method  of  reasoning  was  The  Anticipatory  Method  in 
Science  (improperly  dignified  as  "  Deductive  ").     In 
the  technicalities  of  Universology  it  is  strictly  de- 
scribed   as   The   Unismal    Stage    of    the  Scientific 
Mental  Evolution  ;  (allied  in  a  variety  of  senses  with 
Primality  and  the  Number  One.) 

10.  The  Baconian   or  Inductive  Scientists,  rightly 
disgusted  and  repelled  by  such  vague  guessing  in  the 
name  of  Science,  instituted  the  Method  of  exact  ob- 
servation, which  now  prevails  in  the  scientific  world, 
and  which  has  led  to  such  grand  results  ;  but  which 
has  also  the  bad  effect  of  making  of  our  Scientific 
men,  for  the  most  part,  mere  Specialists,  in  a  great 
degree  incapable  of  any  broad  or  generalizing  idea, 
and  even  somewhat  so  of  applying  their  own   attri- 
bute of  precision  in  any  other  than  the  exact  direc- 
tion in  which  they  may  have  adjusted  the  tube  of 


INTRODUCTION.  5 

their  mental  microscope.  As  a  natural  result  of  their 
revolt  against  the  first  vague  and  unscientific  uses  of 
Analogy,  they  have  gone  to  the  opposite  extreme, 
and  have  become  the  Gradgrinds  of  Science,  abound- 
ing in  facts,  but  alike  destitute  of  any  artistic  or 
constructive  idea  in  arranging  or  disposing  of  their 
facts,  and  oblivious  of  any  underlying  and  deeper 
Law  which  has  originated  the  facts  and  guided  in 
their  distribution.  The  Stage  of  Scientific  Develop- 
ment here  described  is  the  Inductive  Stage.  With  no 
knowledge  of  Universal  a  priori  Laws,  but  close,  pa- 
tient and  exact  in  isolated  spheres  of  inquiry,  and  with 
an  immense  array  of  scientific  successes  at  its  back, 
the  glory  and  glare  of  its  triumph  somewhat  ob- 
scures to  the  devotees  of  this  school  the  utter  want 
of  coherence,  or  of  any  spirit  of  systematic  Unity  in 
their  fragmentary  pursuits.  (Technically  this  is  the 
Ascending  Wing  of  the  Duismal  Stage  of  the  Scien- 
tific Mental  Evolution  ;  allied  in  a  variety  of  senses 
with  Sequence  or  Secondisni  and  the  number  Two.) 

11.  At  length,  the  impulse  of  broader  and  pro- 
founder  thought  induces  us,  as  seekers  after  Unity  of 
System  in  the  Universe,  to  recur  to  the  idea  of 
Universal  Underlying  Principles  of  Analogy,  carrying 
back  to  the  inquiry,  now,  for  the  first  time,  the  Spirit 
of  Inductive  Precision  borrowed  from  the  Second 
Stage,  so  modified  as  to  apply  to  this  new  field  of 
investigation  ;  to  seek  by  positive  discovery  for  the 
revelation  of  those  Laws,  and  for  the  Serial  method 
of  their  development,  making  of  them  a  veritable 
fountain-head  of  all  Special  Laws,  a  spheral  expaii- 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

• 

sion  of  truth  crossing  all  the  lines  of  existing  knowl- 
edges, and  combining  them,  as  levels  cross  perpen- 
diculars, or  as  chords  cross  and  unite  various  radii  of 
a  circle,  and  so  as  thereby  to  exert  a  new  and 
regulative  influence  over  all  the  future  achievements 
of  mind.  Such  a  discovery  is  now  made,  and  constitutes 
Universolocjy.  Analogy  so  understood,  is  the  Anti- 
podes of  Analogy  as  first  vaguely  intuited,  and  to 
which  the  Inductive  Scientific  World  so  properly 
opposed  itself.  But,  nevertheless,  it  is  peculiarly 
liable  to  be  confounded,  at  the  first  blush,  with  the 
earlier  and  imperfect  method,  and,  indeed,  will  con- 
tinue to  be  so,  until  thorough  investigation  shall 
have  dissipated  this  erroneous  impression.  It  will 
be  supposed  that  the  same  objections  lie  against  it  as 
to  that  earliest  and  simplest  stage  of  scientific  rea- 
soning, from  wliicli  it  is,  however,  only  more  remote  than 
the  Second  or  Inductive  Stage  itself.  It  is,  indeed, 
merely  the  larger,  and,  as  it  were,  the  final  applica- 
tion of  the  Inductive  Principle,  culminating  in  the 
establishment  of  a  Legitimate  Universal  Deductive 
Method,  in  aid  of,  while  yet,  in  part,  transcending 
Induction. 

12.  (This  new  Stage  of  Science  is  technically  the 
Descending  Wing  of  the  Duismal  Stage  of  the  Scien- 
tific Mental  Evolution  lapping  over  upon  the  Trinis- 
mal  or  Integral  Method  and  governing  it,  as  Induc- 
tion arose,  at  the  other  extreme,  out  of  the  Unismal 
Stage.  B.  O.  c.  49,  t.  136.)  This  Phase  of  Science 
is  new,  and  can  only  be  rightly  judged  of  by  those 
who  make  themselves  competent,  ly  the  specific  study 


INTRODUCTION.  7 

of  Universology  itself.  The  Scientific  Men  of  the 
Fractional  Duismal  Stage  (the  Existing  Scientific 
world;  are,  for  the  most  part,  no  better  prepared  to 
criticise  Universology,  than  the  intelligent  public  at 
large  ;  and,  in  respect  to  prejudice,  they  are  far  less 
so.  The  life-long  habits  of  a  mind  bent  persistently 
in  another  direction  will  require  some  time  to  re- 
adjust themselves  to  a  system  of  thought  claiming 
to  be  as  much  in  advance  of  their  stage  of  Scientific 
evolution  as  theirs  is  in  advance  of  that  with  which 
they  will  tend,  and  perhaps  in  some  cases  endeavor, 
to  confound  it.1  The  captains  of  sailing  craft, 

1  I  commit  no  breach  of  confidence  by  stating  the  views  of  a 
distinguished  and  leading  scientist  on  this  subject  as  they  were 
delivered  to  me  in  the  course  of  conversation,  and  as  they  have 
been,  in  part,  published  by  himself,  passim,  in  his  writings.  Some 
five  or  six  years  ago,  and  when  the  discovery  of  Universology  was 
far  less  advanced  than  at  present,  I  called  on  Prof.  Louis  Agassiz 
to  request  him  to  listen  to  some  preliminary  statement,  and  to 
examine  certain  papers  and  diagrams  in  relation  to  the  new 
science.  He  had  been  aware,  in  part,  for  some  years  of  the  nature 
of  my  pursuits,  and  on  other  but  related  subjects  had  taken  a  very 
kindly  interest  in  my  labors. 

On  this  occasion  he  listened  just  long  enough  to  ascertain  the 
nature  of  my  request  and  claims,  when  he  declined  to  enter  upon 
the  subject  any  farther,  saying  in  substance  as  follows:  I  believe  in 
the  existence,  in  the  nature  of  things,  of  just  such  a  science  as  you 
claim  to  have  discovered;  and  in  this  I  differ  from  most  scientific 
mer>  who  seem  as  yet  to  have  no  conception  of  Unity  of  Law,  and 
who  would  therefore  regard  your  whole  pretension  as  Utopian. 
Farther  than  this,  I  believe,  that  we  are,  just  in  this  age,  on  the 
verge  of  making  the  discovery  :  and  that  somebody  will  make  it. 
Whether  you  have  it,  or  not,  I  am,  of  course,  unable  to  say.  The 
presumption  is  strongly  against  any  individual  claimant.  To 


8  INTKODUCTION. 

would,  as  a  class,  have  been  the  last  persons,  to 
comprehend  or  approve  of  a  scheme  for  navigating 
the  ocean  by  steam.  When,  for  example,  Universol- 
ogy  shall  be  found  to  affirm  that  there  are  at  least 
strong  scientific  presumptions  and  potent  scientific 


determine  the  point  would  require  extensive  and  critical  examina- 
tion. That  I  am  not  prepared  to  give, — or,  rather,  not  until  your 
book  is  fairly  printed  and  laid  before  me  in  that  shape.  Nor  do  I 
know  that  I  am  competent,  or  any  more  competent  than  any  intel- 
ligent man,  to  judge  of  it.  Indeed,  I  doubt,  whether,  if  you  have 
all  you  claim,  the  Scientific  men,  so-called,  will  be  the  first  to  ap- 
preciate it.  We  are,  he  added,  all  intense  specialists,  and  when  the 
Unitary  Science  comes  in  the  world,  it  will  be  something  so 
entirely  aside  from  our  fixed  habits  of  thought  that  I  think  it  will 
find  its  first  appreciators,  probably,  among  men  of  enlarged  and 
general  culture,  rather  than  among  Specialists  in  Science. 

What,  then,  I  asked,  am  I  to  do  ?  Is  there  no  presiding  Scientific 
body  competent  and  prepared  to  render  a  verdict  on  my  labors  ? 
What  of  the  French  Academy  ?  To  these  questions  he  replied  :  If 
you  have  what  you  think  you  have,  God  help  you !  You  must 
work  along  as  Christ  did,  and  find,  first,  one  disciple  here  and  one 
there,  from  all  classes;  from,  most  likely,  what  scientific  men 
would  call  '  the  common  people  ! '  There  is  no  body  of  Scientific 
men  on  earth  competent  or  ready  to  enter  upon  such  an  investiga- 
tion, and  as  to  the  French  Academy,  they  have  had  a  by-law  stand- 
i:i^  for  forty  years  which  would  prohibit  them  from  even  enter- 
taining the  consideration  of  the  subject. 

We  are,  he  repeated,  all  intense  specialists.  My  own  son  is 
laboring  somewhat  in  your  direction,  [the  Mathematics  of  Zoology, 
a  preeminent  branch  of  Universological  Science],  and  I  decline 
even  to  look  at  his  diagrams.  I  confine  myself  to  the  merely 
Observational  study  of  a  small  branch  of  zoology,  and  have  more 
than  I  can  possibly  do.  You  will  find  all  the  rest  of  us  [Specialists] 
in  the  same  fix,  and  the  most  difficult  people  in  the  world  to  call  off 
to  look  at  any  thing  new,  and  not  of  our  specialty.  There,  ho 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

reasons  for  believing  that  64  is  a  Typical  Number,  by 
which  the  distribution  of  Chemical  Elements,  along 
with  that  of  many  other  things,  has  been  regulated 
by  Nature,  and  that  probably  the  final  number  of 
Elements  will  not  deviate  greatly  from  this  scale,  the 
rigid  inductionist  will  be  prone  to  confound  the 
statement,  at  once,  with  the  rhapsodic  guess  of  the 
early  and  ignorant  speculator  who  should  have  as- 
sumed that  there  must  be  24  elements  because  there 
are  24  hours  in  a  day  (9)  ;  and,  if  induced  to  examine 
the  grounds  of  the  new  statement  until  otherwise 
he  might  concede  its  probability,  he  falls  upon  an- 
other objection,  namely,  that  the  number  of  elements 
even  now  known  is  not  exactly  64,  but  is  only  63,  or 
is  already  67,  or  some  other  proximate  number. 
To  this  the  Universological  answer  is,  that, 
the  Law  in  Concrete  Spheres,  like  this,  is  Prox- 
imate Accuracy,  and  that  Absolute  Accuracy  belongs 
only  to  Abstract  Spheres;  that  there  is  in  Nature, 
OVERLAPPING,  MARGINAL  IMPERFECTION  (See  "  Basic 
Outline  ")  and  other  modifying  Principles  which  it  is, 
in  part,  the  business  of  Universology  to  point  out ; 
so  that  the  very  terms  of  the  question  can  only  be 


added,  is  where  we  are  ;  we  may  all  go  to  the  bad  place  for  it ;  but 
there  is  just  where  we  are. 

Of  course,  Prof.  Agassiz,  in  what  he  said  of  himself  was  true 
only  in  respect  to  the  Jidbit  of  his  life,  and  not  at  all  so  in  respect 
to  the  caliber  of  his  mind,  or  the  broader  impulsions  of  his  taste 
even.  His  strong  drift  towards  Generality  and  Universality  of 
thought  is  attested  by  his  writings  despite  of  his  conscientious 
fidelity  to  the  smaller  sphere.  S.  P.  A. 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

properly  understood  by  a  preliminary  study  of  Uni- 
versology  itself.  In  a  word,  in  such  a  sphere,  math- 
ematical exactitude  would  refute  rather  than  confirm 
the  claims  of  the  New  Science,  so  that,  in  such  a  realm, 
nearly,  about,  proximately,  etc.,  are  legitimate  Scientific 
expressions.  No  Classification  in  Natural  Science 
is  or  can  be  exact,  for  the  reason  that  Nature  is  only 
proximately  mathematical.  It  is  only  by  "  squeez- 
ing "  and  "  stretching  "  that  she  can  be  packed  like 
herrings  in  a  box,  within  the  theoretical  exactitudes 
of  adjustment.  Still  other  objections  will  arise,  and 
to  meet  these,  other  answers  must  be  extracted  from 
the  bowels  of  the  New  Science  itself. 

13.  I  will  illustrate,  a  little  further,  the  liabilities 
of  the  ordinary  scientist  to  mistake,  in  judging  of 
Analogical  Science.  An  arrangement  occurs,  in 
Universology,  of  the  Chemical  Elements,  by  which 
the  Non-Metals  are  recognized  as  generwdtty  Light, 
Upward-tending,  Aerial,  and  Diaphanous,  and  as,  in 
that  sense,  allied  (not  in  any  known  Chemical  sense, 
but  in  a  new  sense  not  heretofore  observed),  with  the 
Atmosphere  above  the  surface  of  the  Earth,  and  so 
with  the  "  Face  of  Day,"  or  with  the  Main  Elevation 
and  Front  aspect  of  the  Great  World-Cathedral,  the 
Dome-of-Earth-and-Heaven,  and  typically,  or  repre- 
sentatively, therefore,  with  the  Frontal  Elevation  of  any 
House,  Edifice,  or  Tent  pie  :  and  the  Metals  are  recog- 
nized, on  the  contrary,  as  generically  Heavy,  Dark- 
ling, Obscure,  or  Downward-tending,  or  Earthly,  in 
the  same  Analogical  Sense,  and  so,  in  tlml  sv//.sv,  as 
allied  with  the  Subterranean  and  otherwise  Obscure 


INTRODUCTION.  11 

Position  in  Space,  or  with  the  Foundation-and-Back 
or  the  Remote  Depths  of  an  Edifice— the  Metals 
being  therefore  more  numerous  than  the  Non-Metals 
in  the  general  proportion  of  3  to  1,  or  of  a  duplica- 
tion both  downward  and  backward. 

14  Further,  it  is  observed,  that  the  Non-Metals, 
Aerial,  Upward-and- Front-wise-tending,  or,  as  it  were, 
visibly  presentative,  are  generically  Electro-Negative, 
or  allied  with  the  Lightning,  the  Grand  Type,  and, 
as  it  were,  Fountain,  of  Electricity  in  the  Cosmos, 
and  with  its  Aerial  Position  overhead,  or  above  ;  and 
Electro-Negative  because  they  are  so  allied,  since 
things  are  not  attracted  to  the  Pole  of  Being  which 
is  identical  with  their  own  nature  ;  they,  therefore, 
being  of  the  nature  of  the  Lightning  and  of  the 
Light  (or  Front-Presence)  are  attracted  to  the 
Metals,  which  are  of  the  nature  of  the  Earth  beneath, 
and  of  Obscurity,  or  of  that  region  of  the  Edifice  (or 
of  the  Human  Body,  to  which  the  Edifice  is  an  Ad- 
justment) which  is  posited  doivmvard  and  behind. 
On  the  contrary,  the  Metals,  being  "  of  the  Earth, 
earthy,"  are,  for  thai  reason,  Electro-Positive,  or 
capable  of  attracting  the  Lightning,  and  of  being 
attracted  by  it. 

15.  To  represent  these  Great  New  Aspects  of 
Science,  which,  it  will  be  subsequently  found,  conduct 
to  a  thousand  important  Scientific  consequences  as 
remote  from  this  beginning  as  the  Electric  Telegraph 
from  Franklin's  Kite,  and  yet  as  logically  connected 
with  it,  the  Architectural  Figure  or  Diagram  of  an 
Edifice  is  presented — not  merely  as  a  bauble,  nor 


12  INTRODUCTION. 

even  as  a  Mnemonic  aid,  (though  of  infinite  im- 
portance in  this  respect  to  furnish,  educationally,  a 
rapid  preliminary  understanding  of  Chemical  Facts 
and  Laws)  but  as  a  profoundly  true  Scientific 
Analogue.  The  Front  Elevation  of  this  Edifice  is 
assigned  to  a  significant  Grouping  of  the  Non-Metal- 
lic Substances  of  Chemistry,  in  which  many  minor 
Analogies  are  embodied  ;  and  the  Foundations  and 
Back-lying  portions  of  the  Building  are  assigned  to 
the  more  numerous  Metals,  according  to  their  relative 
degrees  of  prominence  (or  Frontness),  or  of  Obscur- 
ity (or  Downness  and  Backness).  Finally,  the  Ana- 
logical Relationship  of  the  Lightning  and  the  Earth 
to  the  Electro-Negative  and  Electro -Positive  Char- 
acters of  the  Elements  is  symbolically  exhibited  in 
the  Diagram,  by  the  Lightning-Flash,  painted  or 
drawn  as  striking  the  Top-and -Front  of  the  Edifice, 
and  as  penetrating  it,  and  passing  down  and  losing 
itself,  by  satisfying  its  attraction,  in  the  Metallic 
Fundamenta  and  Posterior  portions  of  the  object 
visited. 

16.  This  Symbolic  Edifice  or  Temple  of  the  Ele- 
ments is  then  presented,  we  will  assume,  to  learned 
Specialists  of  the  Old  or  Duismal  Order  of  Science 
for  their  judgment  and  appreciation.  But  it  is  highly 
probable  that  they  will  perceive  absolutely  nothing 
of  the  great  leading  ideas  which  the  Temple  is  in- 
tended to  exemplify.  They  will  very  likely  fasten, 
instead,  their  microscopic  vision  upon  certain  details 
in  the  grouping  of  the  Elements.  They  may,  per- 
chance, find  that  exact  ratios  have  been  theoretically 


INTRODUCTION.  13 

assigned  where  their  experience  has  taught  them 
that  the  limits  of  classes  are  inexact  or  variant — a 
fact  which  Universology  not  only  points  out  but  ac- 
counts for,  (as  they  are  unable  to  do),  if  they  would 
be  patient  to  study  it ;  but  they  have  no  patience  for 
such  novelties.  This  first  apparent  discrepancy 
with  what  they  already  know  is  enough  for  them, 
and  with,  perhaps,  five  minutes  examination  of  a 
great  new  subject,  and  Method,  in  science,  they  de- 
cide adversely  ;  and  imagine  they  have  investigated 
it,  and  that  their  opinions  should  be  the  guide  of 
others  who  have  not  done  so. 

17.  The  fact  is,  that,  for  the  true  appreciation,  or, 
with  many,  for  any  appreciation  whatever,  of  Scien- 
tific Analogy,  a  special  training  of  a  set  of  mental 
faculties  previously  neglected  is  requisite,  as  much 
so  as  when  we  would  develop  the  Musical  Ear,  or  the 
Artistic  Eye  ;  and  the  ordinary  training  of  the  Spe- 
cialists in  Science  is  adverse  rather  than  favorable  to 
the  ready  acquisition  of  this  new  kind  of  knowledge. 
This  order  of  men,  eminently  respectable  in  their 
own  sphere,  will  have  to  be  induced  by  various 
means,  some  of  them,  perhaps,  somewhat  stringently 
coerced,  into  a  respectful  deference  for  the  subject  to 
be  studied,  When,  however,  they  shall  have  ac- 
quired the  new  point  of  view  and  the  requisite  new 
habits  of  thought,  and  shall  have  become  truly  pos- 
sessed of  the  facts  and  principles  of  the  New  Science, 
their  old  and  present  habits  of  exactitude  and  pre- 
cision will  supervene,  and  will  be  invaluable  as  aids 
to  their  own  better  understanding  of  the  subject,  and 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

for  the  detailed  and  elaborate  expansion  of  Univer- 
sologj  itself.  At  present  they  are  apt  to  be  content 
with"  their  accumulation  of  mere  facts,  or  with  at  the 
most  some  most  convenient  classification  of  the  facts. 
They  rarely  inquire  into  what  Richard  Owen  calls 
the  Meaning  of  the  Facts.  For  example,  they  under- 
stand by  Electro-Negative,  that  a  Substance  watched 
in  the  processes  of  the  Laboratory  comports  itself  in 
a  particular  manner ;  that  is  to  say,  that,  it  passes, 
in  the  Electro-Magnetic  Bath,  to  the  Positive  Pole 
of  the  Battery ;  and  by  Electro-Positive  they  under- 
stand the  opposite  occurrence ;  but  ask  them  why 
this  is  so,  and  they  have  not  even  a  theory  upon  the 
subject.  If  told  that  this  is  because  Electro-Negative 
bodies  are  of  a  similar  kind  as,  or  are,  so  to  speak, 
sympathetic  with,  the  Lightning,  and  the  Air,  and  the 
Light,  with  the  Front-Face  and  Elevation  of  an  Edi- 
fice, and  with  the  Face  and  Brow  of  a  Man,  and  so 
with  Heaven  and  the  elevated  region  of  the  Sun,  and 
that,  for  that  reason,  they  comport  themselves  like 
the  Lightning ;  and  that  Electro-Positive  Bodies  are, 
on  the  contrary,  sympathetic  with  the  Earth  and  the 
Darkness,  and  with  the  Lower  and  Posterior  portions 
of  a  House  or  a  Man,  and  so  with  Hell-ward  Direc- 
tion or  the  Antipodes,  and  the  Earth's  shadow,  all 
this  would  be  to  talk  to  them  in  an  unknown  tongue  ; 
or,  at  least,  it  would  be  mere  poetry  and  imagination  ; 
and  yet  Science  has  now  to  rise  to  this  new  range  of 
considerations,  and  they  will,  in  the  end,  transcend 
infinitely  in  importance  all  that  Science  now  means, 
and  Avill  bind  every  variety  of  knowledge,  from  that 


INTRODUCTION.  15 

of  the  Hysop  on  the  wall,  up  to  that  of  the  being 
and  nature  of  God,  into  one  compact  and  organic 
whole. 

18.  Universology,  for  the  reasons  above  stated,  de- 
clines the  jurisdiction  of  the  technically  so  called 
learned  or  Scientific  world  as  a  special  body  of 
judges,  and  comes  for  understanding  and  apprecia- 
tion to  the  general  mind  of  humanity,  learned  and 
unlearned  alike,  according  to  inherent  capacity.  It 
will  rather  arraign  and  judge  the  scientific  world 
than  submit  to  be  judged  by  it.  It  is  always  well  to 
remember  that  "  NEW  THINGS  ARE  NEW,"  and  that  they 
must  be  comprehended,  before  they  can  be  intelligibly  or 
usefully  criticised.1 

1  Since  writing  the  last  preceding  few  paragraphs  (and  some  of 
the  preceding  ones  of  similar  tenor)  I  have  received  so  much 
genuine  courtesy  from  representative  men  in  the  scientific  world, 
and  my  incipient  exposition  of  the  claims  and  principles  of  Uni- 
versology have  been  accepted  by  them  so  cordially  and  in  so  cath- 
olic a  spirit,  that  I  have  been  greatly  tempted  to  expunge  this 
criticism  upon  the  scientific  position  and  tendencies  of  Specialists  ; 
but,  on  further  reflection,  and  recurring  to  the  larger  scope  of  facts, 
as  well  as  to  the  principles  themselves  upon  which  this  judgment 
is  pronounced,  I  conclude  to  let  it  remain  as  written,  holding  the 
conviction  that  it  will  find  a  sufficiently  extended  field  of  applica- 
tion. If  some  eminent  men  are  more  liberal,  it  is  because  they  are 
ceasing  to  be  mere  specialists,  and  are  rapidly  tending,  themselves, 
towards  a  true  Universological  expansion.  s.  P.  A. 


CHAPTER  I 

PRELIMINARY!   DISCRIMINATIONS  AND  DEFINITIONS. - 
OBJECTIONS   ANSWERED. 

19.  There   is  in    the    Greek  language  the  word 
Logos,  which  meant  primarily  the  same  among  the 
Greeks  as  Word  means  in  English.     It  occurs  in  the 
beginning  of  the  Gospel  of   St.  John,   and  is  there 
translated  by  "The   Word."     "  In  the  beginning  was 
the  Word,  and  the  Word  was  with  God,  and  the  Word 
was  God."     But  Logos  also  meant,  at  times,  Dis- 
course or  Language,  and  so,  indeed,  does  the  English 
Word,  as  when  we  call  the  Scriptures  "  the  Word  of 
God."      Logos  also  signified  more  distinctively  the 
meaning  of  the  word,  and  thence,  also,  the  underlying 
MEANING  of  Discourse,  and  thence,  again,  Reason  or 
Reasoning,  so  that  Logic  which  is  the  Science  of  the 
Reasoning  Process,  and,  in  the  larger  sense,  Intrinsic 
Laiv,  in  the  nature  of  things,  is  itself  immediately  de- 
rived from  Logos.     It  is  indeed  in  this  sense,  that  of 
The  Absolute  and  Pure  Reason,  that  the  Logos  is  said 
by  the  Evangelist  to  be  equal  with  God,  and  to  be, 
indeed,  the  Very  God.    (199,  215,  216.) 

20.  This  same  Greek  word  Logos  has  also  been 
affixed  or  added  to  many  other  words  as  an  Ending 


18  LOGOS  AND   ITS   DERIVATIVES. 

* 

or  Termination,  in  English  and  several  other  lan- 
guages, to  mean  Science,  in  the  sense  of  a  Discourse 
or  Treatise  about  the  subject  named  by  the  root- 
word  to  which  it  is  so  added.  Geology,  for  instance, 
is  derived  from  the  Greek  word  ge,  meaning  THE 
EARTH,  and  Logos,  and  means  therefore  a  Discourse 
about  the  Earth,  as  Geography  means  a  writing 
about  the  Earth,  from  the  same  ge  and  graphein,  TO 
WRITE.  Numerous  similar  derivatives  will  imme- 
diately occur  to  the  mind,  without  specification.  (The 
g  of  ge  was  originally  hard  as  in  the  English  go,  but 
has  been  softened  by  usage  in  English  to  the  sound 

of./)- 

21.  It  will  be  noticed  that  Ge  and  Logos  would, 

alone,  make  Ge-logy  and  not  Ge-o-logy.  The  o  at  the 
middle  of  the  word  is  introduced  for  the  sake  of 
euphony  merely,  or  to  make  the  sound  of  the  word 
more  agreeable,  and  is  denominated  in  the  technical- 
ity of  Etymology,  the  connecting-vowel.  These  de- 
tails belong  to  the  process  of  word-building  which 
will  receive  a  new  and  remarkable  expansion  in  im- 
mediate connection  with  this  new  Science  of  the 
Universe,  and,  in  part,  further  on  in  the  present 
work. 

22.  While  a  Science  is  thus  named  etymologically 
as  a  Discourse  about  some  given  subject,  and  while 
it  is  really  that,  it  is  still  something  more   than   a 
mere  Discourse.     It  is  not  every  discourse,  or  every 
kind  of  talk  about  a  subject,  which  is  the  Science  of 
that  subject.     The  Science  of  a  Subject,  or  of  any 
Domain  or  Department  of  Being  is,  on  the  contrary, 


DOMAINS   OF  EXISTENCE.  19 

a  Systematic,  Orderly,  and  somewhat  Complete  Ar- 
rangement of  what  is  certainly  knoivn  or  held  to  be 
knotvn,  and  of  wliat  is  important  to  be  knoivn,  in  re- 
spect to  the  particular  subject  or  Department  of 
Being  treated  of.  It  is  so,  that  the  Animal  Kingdom, 
for  example,  furnishes,  as  a  subject  or  Domain  of 
Being,  the  Science  which  is  called  Zoology  (Gr.  zoe, 
LIFE,  and  logos,  DISCOURSE).  Zoology  is  therefore  a 
regular  and  systematized  treatment  or  exposition  of 
the  knowledge  which  has  been  acquired  in  respect  to 
animals,  as  a  Domain  of  Observation  and  Thought. 
It  is  the  same  in  respect  to  other  Sciences  relating 
to  other  Domains. 

23.  It  will  be  understood  from  the  preceding  para- 
graph what  is  meant  by  a  Domain  of  Existence,  or 
of  Being,  or  of  the  Universe,  or  of  Observation  and 
Thought ;  (for  all   of   these  terms  will  occur,  from 
time  to  time,  as    substantially  synonymous).      The 
Animals  are  such  a  Domain,  the  Science  of  which  is 
Zoology  or  Animalogy.     Plants  (Trees,  etc.)  are  an- 
other such  Domain,  the  Science  of  which  is  Botany 
or  Vegetalogy.     Form  is  such  a  Domain,  the  Science 
of  which  is  Morphology  (Gr.  morplie,  EOKM).    Number 
is  such  a  Domain,  the  Science  of  which  is  Abstract 
Mathematics  or  Numerology,   (Arithmetic,  Algebra, 
etc.). 

24.  Domains  of  Being  are  larger  or  smaller  in  ex- 
tent ;  from  the  Universe  itself,  which  is  collectively 
no  other  than  such  a  Domain,  down  to  the  smallest 
sphere  or  Realm  which  it  may  be  practically  proper 
to  recognize  as  worthy  to  be  the  subject  of  a  distinct 


20  BRANCHINGS   OF  THE   UNIVERSE. 

Science.  The  largest  Domain  of  Being,  which  is  the 
Universe  itself,  first  splits  up  into  a  group  of  sub- 
ordinate but  yet  immensely  extended  Domains, 
which  furnish  Grand  or  Collective  Sciences  corres- 
ponding to  them  ;  these  split  up,  in  turn,  into  Groups 
of  smaller,  and  then  of  still  smaller  Domains,  down  to 
those  requisite  degrees  of  minuteness  which  furnish 
the  limits  of  the  ordinary  special  Sciences,  and  down 
to  the  Branches  or  Departments  of  these  Special 
Sciences  ;  so  that  the  Universe  itself,  with  all  its  sub- 
ordinate Departments  of  Being  is,  theoretically,  subject 
to  a  grand  System  of  Distribution  and  Classification, 
similar  in  principle  to  that  by  ivhich  a  Particular  Do- 
main, the  Animal  Kingdom,  for  example,  is  scientifically 
distributed  and  classified  or  arranged. 

25.  Any  single  thing,  or  collection  of  things,  or 
objects,  or  ideas  whatsoever,  is  a  Domain,  it  may  be 
a  very  small  and  comparatively  insignificant  one,  of 
Universal  Being.  A  bureau  or  a  table,  or  better  let 
us  say,  all  bureaus  or  all  tables,  collectively,  are,  in 
each  case,  such  a  Domain ;  and  by  affixing  the  termi- 
nation -logy,  or  the  English  -lore,  cognate  with  the 
German  -lehre  actually  used  for  this  purpose,  we 
might  say,  Bureau-ology  or  Bureau-lore  or  Tabul- 
ology  or  Table-lore,  for  the  names  of  such  Sciences. 
There  are,  however,  several  objections  to  this  proce- 
dure. The  first  is  to  what  is  called  Lingual  Hybridity, 
which  is  the  combining  of  words  derived  from  dif- 
ferent languages  somewhat  like  the  crossing  of 
breeds  and  species  among  animals.  Another  is  th.it 
these  particular  applications  of  the  Principle  of 


UNIVERSOLOGICAL   CLASSIFICATION.  21 

Word-Building  are  unusual,  and  therefore  sound  bar- 
barous to  our  ears.  Hence  they  are  technically 
called  Barbarisms.  But  the  main  objection,  and  the 
only  one  really  important,  is  that  already  intimated, 
namely,  that  these  are  unimportant  Domains,  not 
sufficient  to  sustain  the  dignity  of  an  independent 
Science.  The  supposed  cases  will  serve  however  to 
illustrate  the  manner  in  which  Scientific  men  have 
devised  names  for  new  Sciences,  or  in  which  such 
namings  spontaneously  spring  up  amidst  the  usages 
of  the  Scientific  World  and  gradually  pass  into  the 
common  body  of  Language. 

26.  It  will  appear  from  the  preceding  explanation 
that  it  is  an  important,  and,  at  the  same  time,  a  diffi- 
cult thing,  to  determine  just  what  and  how  many 
sciences  there  should  be  recognized  or  held  to  exist. 
It  is  much  like  the  question  of  how  many  colors 
there  are,  when  in  point  of  fact,  colors  are  either 
very  few,  as  Three,  or  Seven,  or  perhaps  Twelve,  as 
somewhat  primary,  or  else  infinitely  numerous,  ac- 
cording to  the  generality  or  the  minuteness  of  our 
discriminations.  The  actual  origin  of  New  Sciences, 
or  their  recognition  as  such,  has  been,  heretofore, 
pretty  nearly  left  to  chance  ;  but  various  attempts 
have  been  made,  since  the  incipiency  of  such  effort 
with  Aristotle  among  the  Greeks,  to  enumerate  and 
distribute  or  classify  the  Sciences.  Bacon,  D'Alem- 
bert,  Auguste  Cornte,  Ampere,  Herbert  Spencer  and 
others,  have  been  engaged  in  this  important  under- 
taking, the  difficulty  of  which  has  hitherto  prevented  it 
f L'orn  having  been  fully  and  satisfactorily  accomplished. 


22  A  SCIENCE   OF  THE   UNIVERSE. 

27.  It  has  not,  perhaps,  been  clearly  seen,  that,  to 
classify  the  Sciences  is  to  classify  the  Domains  of 
Universal  Being  to  which  the  Sciences  relate,  and 
hence  to  classify  the  Universe,  or,  at  all  events,  that 
portion  of  it  which  is  systematically  known  to  us  ; 
and  that  a  true  and  exhaustive  classification  of  the 
Sciences  would  be  no  less  than,  in  a  sense  at  least,  a 
Science  of  the  Universe  itself.     The  difficulty  of  the 
undertaking  is,  therefore,  such,  that  we  need  not  be 
surprised  that  it  should  have  achieved  no  more  than 
a  partial  success.     It  is  true,  however,  that  a  proper 
Science  of  the  Universe  is  still  far  more  than  a  mere 
classification  of  the  Sciences,  since  its  Principles  must 
enter  into  the  body  of  each  of  the  Special  Sciences 
and  classify  also  all  the  details  and  particulars  with- 
in them  all. 

28.  It   results,  from   what    has    been    previously 
shown,  that  just  as  truly  as  there  may  be,  and  as 
there  are,  Sciences  of  various  special  parts  or  Do- 
mains of  the  Universe,  so  there  may  be  and  indeed 
should  be  wrought  out  and  systematically  exhibited, 
a  Science  of  the   Universe  itself,    as   the  One,  Grand, 
All-inclusive  Domain.     Such  a  Science  ivould  then  le 
rightly  denominated  UNIVERSOLOGY.     Our  knowledge 
of  the  parts  of  a  subject  can  only  be  fragmentary 
and  very  imperfect  so  long  as  we  have  not  some  sys- 
tematic knowledge  of  the  whole  subject,  and,  thereby, 
of  the  relation  of  the  parts  to  each  other  and  to  the 
grand  whole. 

29.  To  the  possibility  of  the  existence  of  an  actual 
and  valid  Science  of  the  Universe  several  objections 


OBJECTION  ANSWERED.  23 

naturally  arise,  which  it  will  be  appropriate,  at  this 
point,  to  consider  and  remove. 

30.  It  is  first  objected  that  the  achievement  of  the 
discovery  of  such  a  Science  must  be  impossible  on 
account  of  the  infinite  extent  of  the  Subject  or  Do- 
main.    It  is  obviously  impossible,  it  is  said,  that  any 
one  individual,  or  even  all  the  individuals  of  any  one 
age  of  the  world,  should  know  the  whole  Universe,  in 
detail.     How  then  can  any  one  claim  to  possess  a 
Science  of  the  Universe  ?    The  claim  is  preposterous, 
it  is  sometimes  added,  and  no   one  but  God  can  be 
presumed  to  have,  or  can  be  conceived  of,  even,  as 
having  such  knowledge. 

31.  This  objection  is  at  first  view  plausible,  but  it 
is  unsound,  and  leads  to  a  too  broad  denial  of  the 
human  capacity.     We  do  not  know  in  detail  the  par- 
ticulars of  even  the  smallest  of  our  Sciences.     Icthy- 
ology  is  a  branch  of   Animalogy,   confined  to   the 
study   of  the  fishes;   but  no   Icthyologist   is  for   a 
moment  supposed  to  have  become  acquainted  with, 
so  to  speak,  the  individual  history  of  every  particular 
fish,  and  not  only  of  those  now  in  life  but  of  every 
fish  that  ever  did  live  or  ever  will  live  ;  and  yet  such 
a  supposition  would  only  parallel  what  is  assumed,  in 
this  objection,  as  necessary  with  reference  to  the  pos- 
sibility of  a  Universal  Science. 

32.  What  the  Icthyologist  does  is  to  discover  and 
systematize  the  General  Principles,   carried   into  a 
convenient  degree  of  detail,  of  Fish  nature.     What 
the  Universologist  has  to  do  is  no  more  than  this  in 
respect  to  the  larger  subject.     He  has  to  discover 


24  HOW  THE  UNIVEBSE  IS  KNOWABLE. 

and  systematize  the  General  Principles  of  Universal 
Being,  carrying  their  application,  in  turn,  into  no 
more  than  the  appropriate  degree  of  minuteness  in 
Branching  and  Distribution.  It  is  not  the  Univer- 
sality of  Fads  (which  are  indeed  infinitely  numerous), 
but  the  Universality  of  Principles  which  are  infinitely 
unific  or  simple,  which  has  to  be  discovered  and  ex- 
hibited. 

33.  There  is  a  sense,  then,  in  which  a  knowledge 
of  the  whole  Universe  is  impossible  to  any  finite  in- 
telligence ;  but  there  is  also  another  sense  in  which 
such  knowledge  is  possible.     We  cannot  know  the 
Universe  in  detail,  but  there  is  no  reason  why  we 
may  not  know  it  in  respect  to  the  universality  of  its 
Laws,  if  we  can  be  so  fortunate  as  to  discover  Laws 
which  are  Universal,  as  well  as  exhaustive  (that  is  to 
say  exclusive  of  the  possibility  of  any  other  Laws)  ; 
and  which  shall  be  absolutely  'known  to  be  such,  because 
they  are  of  such  a  nature,  that,  when  discovered  and 
clearly  propounded  and  apprehended,  it  becomes  im- 
possible to  conceive  of  them  as  otherwise  than  as  True, 
Universal,  and  Exhaustive. 

34.  It  is  in  a  manner  similar  to  this  that  a  True 
Universal  Alphabet  would  apply  to  the  spelling  of 
the   words   of    all  languages ;  because   so   long   as 
men's  mouths  are  formed  according  to  the  fixed  type 
of  the  human  mouth,  (as  we  know  it  to  be),  they 
produce  a  certain  few  Elementary  Sounds  (and  only 
these),  which  are  then  constantly  repeated,  in  new 
combinations,  ia  all  that  men  ever  say  or  can  MU/.    It 
is,  also,  in  a  similar  manner,  that  employing  so  few 


THE   MASTERY   THROUGH   SCIENCE.  25 

signs  as  9  digits  and  zero,  we  can  write  all  possible 
numbers ;  and  that  we  can  know  positively  that  we 
have  the  means  at  command  by  which  we  can  write 
new  combinations  of  numbers  so  soon  as  they  shall  occur 
to  us,  although  previously  we  may  never  have  thought  of 
those  particular  combinations  as  possible  numbers.  We 
have  thus,  in  a  sense,  a  mastery,  through  Science, 
over  immense,  even  over  Infinite  Domains  of  details, 
with  which,  as  details,  we  are  entirely  unacquainted. 
This  is  the  Inherent,  Infinite  Power  and  True  Glory 
of  Science,  and  of  the  unmade  Principles  of  Being  as 
contrasted  with  mere  Facts  (res  gestce  or  things  made 
or  done).  This  is  what  Science  can  do,  and  this  is 
the  mode  in  which  it  transcends  all  ordinary  ex- 
perience and  common  knowledge,  and  even  that 
which  is  extraordinary,  whether  intuitional,  inspi- 
rational, or  otherwise. 

35.  Science  is  thus  the  Systematized  Knowledge 
of  Principles  out  of  which  arises  a  Method  for  their 
application  in  new  spheres  ;  spheres  of  human  inter- 
vention which  can  then  be  rigorously  modeled  upon 
the  application  which  Nature  is  spontaneously  mak- 
ing of  the  same  Principles  in  advance  of  their  dis- 
covery by  man.  The  Multiplication  Table  is  another 
instance  of  such  systematized  knowledge  furnishing 
a  basis  and  Method  for  the  whole  infinitude  of  prac- 
tical mathematical  operations.  It  gives  a  scientific 
mastery  over  the  infinite  world  of  numerical  conibi- 

t/ 

nations,  within  its  scope,  like  that  which  the  Scientific 
Universal  Alphabet  will  give  over  the  representation 
of  all  languages ;  like  that  which  the  digits  and  zero 

2 


tt  A  SECOND   OBJECTION. 

give  over  the  mer  ?  notation  of  numbers  ;  and  like 
that,  in  fine,  which  the  discovery  of  Universal  Scien- 
tific Laws  is  competent  to  give  to  the  human  race 
over  every  department  of  knowledge  and  affairs. 

36.  It  is,  in  the  next  place,  objected,  that,  admitting 
a  Science  of  the  Universe  to  be,  in  itself,  possible,  the 
time  has  not  yet  arrived  for  it  to  be  realized ;  that 
we  can  only  look  for  its  realization  after  the  Special 
Sciences  shall  have  been  much  more  numerously  and 
extensively   developed ;  when,   in   other   words,  the 
human  race  shall  have  gone  over  the  Universe  much 
more  in  detail  than  it  has  yet  been  able  to  do.     This 
objection  has  also  a  plausible  face,  but  it  is  alike  un- 
tenable.     It  is   indeed  true,  however,   that,  if   the 
method   of  arriving   at   the   discovery   of  Universal 
Laws   were  alone  or  chiefly  through  the  necessary 
previous  exhaustion  of  the  details,  such  conditions 
would  then  be  requisite.     But  the  new  objection  is 
only  the  former  one  re-stated,  and  it  meets  with  the 
same  answer.     The  method  of  discovery  is  different 
from  that  which  the  objector  contemplates.     As  it  is 
not  the  detailed  Facts  of  Being,  but,  on  the  contrary, 
Universal  Principles,  which  are  to  be  discovered,  so 
also,  the  method  of  discovery  is  not  through  the  in- 
finite   accumulation   of  details,   but   by   Intellectual 
Analysis,  and,  so  to  speak,  by  Striking  at  Centres. 

37.  Technically  speaking  it  is  not  through  OBSER- 
VATIONAL GENERALIZATIONS,  but  through  ANALYTICAL 
GENERALIZATIONS,  that  the  discovery  has  to  be  made. 
(B.  O.  t.  1012.)     Do  not  be   alarmed  by  these  hard 
terms.     They   express   simple   ideas.     By    Obst.rva- 


TWO   KINDS   OF   GENERALIZATIONS.  27 

tional  Generalization  is  meant  a  method  which  goes 
around  a  whole  subject,  striving  to  embrace  it ;  as  it 
were,  in  the  arms.  By  Analytical  Generalization  the 
opposite  method  is  intended,  that  of  piercing  di- 
rectly to  the  centre,  as  by  the  vision  of  a  sharp  eye, 
or  the  blade  of  a  cutting  instrument.  If  a  child 
has  an  apple  and  wishes  to  find  what  is  at  the  middle 
of  it,  he  may  cut  continually  around  it,  on  all  sides, 
gradually  reducing  it  in  size,  and  arriving  at  the 
core  only  by  this  tedious  and  exhaustive  process  ;  or, 
if  he  have  acquired  the  necessary  strength  and  skill 
in  the  use  of  his  knife,  he  may,  at  a  single  cut,  lay 
open  the  apple  to  the  centre,  and  begin  his  future 
observations  from  the  core  of  the  subject.  The  Uni- 
verse is  our  apple,  the  knife  in  the  hand  of  a  child  is 
Scientific  Procedure  or  Method,  the  gradual  paring 
away  process  is  Inductive,  Observational,  or  Encyclo- 
pedic Generalization.  The  cut  to  the  centre  is  Ana- 
lytical Generalization. 

38.  It  is  by  this  latter  method,  that  Universality 
of  Knowledge,  of  the  kind  which  is  possible,  may  for- 
tunately be  acquired  at  a  comparatively  early  period 
in  the  development  of  the  career  of  our  particular 
knowledge,  and  may  be,  thenceforward,  the  grand 
weapon  to  be  employed  in  the  conquest  of  the  de- 
tails, outward  upon  every  radius,  from  the  centre  of 
knowledge  so  attained  to.  The  discovery  of  the 
Multiplication  Table,  of  an  Alphabet,  and  of  Numer- 
ical Notation,  though  they  had  to  be  preceded  by 
more  embryonic  stages  of  development  tending  to 
produce  them,  were  not  themselves  the  culmination 


28  A  THIRD   OBJECTION. 

or  finality  of  Science  in  their  several  Spheres,  but 
the  births  of  those  Sciences  or  Branches  of  Knowl- 
edge. The  discovery  of  Universology  is,  in  like 
manner,  the  birth  of  Science,  itself,  considered  as  a  con- 
stituted and  living  whole.  The  Special  Sciences,  as 
heretofore  studied  and  developed,  have  been  the 
Limbs  and  Members  of  the  unformed  or  as  yet  un- 
born infant,  not  therefore  mutually  recognizing  each 
other  as  corresponding  parts  of  a  larger  Organisnms. 

39.  It  may  be  again  objected,  that,  admitting  the 
possibility   of    the   Universal    Science,    and   that    a 
shorter  method  may  exist  for  its  discovery  than  that 
of  compassing  all  possible  details,  yet,  that,  at  least, 
it  must  be  necessary  to  be  familiar  with  the  known 
details  of  all  the  existing  Sciences,  in  order  either  to 
discover  the  Unitary  Science,  or  to  be  competent  to 
comprehend  it  and  to  judge  of  it  when  discovered. 

40.  This  is  still  only   another  form   of   the  same 
objection.     The  supposed  immense  accumulation  of 
the  details  of  Observational  Knowledge  is  not  indis- 
pensable either  to  the  learner  or  teacher  of  the  new 
Science,  and  only  in  a  modified  sense  even  to  the 
discoverer   of  it.      Universology  is  an   Independent 
Science,  which  stands  upon   its  own  basis,  and  no 
more  needs  an   extended  acquaintance  with  the  par- 
ticulars  of  other  Sciences,    except   for   the   greater 
richness  of  suggestion   and  illustration,  than  Geom- 
etry or  Chemistry.     The   Special  Sciences,  with  all 
their  details,   collectively  form,   indeed,  the  Infinite 
Domain   within   which   Universology   will  find  per- 
petually new  applications  ;  but  the  Elements  of  the 


THE   QUESTION  OF  FACT.  29 

New  Science  are  more  independent  of  anything  ex- 
traneous than  those  of  any  other  Science,  if  we  except 
'Logic  and  the  Mathematics. 

41.  But  the4 question  of  the  possibility  of  the  dis- 
covery of  a  New  Universal  Science  may  as  well  now 
give  place  to  the  question  of  fact.     Such  a  Science 
claims  to  exist ;   and  what  is  possible  will  best   be 
understood  by  some  exposition  of  what    is.      Even 
here  we  are  met  by  immense  difficulties  in  respect  to 
the  mere  method  of  presentation.     If  a  lecturer  were 
endeavoring  to  give  an  idea  of  America,  in   a  single 
lecture,  to  the  inhabitants  of  another  country  entire- 
ly ignorant  of  this,  he  would  be  embarrassed  by  the 
largeness  of  the  subject.    If  he  dwelt  on  the  immense 
extent  of  the  country,  its  various  climates,  its  huge 
rivers,  lakes  and   mountains,  he  would  be  carrying 
the  mind  of  his  hearers  away  from  ah1  comparison 
with  the  familiar  neighborhood  experiences  of  their 
own  home  lives  ;  from  that  in  which,  probably,  they 
would  be   most   particularly  interested.     If,  on  the 
contrary,  to  overcome  this  difficulty,  he  should  con- 
form to  their  habits  of  thought,  and  sketch  neigh- 
borhood life  in  America  at  some  point  as  nearly  re- 
sembling their  own  as  might  be,  he  might  accomplish 
his  last  purpose,  but  he  would  fail  to  give  any  ade- 
quate idea  of  America  in  those  aspects  in  which  it 
especially  differs  from  all  other  countries. 

42.  The  Universe,  as  the  Domain  and  Subject  of  a 
New  Science,  is  an  infinitely  larger  field  of  novelty 
and  variety;  and  it  is  less  easy  to  condense  it  into 
a  single  volume,  than  it   is   to   treat  adequately  of 


30  WHAT  IS   ATTEMPTED. 

America,  in  a  single  lecture ;  and  in  respect  to  the 
method  of  communicating  the  requisite  knowledge 
of  it,  the  difficulty  is  of  a  similar  kind.  To  be  too 
general  is  to  fail  to  interest ;  to  be  too  special  is  to 
fail  to  teach  Universology  in  its  distinctive  difference 
from  all  other  Sciences. 

43.  In  the  following  Chapters  an  effort  will  be 
made  to  give  some  idea  of  the  New  Science,  without, 
so  far  as  it  may  be  avoided,  incurring  either  of  these 
causes  of  failure.  It  is  only,  however,  by  repeated 
presentations  and  more  and  more  expanded  elabora- 
tions of  the  subject,  that  any  complete  exposition  of 
it,  even  in  its  Elementary  Form,  can  be  accomplished. 


CHAPTER  II. 

PRIMAEY  DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  UNIVERSE. 

44.  The  Universe  divides  primarily  into  1.  a  DO- 
MAIN or  NATURE,  2.  a  DOMAIN  OF  SCIENCE,  and  3.  a 
DOMAIN  OF  ART.     These  are  not  different  Realms  ex- 
isting entirely  apart  from  each  other,  bnt,  are,  on  the 
contrary,  closely  inter-blended  throughout.    They  are, 
therefore,   only  drawn  asunder,  in  part,  and  enough 
for  practical  distinction,  by  an   effort  of  Abstraction, 
in  the  Mind. 

45.  The  word-termination  -ismus  is  used  to  denote 
a  Realm  or  Domain  of  Being.    These  Three  Domains 
are  therefore,  1.  THE  NATURISMUS,  2.  THE  SCEENTIS- 
MUS,  and  3.  THE  ARTISMUS,  of  Being. 

46.  There   are,  likewise,  as   previously   shown  (2). 
THREE   UNIVERSAL  PRINCIPLES,   which   underlie    the 
Universe,  and  regulate  the  distribution  of  ah1  things. 
These   are   called,   in   Universological   Technicality, 
UNISM,  DUISM,  and  TEINISM,  and  are  related  to  the 
numbers  ONE,  Two,  and  THREE,  respectively,  (Latin, 
Units ,  Duo,  Tres,  ONE,  Two,  THREE.) 

47.  Unism,  Duism  and  Trinism  correspond  with,  or 
echo  to,  Nature,  Science  and  Art,  respectively,  so  that 


32  NATURE,   SCIENCE,   AND   ART. 

Nature  is  Unismal,  Science  Duismal,  and  Art  Trinismal, 
in  character  and  degree. 

48.  But  how  can  it  be  demonstrated  that  among 
the  thousand  similar  distributions  which  are  possible, 
Nature,  Science  and  Art  are  the  most  appropriate  to 
be   regarded   as   the  practically  Primitive,   and  All- 
inclusive,  Aspects,  of  the  Universe  of  Being  ? 

49.  The  assumption  that  this  is  true  will  be  suf- 
ficiently proven  or  sustained  by  the  following  con- 
siderations :  Nature  is  the  Substance  or  Subject-Matter 
treated  of  by  Science.     Science  is  the  Systematized 
Knowledge  which    the  Human  Mind    attains    to,  of 
Nature,  the  Form,  in  other  words,  which  Nature,  as  a 
Substance,  assumes  under  the  Reflective  Action  of  the 
thinking  mind  ;  and  Art  is  the  same  primitive  Nature  or 
Substance,    externally   or   actually  reacted  upon,   sub- 
sequently to  reflection,  AND  RE-IMPRESSED  BY  Science  ;  or  it 
is  the  Mental  or  Ideal  Form,  reproduced  in  Nature,  from 
and  by  the  Mind.     It  is,  therefore,  the  result  of  Mind 
working  upon  Nature  ;  or  the  Progeny  begotten  of 
Nature,  as  Feminine,  by   Science  or    the   Thinking 
Mind,  as  Masculine  or  Male. 

50.  But  all    manifestations  of   Intelligence  or  of 
Quasi-Intelligence,  even  those  witnessed  in  Nature,  are 
the,  at  least,  apparent,  result  of  Mind,  which,  therefore, 
when  it  thus  occurs  independently  of  Man,  is  attri- 
buted to  God,  and  assimilated  to  our  own  conscious 
action  on  Nature,  which  is  Art.    All  Evolution,  Move- 
ment, or  On-going  in  Nature,  is  such  manifestation  of 
Qtfasi-Intelligence,    and   is,    therefore,  also   Art ;    or 
may,  in  other  words,  be  properly  embraced  in  the  <\r- 


SUBSTANCE,   FORM,   AND   MOVEMENT.  33 

tremest  largeness  of  meaning  which  we  can  assign  to  the 
word  Art.  In  this  sense,  Art  is  equivalent  to  Move- 
ment, Manifestation,  Modification,  Modulation,  in  a 
word,  to  all  Creation  and  Evolution,  in  the  Universe 
at  large.  Nature  furnishes  the  Materials  or  Substance, 
Science  BEING,  (or  ACCORDING  WITH),  the  Form  or  Law 
impressed  upon  the  Substance,  in  the  Operation  or 
Result,  or  in  the  Movement  and  Evolution,  which  are 
here,  by  an  unusual  extension,  it  is  true,  of  the  mean- 
ing of  that  term,  denominated  Art.  All  Art  is  re- 
presentation^ or  a  new  presentation  of  Matter  in  a  form 
prescribed  by  Mind.  Art  is,  therefore,  also  denom- 
inated Creation. 

51.  Nature,  Science  and  Art  are,  therefore,  in  the 
extended  meanings  which  are  here  assigned  to  them, 
as  if  we  should  say,  more  abstractly,  1.  SUBSTANCE, 
2.  FORM,  and  3.  MOVEMENT  ;  or,  still  more  metaphys- 
ically,  1.  The  Noumena,   2.  The  Phenomena,  and  3. 
The  Compoundness  and  Coaction  of  these  two  in  the 
Totality  of  Being. 

52.  But  Nature,  Science  and  Art,  while  echoing  to 
or  corresponding  with  Substance,  Form  and  Move- 
ment,   are   more  ostensible  and  real  Departments  of 
Being.   As  here  meant,  they  go  back  to  the  Primitive 
or  Etymological  Meanings  of  these  Words,  Substance 
and  Form.     Substance  is  from  the  Latin  sub,  UNDER, 
and  stans,  STANDING,  (from  stare,  TO  STAND),  as  it  were 
&  foundation  standing  under  a  house,  and  as,  figura- 
tively, the  Substance  of  Things  stands  under  or  under- 
lies the  Appearance  or  Form.     Form  is  the  Latin 
Forma,  and  this  Abstract  Noun  I  regard  as  originally 


34  STOEIES   OF  THE   TEMPLE. 

Fem-ma,  from  ferre,  TO  BEAR  and  UPHOLD,  as  the 
House  is  upborne  or  upheld  by  its  Foundation  ;  and 
as  Form  is  figuratively  upheld  and  manifested  or 
made  into  Phenomena  by  Substance  or  Noumenon. 
Substance-and-Forra  then  combine  to  make  the  To- 
tality and  Proceedent  Existence  of  Things ;  and  so  of 
Thing  Universal :  or  of  the  Universe. 

53.  Nature,  Science  and  Art,  as  Substance,  Form 
and  Movement,  are,  therefore,  like  1.  The  Foundation, 
2.  The  Superstructure,  and  3.  The  Use  or  Occupancy 
(lapping  back  upon  and  including  its  construction) 
of  an  Edifice.     The  Universe  is  that  Edifice,  in  its 
Integrality,  or  in  the  Unity  of  these  Three  Consti- 
tuent Aspects,  Entities  or  Terms.     The  Universe  is, 
therefore,  primarily  and  necessarily  a  Tri-Unity,  of 
which  Nature,  Science  and  Art  are  the  Three  Grand 
Factors,  Stages,  or  Determinate  Particulars;  which 
was  the  point   to  be  established.      We  proceed  in 
thought  from  the  Foundation  of  the  Edifice  upward 
to  the  Dome  or  Apex;  as  ike  Natural  or  Primitive 
Order  of  our  thoughts  on  the  subject ;  which,  sub- 
sequently, we  reverse,  or  "  invert "  in  descending.    This 
procedure  of  the  thought  may  be  contracted  to  the 
conception  of  a  mere  line,  and  the  successive  Stories 
or  Stages  of  the  Edifice  may  be  represented  to  the 
imagination  along  this  line. 

54.  As  every  Line  and  every  Career,  that  of  Uni- 
versal Evolution  as  well,  has,  in  our  ordinary  concep- 
tion, a  Beginning,  a  Middle  and  an  End,  so,  if  a  Line, 
as  the  First  Type  of  Procedure  or  On-Going,  be  as- 
sumed in  Abstract  Thought,  and  be  made  to  occupy 


INTERPUNCT;  OR  INTERPOSED  POINT.  35 

~a 

the  Perpendicular,  which  is  the  First  Normal  Posture 
or  Position  ;  and  if  we  proceed,  in  our  thoughts,  from 
Below,  Upward,  which  is  the  First  or  Normal  Drift 
of  Direction,  or  the  Natural  Order;  this  Thought-Line 
will  have,  First,  a  Foundation  or  Lowest  Point  or 
Basis,  the  point  upon  which  it  rests,  the  Analogue  of 
Nature  ;  and  Second,  an  Upper  Portion,  the  Ferrima 
or  Form,  the  Line  per  se,  the  Analogue  of  Science. 
"We  might  then  add  the  upper  end  or  superior  point 
of  the  Line  as  the  Third  Step,  as  the  Analogue  of  Art ; 
in  accordance  with  the  Axiom,  Finis  coronat  opus  (the 
end  crowns  the  work)  ;  but  this  Upper  End,  the  Head 
of  the  Column  or  Line,  is  also  the  Basis  of  the  In- 
verted Procedure,  when  the  thought  begins  to  de- 
scend ;  for,  analogically,  Ideal  and  Spiritual  Founda- 
tions are  above.  Confining  ourselves,  on  the  contrary, 
to  the  Ascending  Drift  of  Thought,  there  is,  as  it 
were,  a  Finer  Interposed  Point,  a  Point  of  Unition 
and  Conjunction  between  the  Basis-Point  of  the 
Line  and  the  Ferrima  ;  between  Nature  and  Science ; 
between  Foundation  and  Superstructure ;  which  In- 
terposed Point  may  be  also  taken  as  the  Analogue  of 
Life  and  Movement,  and  hence  also  of  Art — the 
germinating  Punctum  Vitce  or  Point  of  Life ;  pivot- 
ally  situated,  as  it  were,  between  the  other  two  stages 
and  forms  of  development.  To  change  the  figure 
from  Edifice  and  Line  to  the  Plant  or  Tree,  the  Point 
in  question  is  the  Germinal  Point,  within  the  Seed,  as 
the  Analogue  of  Art,  or  of  Vital  Movement,  within 
the  Plant ;  and,  as  it  were,  between  the  Seed  and 
Hoot,  extending  downward  or  beneath  the  Earth's 


36  BASE,    SUPEHINCUMBING,   INTEKPUNCT. 

level,  the  Analogue  of  the  Foundation  of  the  Build- 
ing, and  the  Plumule  or  Ascending  Sprout,  \he  Ana- 
logue of  the  Superstructure.  The  Punctum  Vitce  of 
the  Edifice  is  the  Altar  or  Fireplace,  the  Focus,  which 
is  the  Latin  word  for  Fireplace.  This  is  reached  by 
the  Doorway  or  Entrance,  which,  situated  at  the 
Earth's  level,  is  externally  representative  of  this  in- 
terposed point  of  Vitality  and  Movement.  The 
whole  Figure,  compounded  of  the  Point  and  Line, 
thus  vitally  and  centrally  conjoined  by  an  Interposed 
Vital  Point,  is  the  Inverted  Man-shaped  Figure  or 
Anthropoidule.  (B.  O.  t.  881.). 

55.  Foundation,  Super  incumbency,  and  their  Copula- 
tion, Interaction,  or  Interrelation,  these  Three  combined 
in  a  Totality  and  repeated  in  the  Product,  are,  there- 
fore, the  Primal    and   Universal  Type    of  All    Being. 
It  is  this  Primitive  Distribution  which  is  here  gen- 
eralized and  formulated  under  the  terms,  NATURE, 
SCIENCE,  and  ART,  as  the  Constituent  Aspects  or  Do- 
mains of  Universal  Being  and  Evolution.     They  are 
not,  therefore,  merely  Facts   of  Observation,  but  Es- 
sentially Necessary  and  Primitive  Discriminations. 

56.  Nature  is  Feminine,  the  Mother  Principle,  the 
teeming  Womb  or  Matrix  of  Being.     Science,  identi- 
fied with  Law,  with  Abstract  Thought,  with  Form, 
with  Phenomena,  with  the  Bays  of  Light,  with  Re- 
flection, and  so  with  Universal  Intelligence  or  Mind, 
with  Man  Male,  and  with  God,  the  Paternal  or  Im- 
pregnating Principle,  is  Masculine ;  Art,  echoing  to 
the  Sexes  in  their  mutual  embrace,  Interpenetration, 
Correlative   Impregnation,  and  Conception,  and  the 


NATUROLOGY;  SCIENTOLOGY;  ARTOLOGY. 

Renewed  Being  as  Progeny  or  Product,  is  Andro- 
gyne. 

57.  NATUROLOGY  is  that  Branch  or  Aspect  of  Uni- 
versology in  which  the  Universe  is  cousidered  and 
treated,  in  a  preliminary  and  somewhat  inexact  way, 
from  the  Observation  of  Fads  and  the  Empirical  As- 
sumption  of    Method ;    and   not    from    reference    to 
any  previous  demonstration  of  Governing  Principles  ; 
in  which,  in  other  words,  it  is  considered  and  treated 
in  the  merely  Observational  Spirit,   or,   what  is  the 
same  thing,  in  the  spirit  of  the  Natural  Sciences. 

58.  SCIENTOLOGY,  is,  on  the  contrary,  that  Branch 
or  Aspect  of  Univer'sology  in  which  the  Universe  is 
considered  and  treated  as  consecutively  and  logically 
evolved  from  the  Three  Abstract  Universal  Principles 
above  specified  (2,  45),  related  to  the  Three  Primary 
Numbers.     It  is,  in   other  words,   the  Logical  and 
Mathematical  Evolution  of  Being  universally,  from 
the    Primordial    Categories    or    Basis-Thoughts   of 
Being.     Scientology  is  therefore  Universology  devel- 
oped in  the  spirit  of  the  Exact  Sciences,  and  is  wholly 
new  in  kind.     It  is  the  Core  or  Centre  and  the  most 
distinctive  Department  of  Universology,  that  in  which 
the  discovery  of  this  New  Universal  Science  mainly 
consists  ;   but  it  is  proportionally  less  popular,    in 
character,  and  more  remote   from  old  and  existing 
scientific  ideas. 

59.  ARTOLOGY    is  that  Branch  or  Aspect   of   the 
Science   of    the   Universe   in  which   the    somewhat 
popular  truths  of  Naturology  and  the  new  and  more 
metaphysical  truths  of  Scientology  are,  as  it  were, 


38  SCIENTOLOGICAL  EXACTIFICATION. 

translated  or  modulated  into  each  other,  or,  in  other 
words,  reconciled  and  married  in  the  Elaborated  and 
Completed  Grand  Cosmos  or  Total  Universe  of 
Being.  There  is,  therefore,  in  this  Department,  Com- 
promise, Concession,  or,  in  a  word,  AUTISTIC  MODIFI- 
CATION. (B.  O.  t.  515.)  Art  is  not  so  much  the  Art- 
products,  or  Objects  of  Art  in  themselves,  although 
they  are  representative,  but  these  Art-products  in 
the  act  of  being  produced  ;  whence  it  is  Evolution  or 
Movement,  or,  in  other  words,  Creation  in  Progress 
or  Procedure — what  the  Philosophers  have  technically 
denominated  "  The  Becoming." 

60.  Scientology  is  new,  and  remote  from  the  popu- 
lar apprehension,  alike  of  the  learned  and  unlearned 
world.  Artology,  depending,  as  it  does,  for  one  of 
its  factors,  upon  Scientology,  is,  Consequently,  also 
new.  Nat-urology,  atone,  answers  to  the  whole  scope 
of  the  Sciences  as  they  have  hitherto  been  cultivated  and 
developed,  and  furnishes,  therefore,  the  NATURAL  Sams 
of  the  New  Science.  This,  while  it  is,  in  a  sense, 
popular,  and  closely  related  to  the  Natural  S'ia/ce*  as 
they  are  already  studied  and  understood  in  the 
world,  still,  is  not,  in  its  Universological  sense,  mervhj 
the  Aggregate  of  those  Sciences,  as  they  noiv  stand  in 
t]&  minds  of  the  Learned.  It  is,  on  the  contrary,  the 
whole  body  of  those  Sciences  as  re-cast  and  re-consti- 
tuted, Universologically,  and  by  a  Reflect  of  Exac tin- 
cation  cast  from  Scientology,  (the  Sun  and  Centre  of 
Universology),  upon  this  Primitive  and  naturally  In- 
exact Domain.  The  method,  even  here,  is  Analogical) 
and  the  result  is  to  unify  these  primitive  and  fragment- 


INHERENT  NECESSITY.  89 

ary  Sciences  by  bringing  them  under  the  operation  of 
that  Identity  of  Laiv  which  is  demonstrated  and  ex- 
pressly elaborated  in  the  Scientological  Branch  of 
Universology. 

61.  Naturology,  as  a  Branch  of  Universology,  is, 
therefore,  Transcendental,  in  comparison  with  the  frag- 
mentary state  of  the  Special  Sciences,  as  these  have 
been  hitherto  developed  ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  in 
a  general  and  popular  sense,   Naturology  may   be 
held  to  include  also  the  existing  Special  Sciences  in 
their  actual  state. 

62.  Any  particular  Domain  of  the  Universe,  or  of 
any  of  these  Three  Primitive  Grand  Domains  (Nature, 
Science,  and  Art),  as,   for  instance,  the  Vegetable 
Kingdom,  the  Animal  Kingdom,  the  Human  Body, 
or  the  Human  Mind,  segregated  and  considered  as  a 
whole,  is  a  Minor   Universe ;  and  may,  therefore,   or 
indeed  must,  naturally,  be  distributed,  in  the  first  in- 
stance, into  a  Naturismus,    a  Scientismus    and   an 
Artisrnus,  of  its  own.    Hence,  there  is,  by  an  INHERENT 

and  NECESSARY   LAW,  UNIVERSAL   ANALOGY,  Or  an  ECHO 

OF  SAMENESS,  in  respect  to  the  method  of  distribution, 
between  the  Entire  Universe  and  any  smaller  Domain 
within  the  Universe ;  and,  mutually,  between  all  such 
smaller  Domains.  Hence,  there  should  be  Identity  of 
Distribution,  and  of  Scientific  Classification,  through- 
out all  Domains.  The  under 'standing  of  this  Universal 
Echo  of  Principles  and  consequent  Universal  Analogy 
makes  the  Science  of  Universology.  (8.) 

63.  Language  is  one  of   these   smaller   Domains 
within  the  Universe,  and  is,  itself,  therefore,  a  Minia- 


40  THE   TWO   ORDERS,    OR  METHODS. 

tnre  Universe,  in  accordance  with  the  Principle  of 
Analogy  jnst  stated,  and  a  Type  or  Model  of  the 
Whole  Universe.  More  than  this,  Language,  occu- 
pying an  intermediate  position  between  Matter  and 
Mind,  .between  the  Physical  and  the  Metaphysical 
Sciences,  it  is  especially  well  situated  to  serve  (by  re- 
lation to  its  own  inherent  organization)  as  an  In- 
terpreter between  them.  Language  is,  therefore, 
scientifically  indicated  as  the  Primary  Modelic  Sphere 
— the  Particular  Miniature  Universe  which  it  is  fitting 
to  adopt  as  a  point  of  departure  in  the  larger  investi- 
gation of  the  Entire  Universe,  and  of  all  its  parts. 
The  Human  Body  is  another  Modelic  Sphere  to  which 
there  will  be  early  and  frequent  occasion  to  recur,  in 
the  ulterior  development  of  Universology. 

64.  If,  in  accordance  with  thes*e  premises,  we  as- 
sume Language  as  a  Minor  Universe  of  Being,  and 
treat  the  distribution  of  this  Domain,  Naturismally, 
or  in  the  spirit  of  the  existing  Sciences  merely,  there 
are  still  two  Orders  or  Methods  in  which  we  may  ap- 
proach and  prosecute  the  consideration  of  the  sub- 
ject. We  may,  in  the  first  place,  commence,  so  to 
speak,  at  the  periphery,  and  proceed  towards  the  cen- 
tre ;  we  may,  in  other  words,  attempt  to  surround 
and  embrace  Encyclopedically,  the  Entire  Content  or 
Contents  of  the  Language-Domain,  and  to  bring  a 
certain  degree  of  System  and  Harmony  into  our 
knowledge  of  it,  by  an  external,  non-vital,  and  super- 
imposed arrangement  and  classification  of  its  several 
Departments.  All  the  different  Languages  spoken 
on  the  planet  may  thus  bo  enumerated  and  classified, 


THE  PHONETIC  ALPHABET.  41 

in  respect  to  both  their  Spacic  and  their  Tempic  Dis- 
tribution.   Oral  Speech,  Music  and  Song  may  be  dis- 
criminated as  Departments  of  this  Lingual  Universe  ; 
and  so  also  Grammar,  Logic  and  Rhetoric.      The 
Grammar  of  Language  may  itself  undergo  division 
into   Etymology,    Syntax,    etc.  ;    and    the   Parts    of 
Speech  may  be   distinguished  and  specified.     Ana- 
lysis, and  the  Phonetic  Elements  of  Speech  may  be 
designated  as  something  distinct  from  every  other 
Department,  or  at  least  Hieroglyphic  and  Syllabic 
Alphabets  devised,  and  some  idea  of  Words,  Syllables 
and  Elements  be  entertained  ;  and  all  this  may  con- 
ceivably exist,  without  any  such  Analysis  of  Element- 
ary Sounds   as  would   supply    a    proper   Phonetic 
Alphabet,    which    is    the    true   Core    or   Centre   of 
Speech,  (even  when  this  Alphabet  is  itself  defective 
and  imperfect  from  the  want  of  a  more  rigorous  and 
ultra-analytical  process).    All  that  has  now  been  de- 
scribed belongs  then  to  the  Objective  Method,  or,  in 
other  words,  to  the  Natural  Order  of  the  Naturismal 
or  common  phase  of  the  Investigation  of  Language. 
65.  But,  all  of  this  Procedure  may  be  inverted, 
and,  indeed,  so  soon  as  the  study  of  Language  as- 
sumes a  really  Scientific  Character  (of  the  Naturis- 
mal kind)  it  is  even  more  natural  that  it  should  be  in- 
verted.    The   exigencies  of  writing,  in  the  effort  to 
preserve  Language,  force  that  degree   of   Analysis 
upon  the  primitive  scholars  of  a  nation  that  they  de- 
velop a  somewhat  imperfect  Phonetic  Alphabet,  but 
still  a  Phonetic  Alphabet,  representing  the  Elements  of 
Sound  of   their  particular  National  Tongue.      The 


42  THE   SCIENTIFIC   LINGUAL   HEAD. 

work  is  empirically  accomplished,  applies  only  to  the 
single  Language,  is  destitute  of  radical  knowledge 
of  the  Sound-producing  Organismus  (the  Throat, 
Mouth  and  Nose)  and  of  many  other  things  essential 
to  the  Constitution  of  the  Final  and  Universal  Pho- 
netic Alphabet,  destined  thereafter  to  arise,  at  some 
day,  as  the  instrument  for  expressing  with  equal  cer- 
tainty all  existing  and  even  all  possible  languages.' 

66.  Even  this  imperfect  Phonetic  Alphabet  is, 
nevertheless,  a  new  and  wonderful  Element  in  the 
constitution  of  Language.  It  becomes  the  Scientific 
Head  or  Centre  of  the  Language  to  which  it  applies, 
from  which,  outwardly,  there  arises  that  Inverse  Or- 
der of  investigating  and  treating  the  whole  Lingual 
Domain  which  has  been  adverted  to  above  (64),  as  the 
Subjective  Method  or  Logical  Order  of  investigation 
and  treatment.  The  Objective  Method  or  Natural 
Order  previously  sketched  (64)  rested  on  OBSERVA- 
TIONAL GENERALIZATIONS  (37 ;  B.  O.  t.  1012),  which 
furnish  such  general  divisions  of  Language  as  its 
Grammar,  its  Logical  Structure,  its  Musical  Struc- 

1  I  do  not  leave  out  of  mind  the  extraordinary  and  exceptional 
fact  that  the  Sanscrit  Alphabet,  perhaps  the  oldest  Alphabet  extant, 
is  a  marvel  of  scientific  accuracy,  for  anything  wrought  out  in  this 
primitive  or  Naturismal  method,  and  that  it  is  vastly  superior,  for 
exposition  of  the  true  classification  of  sounds,  to  any  of  our  more 
modern  alphabets ;  but  yet,  radically  considered,  even  the  Sanscrit 
alphabet  is  not  adequately  scientizcd  by  reference  to  the  organic 
production  of  Sounds  by  the  Speech  Organ,  as  demonstrated  by 
modern  Science,  and  still  less  by  any  knowledge  of  the  analogical 
principles  involved  in  and  requiring  to  be  represented  in  the  Final 
Universal  Alphabet  S.  P.  A. 


THE  VESTIBULE   OF  LANGUAGE.  43 

fcure,  etc.  This  Logical  Order  rests,  on  the  contrary, 
on  Analytical  Generalizations  (37;  B.  O.  t.  1012), 
furnishing  a  handful  of  Elementary  Sounds,  repre- 
sented by  the  Alphabet,  but  which,  in  their  way,  just 
as  really  and  exhaustively  contain,  in  themselves,  the 
luhole  Language,  in  all  its  actuality  and  possibility,  as, 
in  its  way,  the  broadest  Objective  Method  could  do — 
nay,  indeed,  more  really  and  exhaustively,  since  Obser- 
vational Generalizations  are  not  susceptible  of  being 
so  perfectly  accomplished  as  the  Analytical. 

67.  From  the  Alphabet,  as,  so  to  speak,  an  Inter- 
nal Knot  of  the  Elements  of  Speech,  a  Core,  a  Cen- 
trum, a  Focus,  or  Hub,  of  the  Principles  of  Language 
represented  in  Elements,  the  Structural  Constitution 
of  the  whole  Language  is  then  wrought  out,  in  a 
new  and  inverse  sense  from  that  previously  consid- 
ered.    Syllabaries,  Spelling  Books,  Dictionaries,  Vo- 
cabularies and  finally  Encyclopedias   and  the  Cata- 
loguing of  entire  Libraries,  and,  finally,  of  all  Litera- 
ture, are  built  upon  the  basis  of  the  Alphabet,  which 
serves  in  turn  as  their  key,  and  thence  as  the  key,  or, 
to  change  the  figure,  as  the  Yestibule  to  the  whole 
Language  itself.     To  go  out  from  the  Alphabet  as 
from  the  centre  or  main  Entrance  to   the  Periphery 
of  Language  in  this  new  sense,  is  to  proceed  in  the 
Inverse  or  Logical,  and  hence  not  in  the  Natural,  but 
in  its  opposite,  the  Scientific  Order  of  investigation 
and  treatment. 

68.  But  in  all  of  this  primitive  treatment  of  Lan- 
guage, in  both  Orders,  first,  separately,  and  then,  in 
both  combined,  and  reacting  upon  each  other,  we  are 


44        MONOSPHEROLOGY  ;  COMPAROLOGY. 

only  still  in  the  Naturolw/1/  <f  SPEECH.  This  whole 
Domain  of  Lingual  Procedure  is,  in  other  words,  the 
Naturismus  of  the  Speech-Universe,  or  of  the  Total 
Linguistic  Domain.  It  is  also  Monospheric,  by 
which  is  meant,  that  its  scope  is  confined  to  some 
single  or  individual  Language,  or  even,  it  may  be,  to 
all  Languages,  each  considered  singly  or  individually. 
This  whole  Compound  Method  may  also  be  denomi- 
nated Encyclopedic,  as  distinguished  from  the  True 
Analytical  Method  which  is  Scientological. 

69.  The   Scientology   of   Language   begins,   along 
with  the  Logical  Order  of  the  Encyclopedic  or  Observa- 
tional Method,  IN  THE  ALPHABET,  or  strictly  speaking, 
lack  of  the  Alphabet,  as  will  be  shown  presently,  (79.) 
But  in  respect  to  the  Alphabet,  it  begins  in  that  More 
Rigorous  Analysis,  in  that  closer"  discrimination  and 
classification  of  the  Elementary  Sounds  of  Speech 
which  is  known  as  "  Phonetic  Analysis."     It  passes 
over  also  from  the  consideration  of  the  Elements  of 
the  Single,  or  Individual  Language  to  the  comparison 
of  the  Elements  of  different  Languages ;  and  hence, 
from  the  Monospherology  to  the  Comparology  of  the 
subject  (B.  O.  t.  403),  and  hence  again,  to  the  founding 
of  One  Universal  and  strictly  Scientific  Alphabet  for  the 
representation  of  a'l  Languages. 

70.  All  that  has  now  been  mentioned,   even  the 
Comparology  of  the  Elements  of  Language  (Com- 
parative Etymology),  has  been  reached,  at  least  in  a 
primitive  and    imperfect   manner,   empirwaRy ;    but 
Universology  goes  farther,  and  does  more  than  all 
that  has  hitherto  been  indicated,  in  order  to  obtain 


TRANSCRIPT  OF  THE  UNIVERSE.  45 

its  starting  points,  or,  in  other  words,  to  lay  its  foun- 
dation, upon  which  it  then  elevates  a  far  more  lofty 
edifice. 

71.  It  has  been  shown  that  Language  is  a  Minor 
Universe  echoing  to  or  repeating  the  Grand  Uni- 
verse, (63.)  It  results,  therefore,  that  when  we 
distribute  radically  and  rightly  the  Elementary 
Sounds  of  the  Human  Voice,  from  which  Language 
is  constructed,  we,  do,  virtually,  and  by  a  valid  Scien- 
tific Analogy,  also  distribute  the  Categories,  not  merely 
of  the  Understanding,  but  of  Universal  Being,  the  Ele- 
mentary Entities  and  Principles,  in  other  words,  of 
the  Universe  itself,  more  effectively  than  can  be  done 
in  any  other  way ;  and  that  we  lay  the  foundations, 
in  this  manner,  at  the  same  time  and  place,  of  the 
New  Universal  Science,  and  of  a  NEW  SCIENTIFIC 
UNIVERSAL  LANGUAGE,  which  shall  be,  in  its  structure, 
the  Rectified  and  Clarified  Transcript  of  the  Universe ; 
as  Language,  in  its  existing  Instinctual  and  Confused 
Development,  has  been  the  blurred  and  imperfect 
Sketch  (Fr.  ebauche),  of  the  same  Universe. 

72.  But  to  complete,  or  more  properly  to  even  ini- 
tiate, this  new  order  of  investigation,  the  Scientology 
of  the  Universe  and  of  Speech,  we  must  discover 
the  meaning  which  Nature  attaches  to  each  Elementary 
Articulate  Sound  of  the  Voice  ;  for  if  the  Elements  of 
Sound  are  the  Analogues  or  Individual  Echoes  of 
the  Elements  of  the  Universe  itself,  which  are  the 
Proto-pragmata  and  Abstract  Principles  of  which  it 
is  composed,  then  it  follows  that  each  sound  of  the 
voice  in  speech,  such  as  is  represented  by  a  Letfcsr  of 


46  INHERENT  MEANINGS   OF   SOUNDS. 

the  Alphabet,  is  the  Analogue  of  some  Particular 
First  Entity  or  Governing  Principle  of  Universal 
Being ;  and  that,  inversely,  that  Particular  Entity  or 
Principle  is  the  true  meaning,  by  Analogy,  of  the 
given  Alphabetic  Sound  ;  and  that  all  such  Principles 
must  be  measured,  numerically,  and  by  Exact  Echo 
in  all  senses,  by  the  number  and  character  of  the 
Elementary  Sounds  of  the  True  Universal  Alphabet 
of  Language. 

73.  This  then  is  what  Universology  begins  by  dis- 
covering.     It    is  found,  and  will    be    progressively 
demonstrated,   that   Every  Alphabetic   Sound    of  the 
Human  Voice  is  inherently  laden  by  Nature  herself  ivith 
a  specific  significance  or  meaning  ;  that  the  Aggregate  of 
these  Meanings  is,  at  the  same  time,  the  Aggregate  of  the 
Fundamental  Entities  and  Principles  of  the  Universe  of 
Hatter  and  Mind  ;  and,  that,  hence,  a  Language  rightly 
built  up  from  the  combinations  of  these  Sounds  must  ex- 
actly echo  to  and  represent,  from  the  broadest  General- 
izations to  the  minutest  details,  the   Total   Universe  of 
Matter  and  Mind,  itself  built  up  in  parallel  development 

from  the  Echoing  or  Corresponding  Entities  or  Principles. 
(81.) 

74.  Out  of  this  discovery  arises,  therefore,  logical- 
ly, and  as  it  were  inevitably,  a  New   Universal  Lan- 
guage, the  most  wonderful  and  complete  in  its  structure 
and  powers   of  which   it    is  possible    to  conceirc,  and 
which   must   serve   as  the   Vernacular   of  the   Unitized 
Humanity   or   Great  Planetary  Nation  of  the  Future. 
It  is,   then,  the  Philosophy  and  Linguistic  Science 
underlying  and  intimately  involved  in  this  New  Lan- 


RE-STATEMENT.  47 

guage  throughout,  which  constitute  the  Scientology 
of  Linguistic ;  and  the  Corresponding  Philosophy 
and  Science  of  the  Universe  at  large  is  the  Scientol- 
ogy of  Universology.  The  reaction  of  the  Philosophy 
of  the  New  Scientific  Language  upon  the  understanding 
of  existing  tongues,  or  upon  the  previous  Science  and 
Sciences  of  Language,  icill  constitute  the  Universological 
Aspect  of  Lingual  Naturology  (60,  61)  ;  and  the  simi- 
lar reaction  of  Universological  Scientology  upon  the 
existing  Sciences,  recasting  them  into  the  mould  of 
its  own  character,  will  be  the  Universologi-al  Aspect  of 
Naturology  at  large.  Finally,  the  interblending  and 
mutual  modification  and  modulation  of  the  old  and 
new  materials  of  Lingual  Knowledge  and  Use  will 
constitute  the  Artology  of  Speech.  (59,  77.) 

75.  To  restate  these  points :  The  Naturology  of 
Language  is  not  confined  to  Grammar  or  Lexicology 
(the  Dictionary),  nor  to  any  other  particular  depart- 
ment of  the  Science  of  Language,  as  now  understood ; 
nor  to  all  of  them  combined ;  not  even  if  we  include 
Comparative  Grammar  or  Comparative  Etymology, 
with  all  the  surprising  expansion  which  has  been 
given  to  that  Branch  of  Science  by  the  German 
School  of  Philologists.  Linguo-Naturology  or  the 
Naturology  of  Language  includes,  on  the  contrary  : 
First,  in  its  ordinary  or  Non-Universological  sense, 
all  of  these  Departments  of  the  Lingual  Domain,  or 
the  whole  of  Linguistic,  in  any  or  every  sense  in 
which  Language  has  heretofore  been  studied ;  and 
Secondly,  in  its  Universological  Aspect,  it  includes  all 
of  this  Primary  Body  of  Lingual  Science  as  it  will 


48  ALWATO. 

be  recast  from  the  influence  of  the  new  Philology. 
In  the  same  manner,  Naturolog}7,  at  large,  includes,  in 
an  ordinary  sense,  all  the  existing  Sciences  in  their 
present  state  ;  and,  in  a  Universological  Sense,  the 
same  Body  of  the  Sciences  as  they  will  be  enlarged 
and  reconstituted  from  Scientology. 

76.  Linguo- Scientology  or  the  Scientology  of  Lan- 
guage is  the  new  and  totally  distinct  department  of 
the  Science  of  Language,  as  above  sketched,  which 
arises  out  of  the  discovery  of  the  Inherent  Meanings 
of  Sounds,  and  of  the  Scientific  Law  of  their  combi- 
nations, to  constitute,  basically,  the  Unitary  and  Per- 
fect Language  of  Mankind.     Scientology,  at  large, 
holds  the  corresponding  relation  to  the  Total  Uni- 
verse, and  is  the  Back-lying  and  Eegulative  Abstract 
Science  or  Exactology  of  the  Universe. 

77.  Linguo- Artology  or  the  Artology  of  Language, 
the  resultant  of  the  Interblending  of  the  Naturologj 
and  Scientology  of  Language,  will  be  best  illustrated 
by  the  Final  Form  of  the  "World's  Vernacular,  which 
will  be  a  Single  Grand  Planetary  Language,  with  the 
New  Scientific  Lingual  Structure  as  Basis  and  Gov- 
erning Head  of  the  whole,  together  with  the  materials 
of  all  existing  Languages  (the  Naturismus  of  Speech) 
sifted,  recast  and  inwrought  into  this  Completed  and 
Sublime  Lingual  Fabric,  the  dialects  of  which  will 
not  be  distributed,  as  now,  by  the  mere  accidents  of 
locality  and  race,  but  by  the  Departments  or  Spheres 
of  the  Totality  of  Human  Knowledge  and  affairs. 

78.  The  name  of  the  New  Scientific  Language  is 
ALWATO    (pronounced  A/tl-icah-to),  a  word    derived 


THE  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET.  49 

from  the  Language  itself,  and  meaning  Universal 
Speech,  (Al  for  ALL,  and  ivato  for  SPEECH  or  LAN- 
GUAGE). It  is  also  called,  somewhat  more  technically, 
TIKIWA,  (pronounced  tee-kee-ivah),  a  word  also  wrought 
out  from  the  Language  itself,  and  referring  to  Unism 
and  Duism  as  the  Scientific  Bases  of  Speech.  The 
preliminary  steps  for  the  exhibition  of  this  new  Lan- 
guage occur  in  this  Synopsis,  in  connection  with 
Phonetics.  The  development  of  the  Language  itself 
will  be  carried  forward  in  subsequent  and  special 
Treatises,  Grammars,  Vocabularies,  etc. 

79.  It  was  observed  above  (69),  that  the  Scientol- 
ogy of  Language  goes  even  back  of  the  Alphabet  for 
its  absolute  origins.  To  gain  the  point  of  view  of 
the  proper  starting-point  of  this  New  Science,  we 
must  therefore  begin  with  a  more  radical  and  thor- 
ough analysis  of  the  Sounds  of  some  particular  Lan- 
guage, the  English,  for  instance,  as  is  done  in  the 
Phonetic  Reform  initiated  by  Mr.  Pitman  ;  we  must 
then  extend  this  Analysis  to  the  inclusion  of  the 
Phonetic  Elements  and  of  the  Alphabetic  Signs  or 
Letters  for  the  representation  of  all  Languages,  thus 
laying  the  foundation  of  a  Universal  Alphabet,  along 
with  Rapp,  Ellis,  Lepsius,  the  English  Church  Mis- 
sionary Society,  Max  Miiller  and  others ;  we  must 
then  go  back  to  the  proper  Alphabetic  Elements, 
analyzing  and  classifying  them,  as  to  their  localities 
and  the  modes  of  their  production  in  the  mouth,  and 
their  proper  pictorial  and  symbolic  representation, 
thus  founding  a  new  Science  of  "  Alphaboti; ---,"  with 
Alexander  Melville  Bell  (in  "  Bell's  Visible  Speech  ") ; 
3 


IDENTITY  OF  DISTRIBUTION. 

we  must,  again,  as  Universology  alone  does,  go  back 
of  Mr.  Bell,  analyzing  even  liis  classification,  and  re- 
ducing all  possible  sounds,  and  their  classes  and  ar- 
rangements to  Three  Primordial  Principles,  Unism, 
Duisna  and  Trinism,  respectively — illustrated  by  the 
Three  (not  Four)  seats  of  Sound  in  the  mouth,  the 
Middle-Mouth,  the  Back-Mouth  and  the  Front-Mouth 
respectively. 

80.  Reascending  thence   through   the  Classes  of 
Sounds  to  the  Individual  Sounds  of  the  Reconstructed 
Universal  Alphabet,  we  must  then  add  the  crowning 
discovery  which  Universology,  in  this  Lingual  appli- 
cation of  it,  also  alone  makes,  namely :  That  the  same 
Principles  of  Distribution  by  which  the  Elements  of 
the  Human  Voice  are  distributed,  and  by  which  a 
True  Universal  Alphabet  is  constituted,  have,  in  the 
necessary  operations  of  Nature,  distributed  all  the 
higher  or  more  elaborate  or  less  elementary  Depart- 
ments of  Language,  and  all  the  details  of   these, 
thereby  constituting  Language  itself,  so  that  every 
tiling  within   this   ivhole  Domain  of  Being   is   nothing 
r/.sT  limn  continuous  Echo  and  Re-echo  of  the  Facts  and 
Principles  of  the  Alphabet  itself. 

81.  And,  finally,  it  appears  that,  inasmuch  as  Lan- 
guage is  an  Epitome  of  the  Total  Universe,  and  is  itself 
H  Representative  Minor  Universe,  the  Elements  of 
Language,  the  Sounds  and  Letters  of  the  Universal 
Speech  Alphabet,  must  be  and  are,  by  a  valid  and  le- 
gitimate Scientific  Analogy,  identical  with  the  Ele- 
ments of  Universal  Thought  and  Being — and,  there- 
fore, with  the  Universal  Logical  and  the  Universal 


CONSTITUTION   OF  THE  UNIYEESE.  51 

Ontological  Alphabets  respectively  ;  that  the  Inherent 
Meanings  of  these  Universal  Alphabetic  Sounds  are 
identically  these  Universal  Elements  of  Being ;  and 
that  the  Universe,  itself,  is  built  up  from  the  same,  in 
a  precisely  parallel  evolution  to  that  by  which  a  New 
Scientific  Universal  Language  is  evolved  from  its 
own  Alphabetic  Elements.  (73.) 


CHAPTER  III. 

FURTHER    DISTRIBUTION    OF    THE    UNIVERSE.      THE    ELE- 
MENTARY,  AND,   THE  ELABORATE.      LANGUAGE,   AS   AN 
EPITOME   OF    THE  UNIVERSE,   DISTRIBUTED. 

82.  We  have  next  to  distinguish  the  Elementary 
and  the  Elaborate  Departments  of  Being.  The 
Elementary  Sphere  is  well  illustrated  in  Language, 
where  the  results  of  the  Phonetic  Analysis  of  Speech 
are  already  familiarly  known  as  "  The  Elements  "  of 
Speech,  or  of  Language.  This  phrase  then  suggests 
all  the  remaining  and  more  compound  aspect  of  Lan- 
guage as  something  to  be  contrasted  with  the  Ele- 
ments ;  and  it  is  this  opposite  and  derivative  De- 
partment of  this  Total  Domain  which  is  meant  by 
the  Elaborate  Department  of  Language.  Technically, 
the  Elements  of  any  Domain  of  Being  are  the  Ele- 
mentismus,  and  the  remaining  and  contrasted  De- 
partment is  the  Elaborismus  of  that  Domain — as  of 
Language,  for  instance,  or  of  any  other  subordinate 
Domain,  or  of  the  entire  Universe  itself.  Finally, 
the  Science  of  the  Elements  of  any  given  Domain  is 
the  Elementology  of  that  Domain  ;  and  the  Science  of 
its  Elaborate;  or  derivative  Aspect  or  Do; mrl incut  is 
theElaborology  of  that  Doiunin.  The  AVnuLE  is  T  final. 


THE   ELEMENTARY,   AND   THE  ELABORATE.  53 

83.  Although  the  Elementisrnus  and  the  Elaboris- 
mus    are    very  Distinct   or   "  Discrete '    Degrees  of 
'Being,  there  is,  nevertheless,  an  Echo  of  Analogy  be- 
tween them.      The   Elenientisnius   of  the   Universe 
consists  of  Proto-pragmata  or  Primary  Realities,  as 
Entity  or  Thing,  Relation,  Matter,  Space,  etc.,  and  of 
Principles  or  Primary  Laws,  as  Unism,  Duism,  etc. 
These  Elementary  Distributions  then  reappear  in  the 
Elaborated  Universe,  not  as  mere  Abstractions,  which 
they  are  in  their  Elementary  Aspect,  but  as  embodied 
in,  and  constituting  corresponding  Elaborate  Domains ; 
but,  then,  in  conjunction  witli  other  Elements,  while  yet 
each   Element   occurs    in    such    preponderance,   in 
some  particular  instance  of  The  Elaborate,  as  to  be 
characteristic,  and  governing,  in  thctt  particular  given 
Domain.    By  Echo  of  Analogy,  each  Class  of  Sounds, 
and  each  Particular  Sound  occurring  in  the  Alphabet 
of  Speech,  answers  to,  and  is  answered  to   by  some 
Whole  Department  in  the  Elaborate  or  General  Consti- 
tution of  Language,  in  which  Department  the  same 
Principle  (represented  by  the  Particular  Elementary 
Sound)  recurs,  not  so  purely  and  abstractly,  but  yet 
in  a  governing  or  characteristic  degree.     This  ab- 
struse and  difficult  idea  will  be  rendered  readily  com- 
prehensible by  what  follows.     (85.) 

84.  It  is  thus  that  the  Absolutoid  and  Abstractoid 
Elementismus  of  Being  echoes  or  reappears  by  Ana- 
logy within  the  Kelatoicl  and  Concretoid  Elaboris- 
mus ;  the  Plan  of  Nature  being  to  organize  some  part 
of  her  Domains  as  the  somewhat  exclusive  residence  of 
each  Fundameutal  Abstract  Principle  ;  or  as  the  some- 


54  INEXPUGXABILITT,   ETC. 

wlmt  Independent  Obj edification  of  every  Primary  and 
Necessary  Aspect  of  Being — somewhat  so,  it  is  said, 
because,  by  another  Principle  of  Universology  called 
THE  INEXPUGNABILITY  o?  PRIME  ELEMENTS  (B.  O. 
t.  226),  Principles  and  Primary  Aspects,  in  part  ex- 
cluded, are  still  always  present  in  every  part  of  the 
Elaborate  World,  only  in  a  subordinate  or  minor  de- 
gree. There  is  MERE  PREPONDERANCE  (B.  O.  t.  526) 
of  the  Major  or  Governing  Principle,  and  SUBDOMI- 
NANCE  (B.  O.  t.  524)  of  the  Minor  or  Subordinate 
Principle,  in  the  given  instance  or  domain. 

85.  The  reappearance  of  Elementary  ED  titles,  Prin- 
ciples, or  Domains,  subsequently,  as  Elaborated  Do- 
mains, is  illustrated  as  follows  :  The  Yowel-Sounds 
are  an  Elemental  Domain  of  Speech  or  Language ; 
and  the  Consonant-Sounds  are  another  such  Domain.. 
But,  then,  Entire  Languages  occur  in  which  the  Vowel- 
Element  predominates,  and  which  it  characterizes,  as, 
for  example,  the  Italian  ;  and  other  entire  languages 
in  which  the  Consonant-Element  predominates,  and 
which,  it  characterizes,  as,  for  example,  the  German. 
These  Individual  Languages  are  then,  Elaborated  or 
Actual  Domains  of  Language  at  large,  and  repeat,  in 
their  oirn  stnu-hirr,  the  Two  Elementary  Domains  of 
the  Alphabet  of  Language,  (namely  the  Vowels  and 
the  Consonants),  by  which  these  languages  are  re- 
spectively characterized.  But  no  Language  can  ex- 
ist wholly  without  the  Vowel-Element,  nor  wholly 
without  the  Consonant-Element ;  and  this  fact  illus- 
trates what  is  meant  by  THE  INEXPUGNABILITY  ( 

of  PRIME  ELEMENTS.      The  Italian 


ITALIAN  AND   GERMAN. 

Language  merely  preponderates  in  Vowels,  and  the 
German  in  Consonants,  and  this  illustrates  what 
meant  by  MERE  PREPONDERANCE.  There  is,  in  other 
words,  a  subordinate  (but  also  Subdominant)  propor- 
tion of  Consonant-Sounds  in  Italian,  notwithstanding 
its  prevailing  Yowel  Character,  and  so  vice  versa,  of 
the  German  ;  and  this  is  what  is  meant  by  SUBDOMI- 

NANCE. 

86.  Reasoning  inversely,  it  may  be  said  that  the 
Italian  language,   renders,  on   analysis,  the  Vowel- 
Elemenfc  in  Preponderance,  and  the  Consonant-Element 
in  SuMominance,  and  that,  contrariwise,  the  German 
language  yields  the  Consonant-Element  in  Prepon- 
derance and  the  Vowel-Element  in  Subdominanoe. 

87.  It  is  the  Aggregate  of  the  Elementary  Domains 
of  Being  (or  of  any  given  Domain)  which  constitutes 
the  Elernentismus.     It  is  the  Aggregate  of  the  Ela- 
borate Domains  which   constitutes  the  Elaborismus. 
Phonetics  and  Alphabetics  pertain  to  the  Elementis- 
mus  of  Language.     The  Yowels  and  Consonants  are 
Elementary  Departments,  or  Special  Domains  with- 
in the  Domain  of  Phonetics,  or  within  the  Alphabet. 
The  Alphabet  of  Vowels  and  Consonants  (with  their 
interspaces  of  Silence)  are,  indeed,  virtually  the  whole 
of  the  Elementismus  of  Language.     Every  thing  else 
in  Language,  Grammar,  Dictionary,  Rhetoric,  Logic, 
the  Musical  Expansion  of  Language,  the   History, 
Local  Distribution  and  Etymological  and  Gramma- 
tical Comparison  of  different  languages,  are  collect- 
ively  the  Elaborismus  of  the  Universal  Language- 
Domain   or  of  Language  at  large ;  all  of  which  is 


56  SOUNDS   AND   SIGNS. 

built  up  from  the  Universal  Alphabet,  or  rests  upon 
it,  as  Elementisinus,  as  a  house  rests  upon  its  foun- 
dation, ov  as  the  parts  of  a  house  are  correlated  with 
its  vestibule  or  main  entrance  ;  as  a  wheel  depends 
upon  its  hub  or  centre ;  or  as  any  peripheric  expan- 
sion upon  its  basis,  centrum,  core  or  pivot. 

88.  Vow  el- Sounds  and  Consonant- Sounds  must  be 
carefully  distinguished  from  the  Letters  or  Signs,  writ- 
ten or  printed,  by  which  these  Sounds  of  the  Alpha- 
bet  are  signified  or  represented — and  they  are  very 
apt  to  be  confounded  with  them.     Sounds,  Yowel  or 
Consonant,  are  what  we  make*  with  our  mouths  and 
Jiear    with   our   ears;    and   are    precisely   the   same 
whether  we  know  what  they  mean,  and  the  letters  by 
which  they  should  be  written  or  printed,  or  whether 
we  know  neither  what  they  mean,  "nor  by  what  letters 
to  write  or  print  them — as    when   we    listen    to    the 
speaking  of  an  unknown  language. 

89.  Letters  are,  on  the  contrary,  what  we  see  with 
the  eye,  when  we  read,  and  make  with  the  hand,  when 
we  write,  and  represent  by  types,  when  we  print.    They 
are,  indeed,  used  to  signify  sounds,  but  they  are  not 
themselves  sounds,  and  may  even  be  falsely  used,  so 
as  to  misrepresent  the  sounds,  instead  of  truly  re- 
presenting them,  as,  for  example,  when  people  spell 
inaccurately  (with  reference  to  whatsoever  standard 
of  correctness). 

90.  In  different  languages,  the  same  Sound  is,  now, 
in  the  deficiency  of  any  accepted  and  practical  Uni- 
versal Alphabet,  frequently  represented  by  quite  dif- 
ferent letters  ;  so  that,  in  learning  a  new  language,  we 


VOWELS  AND   CONSONANTS.        .  57 

have  often  to  learn  new  Values,  in  sound,  for  the  let- 
ters with  the  native  values  of  which  (English,  for  ex- 
ample) we  are  already  familiar.  (For  instance  a  is, 
in  French,  pronounced  not  a,  but  ah  ;  i  is  pronounced 
not  i,  but  ee,  etc.)  For  Universal  purposes  we  have, 
therefore,  first,  to  agree  in  what  way  we  will  repre- 
sent (print  or  write)  the  Sounds  of  the  Alphabet,  be- 
fore we  can  be  sure  that  we  and  the  people  of  other 
countries  shall  be  thinking  and  talking  of  the  same 
Sounds,  even  when  we  may  be  using  the  same  letters. 

91.  Vowel-Sounds  are  sounds  ivhich  are  made  by  a 
continuous  flow  of  the  sounding  breath  through  the  mouth 
(and  sometimes  through  the  nose  also),  or,  in  other  words, 
WITH  THE  MOUTH  OPEN  ;  as  when  we  say  i  (ee),  Ah  ! 
Oh !     Consonant-Sounds  are  Cuts,  Breaks  or  Limits 
made   by  the   voice,   ivhich  ive  put  upon  the  sounding 
breath,  as  that  of  the  k  in  ling  or  in  o  (a)  Jc.     To  ana- 
lyze speech  into  its  elements  is  to  learn  to  utter,  sepa- 
rately, just  the  sounds  which  are   contained  in  the 
words,  without  regard  to  the  way  in  ivhich  the  ivords  are 
commonly  spelled ;  as  if  we  were  to  call  o  k'  oak,  omit- 
ting the  a  which  is  not  sounded,1     This  is  also  called 
Spelling  by  Sound.     It  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
to  become  perfectly  familiar  with  analyzing  or  spelling 
by  sound,  in  order  to  understand,  without  confusion, 
whatever  is  written  or  said  about  Sounds.     (App.  D, 
p.  190.) 

92.  The  Yowel-Sounds,  even  of  all  the  languages 

1  The  name  we  give  to  k  is  kay  ;  but  this  includes  a  vowel-sound 
(uy).  Practice  enables  one  to  explode  the  Consonants  without  the 
aid  of  any  appreciable  amount  of  vowel-soimd.  The  name  is  not 
the  sound ;  or  rather  it  is  something-  more  than  the  sound. 


THE   SKELETON  ALPHABET. 

of  the  world,  are  very  few,  although,  as  in  the  case  of 
colors,  they  may  be  made  numerous  by  attention  to 
minor  or  intermediate  shades  of  sound.  The  Three 
Pivotal  or  Leading  Yowel-Sounds  are  1.  a,  which  is, 
for  the  purposes  of  Universology  to  be  pronounced 
ah,  or  like  a  in  far ;  2,  i,  to  be  pronounced  ee,  or  like 
i  in  machfne  ;  and  3,  u,  to  be  carefully  and  uniform- 
ly pronounced  like  oo,  or  as  some  people  pronounce 
u  in  rule  (rool).  Between  a  and  i,  there  is  e,  to  be 
pronounced  like  a,  or  like  e  in  obey ;  and  between  i 
and  u  there  is  o,  with  its  ordinary  pronunciation. 
Two  Yowels,  pronounced  closely,  or  with  no  inter- 
mission, are  called  a  Diphthong.  Au  (ah,  oo)  is  the 
leading  diphthong.  This  leading  diphthong  will  be 
used  as  a  short  method  of  denoting  all  the  vowels  col- 
lectively ;  so  that,  to  say  au,  is,  as  if  we  should  say, 
all  the  voicels.  More  strictly,  au  (ah-oo)  fails  to  in- 
clude the  Middle-Mouth  Yowels  i  (ee)  and  e  (a)  ;  if 
they  are  also  explicitly  meant,  the  Triphthong  iau 
(ee-ah-oo)  is  requisite. 

93.  The  following  Table  exhibits  the  Natural  Al- 
phabet with  the  proper  Ordinary  Degree  of  Minute- 
ness in  the  discrimination  of  the  Sounds  ;  accom- 
panied by  the  Headings  and  Side-Titles  which  de- 
scribe the  Specific  Characters  of  the  different  Classes 
of  Sounds;  so  as  to  ln'iHile  a]  •  im.lerxtandt. 
of  their  Inherent  Relations  f>>  l/ie  Pi-'nim-rij  Enl'ii. 
and  Laics  of  Deiim.  Apart  from  minor  shades  or 
with  slightly  important  additions,  this  simple  Alpha- 
bet, primarily  serving  for  the  English  language,  is  ade- 
quate to  the  representation  of  all  existing  languages, 


ORDER  OF   SOUNDS. 

and  also  of  Alwato ;  or,  in  a  word,  of  all  possible  human 
speech.  Marked  or  modified  types  will  be  elsewhere 
introduced  for  the  intermediate  Sounds,  down  to  any 
requisite  degree  of  fineness  in  the  shades  of  sound. 
Such  is  the  simple  character  of  The  Universal  Li 
Alphabet.  This  Skeleton  Alphabet  as  it  may  be  call- 
ed— by  analogy  with  a  skeleton  regiment  in  the  army, 
which  has  its  Pivots  or  officers  and  its  ground-plan 
complete,  to  be  subsequently  filled  in,  up  to  its  entire 
complement,  with  subalterns  and  privates — though 
characterized,  in  a  general  sense,  as  English,  is  so 
only  because  the  basis-distribution  of 'sounds  is  the 
same  for  English  as  for  all  languages  ;  hence  the 
adjective,  English,  may  be  omitted  or  parenthesized. 
The  Nasalization  (97)  is  needed  at  this  day  even  for 
English  as  we  have  almost  daily  need  for  the  trans- 
literation of  French  words  containing  this  sound. 

94.  The  different  Classes  of  Sounds  are  introduced, 
in  the  Table,  in  the  order  in  which  they  will  be  sub- 
sequently considered ;  the  Vowels  first,  the  S 
Consonants  next,  etc.  There  are  three  bastard  or  less 
perfect  vowels,  not  hitherto  mentioned,  represented 
by  Italics  (000),  namely  a,  u,  o,  pronounced  1.  as  a  in 
mare  or  ai  in  a?'r,  or  like  a  in  at  prolonged  ;  2.  as 
u  in  cz(t,  cwrd  ;  and  3.  as  aiv  in  <m*ful  or  o  in  or  (short 
in  not.)  The  eight  vowels  of  the  Vowel-Scale,  (in  the 
following  Table)  are,  therefore,  pronounced,  (in  the 
order  of  their  accompanying  numbers),  as  follows  : 

i  e  a  a  u  oou 

eei  (in  feet) ;    a  in  fate  ;    ai  in  air  ;    ah  in  ah  '  ;    u  in  um  ;     a  in  ell ;     o  :     oo. 

The  diphthongs  retain  the  exact  values  of  the  united 
*    vowels.     (The  ai  will  occur  for  a.) 


GO         TABULATION  OF  THE  ALPHABET. 

TABLE    No.    1. 

THE   BASIC    OR   SKELETON   UNIVERSAL  (AND  ENGLISH)  PHO- 
NETIC  ALPHABET. 

2.  Back-mouth.  1.  Middle-mouth.  3.  Front-mouth 

(Throat)  (Tongue-tip-aiid-teetli)  (Lips) 

Class  No.  1.        THE  VOWELS. 


Diphthongs. 

JL 

6. 

(0) 

5.          4.             3. 
(ff.)       'A          (rt) 

2. 

e 

i. 
i 

7.                      8. 
O                        El 

ai— 

-10 

181—  9 

03—11 

^ 

AU—  12 

,<?s  JV0.  2.        THE  SOLID  (OK  TUBE)  CONSONANTS. 

Stntoid,   SingvMd,  (Abstract,     k       (n  or  tsli)          t          tli       p 
or  Simple,  Inorgan-  •{ 

icoid.  (Concrete,      g1     (j  or  dz3a)       d        dli9      1> 


Motoid,  Pluraloid,  (Abstract,      *  sh  B  f 

or  Compound,   Or-  •< 
ganicoid.  /  Concrete,  zli  z  v 


JVb.  0.        THE  LIQUIDS  OK  VOWEL-LIKE  CONSONANTS. 
Statoid  —  Nasal  jajj  BD 

Motoid,  B       r 


.  4.        Tni:  AMBIGU'S  on  COALESCENTS. 
h  y 

(Diacritical  Mai-k  -n)     (The  Nasalization.} 

--  -  —  —  -  ••-'—-•  - 

'  Hard  as  in  /yivr. 

2  th  as  in  thy  ;  compare  with  ih  in  //n^li. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  SOUNDS.  61 

95.  This  Alphabet  is  the  General  Basis,  not  com- 
pleted in  details  (93),  of   an  English-Adapted  and 
Universal  Phonetic  Alphabet.     Its  most  appropriate 
name   is    The    Sheldon   (English   Phonetic)    Alphabet. 
There  are  two  additional  Back-Mouth  Consonant- 
Sounds,  occurring  where  the  stars  are  placed  in  the 
Table,  (Class  No.  2),  namely,  1.  the  ch  (or  Hi)  as  in 
the   German    nacA,    and   2.   the   heavy    correspond- 
ing sound   gh,  which   occurs   in  Gaelic   and  Dutch 
(the  old  English  as  in  throu(/A,  thorn/7?,  etc.)  and  is 
still  extant  in  Scotch  ;  sounds  which  are  very  primi- 
tive, but  which  do  not  abound  in  the  general  range 
of  Languages.     These   go   to   augment  this   Basic 
Alphabet,  when  instead  of  adaptation  to  the  English 
merely,  it  is  to  serve,  also,  as  the  Basis  of  the  Universal 
or  International  Phonetic  Alphabet.     There  are  also 
two  Yowel-Sounds  6  and  ii  (the  French  eu  and  «), 
and  two  others  e  and  i,  (the  French  open  e  and  Rus- 
sian or  Sclavic  i,  which  should  be  added  for  the  same 
purpose.     If  then  we  discard  $  and  j  as  compound 
sounds  (99),  the  number  of  Sounds  to  be  reckoned 
as  belonging   to    the   Skeleton   Universal   Phonetic 
Alphabet  is  36,  the  Skeleton  English  Phonetic  AJ- 
phabet  being,  in  this  way,  reduced  to  30  sounds ; 
but  it  will  be  found  practically  more  convenient  to 
retain   the   £   and  j,   (as  if  they   icere   simple),   and 
so  to  reckon   this  English  Alphabet  as  containing  32 
Sounds.     It   may  be  observed,  in  passing,  that  the 
Theoretic  number  of  a  full  Universal  Alphabet  is  64 
sounds  ;  and  that  32  is  the  half  of  that  number. 

96.  None   of    these    (six   additional   exceptional) 


62  NASALIZATION  DEFINED. 

Sounds  are,  however,  so  practically  fundamental  as  the 
30  (or,  including  £  and,/,  the  32)  sounds  which  occur  in 
the  English  Language,  as  shown  in  the  preceding 
Alphabetical  list ;  (although  the  th  and  dh,  occurring 
in  English,  are  also  rare  sounds  with  reference  to 
the  general  range  of  languages.)  Modifications  and 
Intermediate  Shades,  especially  of  the  Vowel-Sounds, 
require  additional  letters,  as  previously  stated,  or  the 
marking  of  some  of  the  letters  here  used,  (93,  000)  to 
print,  phonetically  and  satisfactorily,  even  the  English, 
and  still  additional  ones  to  print  all  the  numerous 
languages  of  the  earth.  The  details  of  this  extensive 
and  intricate  subject  belong  to  other  works.  (See 
especially  The  Vocabulary  to  the  "  Basic  Outline  of 
Universology,"  words,  Psychology,  Theology,  Uni- 
versology  and  Tikiwa ;  and  "  The  Alphabet  of  the 
Universe,"  and  "  The  Universal  Alphabet.")  What 
is  presented  here  is  simply  a  Platform  or  Common 
Foundation  of  A  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET,  from 
which  modifications  and  adaptations,  for  Special  lan- 
guages, and  for  various  degrees  of  Phonetic  nicety 
may  take  their  departure  ;  in  a  word  the  Skeleton  of 
a  Universal  Alphabet,  as  explained  above. 

97.  The  Nasalization  is  a  mere  tinge  of  the  Nasal 
Consonant  quality  (Nose-sound  or  Twang)  impressed 
xm  pure  Vowel-Sounds.  Some  languages  have  the 
whole  series  of  vowels  so  affected  or  in  other  words 
a  complete  series  of  nasalized  vowels,  as  the  Choc- 
taw,  for  instance.  The  French,  has  four  vowels  of 
this  order,  usually  represented  by  the  French  letter- 
combinations  an,  in,  on  and  un.  It  simplifies  the 


AMBIGUITIES  AVOIDED. 

consideration  and  representation  of  this  exceptional 
class  of  vowel-sounds  very  much,  however,  to  treat 
the  Consonant- tinge  so  impressed  on  the  vowels  in 
so  far  as  a  distinct  sound  as  to  denote  it  by  a  sepa- 
rate sign  which  may  then  be  affixed  to  any  vowel. 
(The  sign  adopted  is  a  small  n  at  the  top,  thus  an,  «*, 
on,  un).  There  is  also  an  Etymological  advantage  in 
this  method  (for  which  also  we  have  the  authority  of 
the  Sanscrit  Alphabet),  inasmuch  as  the  Nasal  Yowels 
have  originated  by  the  absorption  of  Nasal  Conso- 
nants into  the  otherwise  pure  vowels.  The  Nasaliza- 

j. 

tion  is  placed  in  this  Alphabet  along  with  the  Coales- 
cents  ;  while  yet  it  is  not  a  letter,  and  is  not  numbered 
in  the  Alphabetic  Estimate.  It  is  merely  a  Diacrit- 
ical Sign,  in  the  nature,  more  of  the  Accent-Marks, 
and  may  be  applied  to  any  vowel.  (See  Introduction 
"Andrews'  and  Bachelor's  French  Instructor.")  (000.) 

98.  The  numbers  attached  to  the  Vowel-Letters  in 
the  Alphabetic  Table  represent  the  order  in  which 
the  Yowels    and  Diphthongs  are  generally  made  to 
follow  each  other  in  a  scale  or  series ;  although,  for 
different  purposes,  there  are  various  other  arrange- 
ments or  orders.     The  Consonant-Orders,  variously 
adopted,  are  still  more  numerous,  but  need  not  be 
specified  here. 

99.  It  is  a  common  Phonetic  idea   to   represent, 
each  single  sound  by  a  single  letter ;  but,  practically, 
this  is  not  done  in  existing  Alphabets,  and  need  not 
be  insisted  upon  even  for  our  present  purpose,  pro- 
vided no  ambiguities  are  permitted  in  respect  to  the 
sounds  which  arc  meant — no  matter  how  the  certain- 


64  COMPOUND  EUEMENTS. 

fcy  is  attained  (000.)  Accordingly,  th,  dh,  sh,  zh  and  ny, 
are  two-letter-combinations,  each  of  which  represents 
a  single  sound  ;  and  tsli  and  dzh  represent  two  sounds 
each,  or  are  the  equivalents  of  t,  sh  and  d,  zJt.  These 
combinations  are  however  so  close,  and  behave  so 
nearly,  in  various  ways,  like  simple  sounds,  that  it  is 
convenient  to  admit  them  into  the  Alphabet,  and  to 
treat  them  as  such.  They  may  be  compared  to 
Cyanogen  and  other  Compound  Elements  in  Chemis- 
try. Th  and  dh  are  used  for  the  two  sounds  of  th  in 
thigh  and  thy,  (dhy)  ;  zh  is  the  French  j,  or  the  Eng- 
lish z  in  azure.  The  ng  is  a  single  sound  of  the  nasal 
group,  the  g  having  no  value  as  such,  as  appears 
when  this  combination  takes  a  true  ("  hard  ")  (/-sound 
after  it ;  so,  for  example,  the  two  words  .singer  and 
finger  are  phonetically  represented  (in  this  Alphabet) 
by  singer  undjingger  (sing-er,  fing-ger). 

100.  The  Yowel-Signs  o,  it,  a,  having  no  other  dis- 
tinction from  o,  u,  a,  than  that  of  being  italicized  (94), 
they  should  be  changed  to  small  capitals  if  the  body 
of  the  word  in  which  they  occur  is  already  italic, 
thus  brod,  for  broad,  etc.     It  has  been  thought  im- 
portant to  avoid  by  such  means  the  introduction  of 
any  new  letters  or  types.     Observe  that  the  English 
long  i  (in  pme)  is  really  a  diphthong  equal  to  ai  (ah, 
ee),  very  closely  pronounced ;  the  two  sounds  squeezed 
as  it  were  together ;  and  that  the  English  u  (long)  is 
also,  in  a  similar  way,  a  diphthong,  equal  to  ee,  oo  or 
yoo,  as  in  wnion. 

101.  Of    the   Solid   (or  true)   Consonant   Sounds, 
those  which  are  printed  in  the  Table  in  a  Light  Line 


ABSTEACTOIDS  AND  CONC3ETOID8.         6,J 

type — tlie  series  ending  at  the  lips  in  p,  and  the  series 
ending  at  the  lips  in/ — are  Light  or  Thin,  and  hence 
signify  that  which  is  ABSTRACT  (or  "  The  Abstract "), 
as,  for  example,  a  Point  without  extension  ;  a  Line 
without  thickness  ;  a  Law  ;  a  relation  of  two  num- 
bers as  thought  of  in  the  mind ;  and  the  like  ;  or  the 
Analogues  of  such  Abstract  Things.  They  do  not 
therefore,  primarily,  represent  Heal  or  Concrete  Ob- 
jects or  Things. 

102.  Those  sounds,  on  the  contrary,  which  couple 
with  these,  and  are  printed  in  Heavy  or  Black-Faced 
Types — the  series  ending  at  the  lips  in  !>,  and  the 
series  ending  at  the  lips  in  v — signify  that  which  is 
CONCRETE  (or  "  The  Concrete  "),  that  is  to  say,  Eeal 
Objects  or  Things,  Mineral,  Vegetable  or  Animal ; 
things  which  have  bulk,  weight  and  substancive  value  ; 
and  the  analogues  of  these  objects  even  in  purely  Ideal 
Spheres,  as,  for  example,  ivithin  the  mind  itself. 

103.  This  distinction  between  these  two  sub-classes 
of  consonant-sounds  (Thin  and  Thick  or  Abstract-oid 
and  Concret-oid)  has  been  virtually  seized  upon  for 
a  practical  purpose  by  Isaac  Pitman,  the  inventor  of 
Steno-Phonography  or   Phonographic  Short -Hand. 
He  has  represented  the  Abstract,  more  strictly  the 
Abstractoid  sub-class  of  solid  consonant-sounds  by 
certain  single  Light  strokes  of  the  pen,  and  the  cor- 
responding Concrete  or  Concretoid  Class,  by  precisely 
the  same  strokes,  with  the  mere  difference  that  the 
strokes  are,  in  this  latter  case,  made  Heavy.     These 
are   two   sub-classes   of  sounds,  within  which   each 
Two  Sounds  produced  at  the  same  seat  of  sound  and 


66  PAIRING  0?  SOUNDS. 

taken,  one  from  the  Thin  or  Abstractoid,  and  one 
from  the  Thick  or  Concretoid  Variety,  make  a  couple, 
as  it  were  Male  and  Female,  and  so  nearly  resemble 
each  other,  that  if  the  sounds  of  one  of  these  sub- 
classes alone  be  taken  and  used  for  those  of  both, 
the  words  so  spelled  are  not,  for  the  most  part,  un- 
intelligible. A  little  awkwardness  only  ensues  from 
this  change,  as  if,  for  example,  a  woman  were  set  to  do 
a  man's  work ;  thus,  if  instead  of  "M.a,s(s)a,(tsh)uset(t)8s 
we  were  to  pronounce  Ma.sajuzerf  £,  the  result  would 
be  nearly  the  same  on  the  ear.  If,  indeed,  the  pro- 
nunciation be  done  deftly  and  lightly  but  few  people 
will  notice  the  difference. 

104.  The  7^-sound  and  the  hard  sound  of  g  fas  in 
r/ive)  are  such  a  pair  of  sounds ;  the  t  and  the  d;  and 
the  p  and  the  b  ;  and  the  th  (in  i high)  and  the   ill  (in 
thy)  ;  and  the  tsh  and  the  j ;  and  the  sh  and  the  zli ; 
and  the  s  and  the  z ;  and  the  /  and  the  v,  are  also 
such  pairs  of  the  Solid  Consonant-Sounds  ;  the  first 
of  each  pair  being  Abstractoid  (or  Masculoid),  and 
the  second  or  remaining  one  of  each  pair  (relatively 
soft)  being  Concretoid  (or  Feminoid.) 

105.  It  is  probably  only  a  small  proportion  of  Eng- 
lish speaking  persons  who  practically  recognize  the 
fact  that  there  are  two  different  sounds  of  th,  one  as 
in  ^//igh   (thin,  light,  hard,  abstract),  and  one  as  in 
li.y  (thick,  heavy,  soft,  concrete) ;  and  still  less  do 
they  recognize  that  there  is,  between  these  sounds  in 
f//igh  and  thy,  precisely  the  same  kind  and  degree  of 
difference  which  there  is,  between  t  and  d  in  tie  and 

The  twoness  of  the  letters  first  obscures  to  the 


STENO-PHONOGRAPHY.  67 

mind  the  fact  that  only  one  sound  is  represented  in 
any  given  case  where  they  are  employed ;  and  then 
the  sameness  of  the  letters  addressed  to  the  eye,  although 
the  sound  varies,  obscures  still  farther  the  difference  of 
sound  addressed  to  the  ear  ; 

Segnius  irritant  animos  demissa  per  aurem 

Quam  quse  sunt  oculis  subjecta  fidelibus. — HORACE.1 

106.  The  art  of  Beading  as  hitherto  taught  among 
us,  has,   in  ways  similar  to  this,  by  in  a  word  the 
barbarous  imperfections  of    our  Alphabet   and  Or- 
thography, greatly  fostered  the  bad  habit  of  hearing 
u'ith  the  eyes,  so  that  as  a  people  our  ears  have  been 
obfuscated  and  deadened  until  wre  are  nearly  incapa- 
ble of  learning  the  living  languages  of  other  nations. 

107.  The  following  Table  exhibits  the  part  in  ques- 
tion of  Mr.  Pitman's  Steno-Phonographic  Alphabet. 
I  have   placed   my   own   namings   for   the    distinct 
classes  of  sounds,  over  and  opposite  to  them,  for  the 
sake  of  preserving  unity  of  system  in  the  present 
work. 

TABLE    No.  2. 

ABSTRACT  FROM  MR.   PITMAN'S   STEXO-PHONOGRAPHIC 

ALPHABET. 
Sack-Mouth.    Middle-Mouth.         Front-Mouth. 

Statoid  or  Abstract,    __  k          /  9  t  (  tli       \  p 

Cardinoid.  (Concrete,    _  g         /  j          |  d         (  dh      \  b 

Motoid  or    ( Abstract,  J  sh       )  s  ^  f 

Oi'dinoid.     (Concrete,  J  z§a     )  z  ^   v 


1  Things  communicated  through  the  ear  affect  the  mind  less 
vividly  than  those  which  are  subjected  to  the  faithful  eyes. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

INHERENT  MEANINGS   OF  THE   ELEMENTS   OF  LANGUAGE. 

108.  The  present  chapter  will  contain  a  Tabulated 
condensed  statement  of  the  Inherent  Meanings  of  each 
of  the  32   (or,  including  -n,   the  33)   sounds  of  the 
Skeleton  or  Abridged  (Basic)  Alphabet,  which  is  at 
the   same   time   the   Basis   of  the   English-adapted 
Phonetic  Alphabet,  and,  with  a  few  additions,  that  of 
the  Universal  Phonetic  Alphabet,  applicable  alike  to 
all  the  Instinctual  or  Old-Style  Languages  and  to 
Alwato,  the  New  Scientific  Universal  Language. 

109.  To  cover  more  completely  the  usual  range  of 
Yowel  and  Consonant-Sounds  occurring  in   the  va- 
rious languages,  it  will  be  requisite  elsewhere,  to  add 
the  six  other  sounds  above  specified,  ch,  gh,  6,  ii,  e 
and  i   (95).      The  Special   Meanings   of    these  six 
sounds   are,   however,  mere   shades   of  Meaning  of 
related  sounds  which  are  herein  given,  and  are,  there- 
fore, omitted  from  this  elementary  exhibit.     The  Al- 
phabet so  augmented  may  then  be  regarded   as  the 
common  or  usual  International  Alphabet.     All  othor 
less  prominent  and  intermediate  varieties  of  Sounds 


VOWEL-MEANINGS.  G9 

will  be  treated  as  Extra  or  Exceptional,  and  all  Alpha- 
bets which  include  any  of  them  as  Specialized  or 
Adapted  Alphabets. 

TABLE    No.   3. 

INHERENT  MEANINGS   OF  THE  ALPHABETIC   SOUNDS. 

I. 

Of  the  Vowels  and  Diphthongs ;  the  Specially  Soft,   Concessive,  or 

Homogeneous  Sounds. 

1.    Of   the    Vo  iv els. 

I,  (ee),  LENGTH  ;  Centering  Continuity,  Persistency, 
BEING  ;  Ens,  Entity,  or  Thing  ;  somewhat  Inde- 
terminately or  vaguely  conceived  of.  I,  POINT, 

as  End.     (000.) 

E,  (a),  BREADTH  ;  Sideness,  Collateral! ty,  Relativity  ; 
Adjunct  or  Wing,  BELATION,  Law  ;  indetermi- 
nately or  vaguely  conceived  of.  E,  LINE,  as  Edge. 

A,  (ft  in  mrrre),  THINTH  (thinness)  ;  Flatness,  Subsid- 
ence, Decline,    Level,  Supersurface,  Attenua- 
tion, Etheriality ;    the  2nd   or  Finer   Form  of 
Matter;  indeterminately  or  vaguely  conceived  of. 
SURFACE,  as  Flat  Edge  or  Thin  Side  of  Solid. 

A,  (ah),  THICKTH  (thickness)  ;  Up-and-down-ness,  Ac- 
cumulation, Substance,  (goods,  wealth) ;  Rich- 
ness, Goodness,  Exuberance;  MATTER,  or  the  1st 
Form  of  Matter,  (gross,  palpable,  tangible) ;  in- 
determinately or  vaguely  conceived  of.  SOLID. 

U,  (uh),  TIME  ;  Flux,  Current ;  On-going;  Tempora- 
iV/Vv?,  Ordinary  Events,  Sublunary  Transactions; 
indeterminately  or  vaguely  conceived  of.  FLUID. 


70  DIPHTHONG-MEANINGS. 

0,  (aw),  SPACE  ;  Expanse  (up  and  around),  the  Empy- 
rean, the  Firmament ;  Spiritualities,  CAEDINABY 
Events,  Transcendental  Affairs  ;  indeterminately 
or  vaguely  conceived  <f.  SOLID-ofcZ. 

0,  FttONT ;  Light,  Presentation,  Brilliancy  (as  of  the 

face  or  countenance) ;  View,  Aspect,  Prospect ; 
Clearness,  Demonstration,  Scientific  Insight, 
Prevision,  Theory ;  Idea,  Ideology,  Idealism, 
A  priori,  somewhat  indeterminate.  CRYSTAL- 
INE. 

U,  (oo),  BACK  ;  Shade,  Retiracy,  Obscurity,  (as  of  the 
posterior  and  inferior  portions  of  the  body) ; 
Occultness,  Turbidity,  Dubiosity ;  Obser- 
vational, Empirical  Knowledge,  Imperfect 
Science  ;  Practice  as  contrasted  with  Theory ; 
Experientialism  as  against  Idealism,  A  pos- 
teriori; indeterminately  conceived  of.  COLLOID. 

2.    Of   the    D iphthong s. 

lu,  (ee-oo),  INTERPENETSATION  ;  Transit,  Crossing, 
Twirling,  Copulation;  indeterminately  or  vaguely 
conceived  of.  GERM. 

01,  (aw-ee\  MASCULISM  ;  Super-incumbency  and  Em- 

brace, (as  of  the  Sky  resting  upon  and  em- 
bracing the  Earth) ;  Canopy,  Over-shadowing ; 
indeterminately  conceived  of.  IMPREGNA- 
TION. 

Ai,  (ah-ee),  FEMINISM  ;  Sub-recumbency  and  Passivity 
(or  Reaction  as  Passion  and  Production,  as 
of  the  Mother  Earth  fecundated  by  the  Light, 


THE   STATO-ABSTRACTOIDS.  71 

Moistures  and  Magnetisms  from  the  Heaven 
or  Sky)  ;  Ground,  Platform,  Footstool ;  vaguely 
and  indeterminately  conceived  of.  PROLIFI- 
CATION. 

An,  (ah-oo),  HOMOGENEITY,  INFINITY,  UNLBIITEDNESS  ; 
Interblending,  Obliteration  of  Differences, 
Proto-plasmal  Incipiency,  Quasi-inarticidateness  ; 
vaguely  and  indeterminately  conceived  of.  Inde- 
terminateness  or  lack  of  Limits  or  Sounds,  and 
consequent  Vagueness,  are  the  grand  characteristic 
of  locality  or  Vowel-Sounds.  THE  UNLIM- 
ITED (112.) 

II. 

Of  the  Consonants  ;  Rigorous,  Limitative,  Differentiative  or  Het&ro- 

genizing  Sounds,  (true  Articulations  or  little-jointings — 

Lat.  articulus,  A  LITTLE  JOINT.) 

1.    Of    the    Solids. 

a. 

Of  the  Abstractoid  Solids. 

a. 

Of  the  Statoid  (or  Simple)  Abstractoid  Solids. 

K,  Simple  or  Single  Ofrhess  or  FROMNESS  ;  Apartness, 
Division,  DIFFERENTIATION  ;  Abstract  or  Pure 
Simple  DUISM. 

T,  Simple  or  Single  ATNESS  ;  Togetherness,  Unition, 
INTEGRATION  ;  Abstract  or  Pure  Simple  UNISM. 

P,  Simple  or  Single  FROM-AND-ATNESS  ;  The  higher 
or  Compound  Integration  of  Apartness  and 
Togetherness  ;  of  Division  and  Unition ;  or  of 
Differentiation  and  Integration ;  Hinge-wise- 
ness  ;  the  Cardination  (Latin,  cardo,  A  HINGE)  or 


72  THE   MOTO-ABSTRACT01DS. 

hinging,  in  the  one  relation,  of  the  two  wings 
or  opposite  aspects  of  the  relation  ;  Cuneisin, 
(wedge-ism) ;  Abstract  or  Pure  Simple  TEINISM. 

Th,  PIVOT  ;  Interpunct  or  Interpoint ;  (th  and  dh  are 
obscure  in  meaning  or  difficult  of  apprehen- 
sion, and  need  not  receive  particular  attention 
in  the  first  instance). 

C  or  Tsh  (=  t,  sh),  Atom,  Monad,  Centered  or  Pivotal 
Object  in  an  "Abstract  Schema  or  plan  ;  and  as 
substitute  for  kh,  CEASIS  ;  a  mashing  or  break- 
ing together  as  of  broken  lines.  Q  aud  j  are 
compound  sounds  admitted  into  the  Alphabet 
on  the  same  footing  as  Cyanogen  in  Chemistry 
(98.) 

ft-      - 
Of  the  Motoid  (or  Compound)  Abstractoid  Solid*. 

Sh,  Compound  or  Pluraloid  FEOMNESS  ;  Dispersion, 
Diffusion,  Divergency  ;  Abstractoid  Compound 
Apartness,  Ramification,  or  Branchiness  ;  Ab- 
stract or  Pure  Compound  DUISM. 

S,  Compound  or  Pluraloid  ATNESS  ;  Collection,  Concen- 
tration, Convergency,  Abstractoid  Compound 
Togetherness,  dumpiness,  or  Unition ;  Ab- 
stract or  Pure  Compound  UNISM. 

P,  Compound  or  Pluraloid  FROM-AND-ATNESS ;  the 
Compound  or  Pluraloid  higher  Integration  of 
Fromness  and  Atness,  of  Dispersion  and  Col- 
lection, etc.  ;  Winnowing,  Working,  Finishing  ; 
Omni- variant  Activity  ;  Abstract  or  Pure  Coni- 
•  tmd  Ti;i?,isj«. 


THE   STATO-CONCRETOIDS.  73 

b. 

Of  the  Concretoid  Solids. 

a. 
Of  the  Statoid  of  (Simple)  Concretoid  Solids, 

G,  (hard  as  in  </ive)  TRUNK  ;  Process,  Existence  or 
Forth-putting  (cf.  for,  sense,  Fr.  pousser,  TO 
GEOW  UP)  ;  Tail  or  Trail  and  Trunk — all  that 
is  contrasted  with  the  Head ;  Stalk,  Staff, 
Stem,  any  Pro-cess,  Procedure  or  Proceeding ; 
Shaft-like  or  Concrete  Continuation ;  as  the 
"  wake  ':  of  a  vessel ;  Bottom,  Seat,  Ground  ; 
the  EARTH  as  Fundamentum  beneath  and  up- 
holding the  Sky  or  Heaven  ;  FORCE  ;  Primal 
or  Producing  Force,  Upheaval ;  a  posteriori 
ORIGIN  or  source. 

D,  HEAD  ;  Bulb  or  Knob,  End,  Top  ;  Concrete  Object 
or  Thing  ;  Superincumbent  Weight,  as  of  the 
Head  on  the  Shoulders,  of  the  Sky  or  Heaven 
on  the  Earth,  etc. ;  Zteac?-weight,  Deadness, 

Inertia,   KESISTANCE  ;   Reaction,  Permanency, 
as  of  Eternal  Principles  ;  a  priori  Origin. 

B,  HEAD-AND-TRUNK  ;  the  entire  Body  ;  Body,  Cada- 
ver, Cadaver-like  Organismus  (called  Inor- 
ganic) ;  ACTION  or  BLOW,  including  Impact  or 
Primal -Force  and  Resistance.  The  Inorganic 
World  or  Cosmos  as  contrasted  with  the  Or- 
ganic or  Yital ;  the  Inorganismus  or  Mineral 
World ;  Earth-and-Sky  or  Heaven  (GAUB — 
from  g  to  b.) 

Dh,  INTER-KNOB  ;  Head-centre,  Hub  ;  The  Turn-stile 

3 


74  THE   MOTO-CONCRETOIDS. 

or  standard  with  Arms — Stabiliological ;   (see 
Th ;  B.  O.  Index.) 

J,  (  =  d,  zh),  Bunch,  Clod;  Centered  or  Pivotal  Object 
in  a  Concrete  Schema  or  Congeriated  Ar- 
rangement; and,  as  Substitute  for  gh,  Con- 
crete Crassis  or  Mash  of  Substance  or  Sub- 
stances ;  Earthy  and  Atmospheric  Conjunc- 
tion ;  Earth  in  respect  to  its  surface,  soil, 
weather,  and  mixtures  or  composts  generally  ; 
The  Earth  as  the  abode  or  residence  of  Man. 

ft. 

Of  the  Motoid  or  (Simple)  Concretoid  Solids. 

Zh,  TEEE  or  PLANT  ;  Yegetism  ;  Concretoid  Branch- 
ing ;  Dispersive  Force,  Disruption. 

Z,  THE  ANIMAL  ;  Animism — Concretoid  Gathering 
and  Centering,  a  girding  up  to  contain  the 
life ;  the  Cub,  or  Beast,  including  Man. 

V,  THE-PLANT-AND-ANIMAL  transcended ;  True  Yitism  ; 
Human  Biology,  "  Mind."   The  Organic  World 
as  contrasted  with  the  Inorganic  ;  the  Organis- 
mus  (ZHAUV — from  zh  to  v.) 

2.  The    Liquids  —  Confluent. 

a. 

Statoid — Extensional. 
M,  BIGNESS — Magnitude,  Muchness,  y  >?.v/v,  OUTNESS. 

N,  LITTLENESS — Minitude,  Not-muchness,  minn*,  IN- 
NESS.  (M  Affirmative.*,  N  Negative.) 


THE  LIQUIDS   AND  AMBIGU'S.  75 

Ng,  MEAN  POSITION — Neutrality,  Indifference,  Equal- 
ity ;  neither  Much  nor  Little,  Equation,  neither 
Out  nor  In. 

b. 

Mbtoid — Professional. 

L,  SLOWNESS — Littleness  of  Movement,  Gentleness, 
Sweetness,  Softness,  Lull. 

R,  RAPIDITY — Muchness  of  Movement,  Violence, 
Velocity,  Roughness,  Rudeness,  Rigor. 

3.    The    Ambigu'  s     or    Coalescents. 

H,  ATOMIC  DIFFERENCE, — Etherial,  Breath-like  ; 
Spirit ;  Infinite  Attenuation,  Human-spirit-like 
Being. 

Y,  RADIATING  CENTEALITY — as  of  a  Star ;  Focus  and 
its  Radiations,  Spiritual  Pivotism  or  Centre  of 
Luminosity  or  Intelligence  and  of  Heat  or 
Love  ;  Godhood,  The  Soul.  Spiritual  Vital 
Centre  of  any  Object,  as  of  the  Universe  or  of 
the  Individual. 

W,  CAEDINATED  SEQUENTIALLY — as  of  an  animal's 
tracks  in  a  Pathway  or  Trail ;  Reciprocal  Side- 
wise  Inter-communication,  as  of  companions 
walking,  (waddling,  wagging,  waggling,  walk- 
ing) and  in  conversation  ;  Intercourse,  Conver- 
sation, LANGUAGE. 

-n,  (The  Nasalization,  or  Nasal  Twang),  Incompre- 
hensibility, Mystery,  The  Ineffable  ;  Je  ne  sais 
quoi. 


CHAPTER  V. 

JUSTIFICATION  OF  THE  ASSIGNMENT  (AS  MADE  IN  THE 
LAST  TWO  PRECEDING  CHAPTERS)  OF  THE  INHERENT 
MEANINGS  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE. 

110.  The  Vowels  and  Eaclt  Class  of  Consonant-Sounds 
represent,  as  shown  in  what  precedes,  a  Primitive 
Logical  or  Noinological  Aspect,   and  hence,  in  this 
sense,  a  LAW,  or  First  Necessary  Condition,  of  Being ; 
which  is  then  true,  also,  in  greater  speciality,  of  each 
Individual  Sound. 

111.  The  Yowels  represent  Proto-plasmal  Being, 
the  (Jollective  Undifferentiated  Materials  or  Ingredients 
of  Being,  with,  at  most,  preliminary  or  incipient  as- 
pects, only,  of  Differentiation  and  Organization.    This 
Domain  is  therefore  collectively  the  Homogeneity  of 
Being,  and,  in  its  Universal  Aspect,  it  is  Kant's  Real- 
ity, or  SOMETHING,  or  "  The  Unlimited  "  or  "Infinite." 
The  Interspaces  of  Silence  in  Speech  represent  Kant's 
Negation.     They  are  the  Analogue  of  Blank  Space, 
7te.ro,  or  NOTHING. 

112.  The  Consonants  are  Breaks  and  Limits  in 
Vocality,  and  represent,  therefore,  Kant's  Limitation 
which   is   Heterogeneit ij .     The   Thin   or  Abstractoid 


NOVEL   NAMES   OF   SOUND-CLASSES.  77 

» 

Consonants  represent  strictly,  "  The  Limiting,"  to 
per  as,  and  the  Thick  or  Concretoicl  Consonants,  "  The 
Limited,"  (B.  O.  a.  20-25,  t.  204,  467.)  The  Liquids 
represent  Inter-blended  or  Generalized  Limitation,  the 
return  from  The  Heterogeneous  towards  The  Homo- 
geneous, by  the  mingling  and  expunging  of  the 
sharper  Lines  of  Differentiation.  The  Anabigu's  or 
Coalescents  represent  those  still  finer  Essences  of 
Being  which  are  Spiritually  Vital,  and  which  border, 
transitionally,  upon  The  Unlimited  or  Infinite  (the 
Vowels),  on  the  one  hand,  and  upon  Limitation  or 
The  Finite  (the  Consonants),  on  the  other  hand. 

113.  The  Alphabet  is  distributed,  it  will  have  been 
observed  (Chapter  III.),  into  Classes  of  Sounds 
bearing  titles  some  of  which  are  new,  the  propriety 
of  which  will  appear,  however,  in  some  instances,  . 
immediately,  and,  in  other  instances,  upon  further 
consideration.  Solids  is  a  term  of  this  novel 
character.  It  has  not  heretofore  been  employed 
in  classifying  Sounds ;  but  the  term  Liquids  is  of 
long  and  well  established  usage,  and  it  implies 
Solids,  for  the  counterparting  and  hitherto  unnamed 
class.  Abstract  and  Concrete  (more  strictly  Abstract oid 
and  Concretoid)  are  new  in  this  application  for  those 
two  great  Classes  of  Consonant-Sounds  which  have 
been  heretofore  very  variously  named  as  Thin  and 
Thick,  as  Sharp  and  Dill,  as  Light  and  Heavy,  as 
Tenues  and  Medice,  as  Surds  and  Sonants,  as  Whispered 
and  Spoken,  as  Hard  and  Soft  Cheeks.1  The  new 


Max  Miiller. 


78  GROUNDS   FOE  ASSIGNING  MEANINGS. 

terms  Abstracts  and  Concretes  or  Abstracttids  and  Gon- 
cretoids  will  be  found  specially  appropriate  as  directly 
indicating  the  Grand  Fundamental  Distinction  in 
'  Ontology  between  "  The  Abstract  "  and  "  The  Con- 
crete' with  which  these  Sounds  are,  by  inherent 
analogy,  in  strict  accord,  and  which  they  will  be  used 
throughout  the  Structure  of  the  New  Universal 
Scientific  Language  to  represent.  The  remaining 
unusual  terms,  Statoid,  and  Motoid,  Singuloid,  and 
Pluraloid,  Inorganicoid  and  Organicoid,  Cardinoid  and 
Ordinoid,  involve  so  much  of  detail  that  it  will  not 
be  appropriate  to  explain  them  here.  They  do,  how- 
ever, in  part,  explain  themselves. 

114.  To   exhibit   in   detail  all  the  grounds  upon 
which  these  Particular  Meanings  are  assigned,  as  in- 
herent, to  these  several  Sounds  of  the  Alphabet,  would 
require  a  Volume  as  large,  perhaps,  as  the  whole  of 
this  Synopsis.     For  want  of  space,  the  statement  of 
these  reasons  must  be  very  greatly  condensed  here. 
They  are  partly  Analogical,  partly  Analytical,  partly 
Synthetical,  and  partly  Cumulative  or  fieflectiu  . 

115.  The   Analogical  proof  is    that   which   results 
from  such   considerations   as   were  presented  in   a 
preceding   chapter;' from   the  fact,  in  other  words, 
that,   Language    being    a  Minor   Universe,   or    an 
Epitome  of  the  Universe,  in  its  Gknerals,  it  should, 
also,  conform  in  its  own  Distribution  to  the  Distribu- 
tion of  the  Universe  itself  down  to  the  minutest  de- 
tails; and  hence  that  the  Elements  of  /Speech  should,  I?/ 
a  strict  A  PRIORI  reasoning,  answer,  item  for  item,  to  the 
Onioloqical  Elements  of  the  Universe  at  large.    (Ch.  III.) 


ANALOGICAL  AND  ANALYTICAL  ROOTS.       79 

116.  The  Proofs  are  Analytical,  when,  having  ascer- 
tained that  a  given  Class  of  Sounds  corresponds  with 
a  given  Cosinical  Realm  or  General  Category  of 
Thought  and  Being,  as,  for  instance,  the  Thin  Solid 
Consonant-Sounds  with  The  Abstract,  and  the  Thick 
Solids  with  The  Concrete,  we  then  analyze  one  of 
these  Cosmical  Realms  into  its  Constituents,  and,  at 
the  same  time,  analyze  the  corresponding  Class  of 
Sounds  into  its  Components,  and  assign  these  In- 
dividual Component  Sounds  to  the  corresponding 
several  parts  of  the  Cosmical  Realm  in  question.  It 
is  thus  again  that  The  Abstract  itself  being  found  to 
be  sometimes  Simple  or  Single  (as  a  One  Line,  or 
One  Point,  etc.)  and  sometimes  Compound  or  Pluri- 
form  (as  that  which  is  composed  of  many  points  or 
many  lines),  we  seek  for  a  similar  difference  in  Sub- 
Classes  of  the  corresponding  Class  of  Sounds,  and 
find  it  as  between  the  Statoids  or  Single  "  Hard 
Cheeks  "  or  Explodents,  the  Jc,  t,p,  which  are  made  by 
a  single  effort  of  the  voice,  on  the  one  hand,  and,  on 
the  other,  the  Motoids  or  "  Frictionals"1  (or  Compound 
"  Hard  Cheeks  ")  sh,  s}  f,  which  involve  a  mixed  vari- 
ety of  the  -vibrations  of  the  voice.  The  Simple  Ab- 
stract is  reduced,  by  further  Analysis,  to  Division, 
Differentiation  or  DUISM,  on  the  one  hand,  to  Unition, 
Integration  or  UNISM,  on  the  other  hand,  and  to  the 
Hinge-wise-ness — Half  Separative  and  Half  Unifcive — 
the  Cardinism  (Lat.  cardo,  A  HINGE)  between  Division 
and  Unition,  which  is  the  related  TRLNISM  of  these 


1  Prof.  Elsberg. 


80  THE   VESTIBULE   OF  LANGUAGE. 

two.  These  Three  Fundamental  Varieties  of  Tl-.e 
Simple  or  Unimorplnc  Abstract, — Division,  Unition,  and 
the  Hinying  of  these  Tivo  v.pon  each  other, — are  then 
found  to  be  answered  to  or  represented  by  the  Three 
Particular  Sounds  of  this  Class  k,  t,  and  p,  respec- 
tively. The  Pluriinorphic  Abstract  distributes  into 
similar  Particulars  represented  by  sh,  s,  and  f.  The 
Concrete  undergoes  also  Analogical  Distributions 
throughout,  terminating  on  the  Sounds  which  repre- 
sent the  Three  Kingdoms,  Mineral,  Vegetable  and 
Animal,  respectively,  (b,  zh,  z,  000.) 

117.  The  Proofs  are  Synthetical,  when  they  are  de- 
rived from  a  comparison  of  the  Parts  and  Shapings 
of  the  Mouth  in  the  production  of  the  Sounds,  and 
from  the  Effects  on  the  Ear,  or  from  the  character  of 
the  Sounds  themselves  as  made  and  heard  ;  and  when 
by  this  method  of  examination  (the  production  and 
the  audition  of  the  Sounds),  indications  are  discov- 
ered of  real  alliances  with  corresponding  ideas,  or  of 
a  Natural  Fitness  in  the  Sounds  to  express  or  to  ex- 
cite given  ideas — not  merely  nor  mainly  by  an  ex- 
ternal and  obvious  imitation,  the  bow-wow  theory,  but 
more  truly,  by  an  interior  and  occulfc  symbolism  or 
enactment  of  the  corresponding  ideas.  This  peculiar- 
ity of  sounds  is  illustrated  in  the  following  instances  : 
Let  a  skilled  Phonetician,  with  some  elocution- 
ary power,  utter  and  prolong  and  exaggerate  a  little 
the  trill  of  the  consonant-sound  r,  and  no  one  will 
fail  to  detect  in  the  rapid  vibrations  of  the  point  of  the 
tongue,  and  in  their  effect  upon  the  ear,  an  exact  re- 
semblance to  the  whirr  and  buzz  of  a  circular  saw  or 


CUMULATIVE   OK  KEFLECTIYE  PROOFS.  81 

other  roughened  wheel  in  rapid  rotation.  It  is  in  ac- 
cordance with  this  quality  in  the  r,  that  it  is  fixed  scien- 
tifically as  the  Analogue  of  Rapidity,  or  of  the  plus- 
quantum  of  motion  or  velocity.  On  the  contrary,  let  the 
same  elocutionist  render  the  real  value  of  the  sound  /, 
and  it  will  be  found  to  be  the  opposite  of  the  r  in  qual- 
ity or  character,  and  to  be  the  striking  imitation  of  all 
gentle  movements,  or  of  the  minus-quantum  of  motion 
or  velocity.  By  similar  methods  and  close  observa- 
tions of  the  mechanical  production  of  the  sounds  by 
the  organs  of  speech,  and  of  their  suggestive  effects 
upon  the  ear,  it  has  been  found  practicable  to  deter- 
mine empirically  and  with  proximate  accuracy,  in 
confirmation  of  the  pure  theory,  the  Primitive  or  Or- 
ganic Meaning  of  each  Articulate  Sound.  It  is  the 
difficulty  of  this  kind  of  proof,  however,  that  it  re- 
quires viva  voce  illustration,  to  be  rendered  obvious 
and  demonstrative,  and  that  it  cannot,  therefore,  be 
made  wholly  available  by  mere  description.  In  im- 
mediate connection  with  this  subject  stand  the  splen- 
did experiments  and  discoveries  of  Helmholtz  on 
Sound  and  Yoice,  which,  exhaustively  pursued,  will 
conduct  to  a  complete  mechanical  exposition  of  the 
reasons  of  the  echoing  character  between  oral  and 
musical  sounds,  and,  finally,  of  these  last,  and  so  of 
both,  with  corresponding  mental  and  objective  states. 
118.  The  proof  is  Cumulative  or  Reflective,  when  it 
arises  from  the  weU-worJdng  of  the  theory  in  practice  ; 
by  the  constant  accumulative  mass,  therefore,  of  con- 
firmations reflected  or  cast  back  upon  the  theory  by 
the  practical  application  of  it  in  the  infinitely  ex- 


82  ETYMOLOGICAL  CONFIRMATIONS. 

tended  and  varied  system  of  word-building  winch  is 
characteristic  of  Alwato.  This  test  will  in  every 
particular  delight  the  thorough  student  of  the  sub- 
ject, and  the  guidance  supplied  by  this  new  percep- 
tion of  the  identity  of  Sound  and  Sense  will  come  to 
be  regarded  by  him  as  the  most  perfect  and  exhaust- 
ively comprehensive  of  scientific  discoveries,  instru- 
ments, and  methods. 

119.  As  part  of  this  latter  species  of  proof,  there 
is  also  an  immense  current  of  etymological  confirma- 
tions, of  the  instinctual  or  spontaneous  order,  recur- 
ring throughout  the  Hindo-European  family  of  lan- 
guages, and  which  it  would  carry  us  too  far  to 
attempt  to  illustrate  extensively  here.  Plato,  in  his 
Phsedo,  furnishes  some  examples  from  the  Greek. 
The  following  instances  from  the  English  of  the 
forceful  and  vigorous  nature  of  the  sound  r,  and  of 
the  gentle  sweetness  of  the  I  must  suffice  at  this 
point.  It  is,  however,  a  discovery  of  no  little  im- 
portance, in  this  connection,  that  by  the  Principle  of 
Universology  called  TERMINAL  CONVERSION  INTO  OP- 
POSITES  (B.  O.  t.  83),  there  is  a  strong  tendency  in 
words  to  go  over  into  the  directly  opposite  meauhnj  from 
that  which  is  primitively  inherent  in,  or  native  to, 
them.  This  occurrence  is  indicated,  in  the  following 
Lists,  by  the  Heading  :  8ubdominance  of  the  Opposite 
These  lists  contain  a  nearly  exhaustive 


showing  of  the  root-words  of  the  English  language 
which  In'fjin  with  the  letter-sounds  T  and  /,  together 
with  some  few  others  (where  these  sounds  occur  in 
tlio  middle  or  at  the  end  of  the  root.) 


DOMINANT  MEANINGS   OF  R.  83 

1. 

The  Letter-Sound  R. 
a. 

DOMINANT  MEANING  :  Discontinuity,  or  Solution  of 
the  Continuity,  by  the  application  of  Force,  which,  re- 
peated or  continued,  is  RAPIDITY  of  Movement ;  whence, 
as  Special  Classes  of  Meaning  1.  BREAK,  2.  ROUGHNESS 
(brokenness  of  Surface),  3.  TURN  or  Curvature  (the 
continued  repetition  of  breaks),  4.  BEAT  (the  Simple 
Active  application  of  Force),  and  5.  to  GRAB  or  seize 
(the  application  of  Force  eitJier  to  accelerate  or  to  arrest 
Motion.) 

1.  BrEAK,  (b)reak  (to  break  out  with  Moisture), 
rack,  racking  (pain),  rock  (a  broken  fragment),  ruck, 
rift,  raft,  rupture,  riff-raff  (broken  stuff),  rut,  route  (the 
breaking  up  of  the  enemy's  position)  ;  raze,  razure 
(destruction)  ;  rash  (out-breaking,  violent),  rush, 
rave,  rage,  row  ;  to  rear,  (to  break  ground  or  break 
up  his  gait  as  a  horse)  ;  (w)rig,  (wriggle)  ;  rag  (a 
thing  broken  or  torn),  ridge  (the  break  at  the  top)  ; 
ravine  (a  break  in  the  ground),  to  rive,  ray  (an  angle, 
or  break  of  light),  rad-ius  ;  radix,  root,  (where  the 
plant  is  broken  off  when  it  is  pulled  ;  compare  with 
branch,  the  thing  broken  off),  romp  (a  "  break 
down "),  rump  (the  break  of  the  body) ;  rumple, 
rumble,  roar  (breaking  noise),  rummage,  rampart, 
rampage,  run  ("  to  break  and  run  "),  rAeum  (flux), 
ruin  (Lat.  ruo  to  rusn)  ;  race  ;  current,  course  ;  raid, 
rail,  rip  ;  ramus  (a  branch.)  Even  rest  is  the  break 
off  of  Motion  ;  so,  contrariwise,  rise,  raise,  and  rouse 
are  breaks  from  the  quiet  state. 


84  SUBDOMINANT  MEANINGS   OF  R. 

2.  ^?OUGH  (and  strong) — a  broken  surface — ruck-ed 
ruff,  ruffle,  i  ipple,  raffle  (to  rudely  jostle  together)  ; 
rug,  rugged,  rude,  (e)rude,  raw,  raucity  (hoarseness, 
roughness  of  the  throat),  ?'ugose,  rugate,  wrinkled, 
rasp,  rodent  (gnawing),  rat   (a  gnawer  and  noise- 
maker),  rust  (cor- rod-ing),  rattle  ;  rank,  rancor,  rub. 

3.  TurN  (continuous  breaking  of  the  direction  or 
course),   round,   run  die,   ring,   rinse    (to  swash   the 
water  around),  roil,  roll,  rollick,  wrap. 

4.  BEAT,  rap,  rarn,  rain,  (patter,  compare,  for  sense, 
to  pat  and  to  leat.) 

5.  GrAB  (to  seize),  rob,  rape,  ravish  (soize  with 
violence),    rapacity,    ravage ;    creep,    ramp,    ?-apid 
(clawing  along)  ;  rake,  reap  (to  gather  in) ;  wrapped, 
rapt  (snatched  away,  as  in  a  trance) ;  rhapsody,  rap- 
ture, rope  (a  binder  or  holder)  ;  rich  (having  gather- 
ed in) ;  compare  for  sense,  the  relation  of  the  Saxon 
ric,  meaning  -dom  or  domain,  Lat.  reg-o  TO  REIGN, 
with  rich,  and  at  the  same  time  Ger.  graf,  a  noble 
of  a  particular  order  with  Ger.  greifen  (to  seize)  and 
Eng.  grab.     The  rich  man  is,  in  primitive  sense,  the 
grand  grab,  seizer,  or  conqueror. 

b. 

Subdominance  of  the  Opposite  Meanings  of  R. 

1.  STrETCH,  (not  break — owing  to  the  tenacity  of  tic 
material  to  which  the  force  is  applied)  •  strain,  straight, 
Lat.  rect-us  (STRAIGHT),  rectitude ;  rigor  (what  is 
drawn  tight),  ?*egular,  rule,  reach,  ?-ight,  rate  (of 
movement  from  strain  or  effort)  ;  ratio,  reason,  read, 
reel  (drawing  out,  continuing). 


DOMINANT  MEANINGS   OF  L.  85 

2.  RUB,  (to  make  smooth,  not-rough ;  to  un- 
roughen ;  as  to  skin  means  to  remove  the  shin,  not  to 
put  it  on,  as  it  should  mean  by  analogy  with  to  dress.) 

2. 
The  Letter-Sound  L. 

a. 

DOMINANT  MEANINGS  :  Continuity,  from  lack  of  any 
sufficiency  of  Force  to  produce  Rupture  or  Breakage, 
whence  Lentitude  or  Stoivness  (the  Antithet  of  Rapidity  ; 
see  R.)  The  Special  Classes  of  Meaning  are,  1.  NOT- 
BROKEN-NESS,  2.  NOT-ROUGH-NESS  (Unbrokenness  of 
Surface),  3.  NOT-ROUND-NESS}  4.  NOT-GRABBED  (or  seized) 
i.  e.  not-forcefully  held  ;  not  subject  to  much  static  force. 

1.  NOT-BROKEN-NESS,   lasting    (continuous),  /eisure 
(time  not  broken  in  upon),  ?ist  (a  continued  string- 
like   exhibit),    level,   ?awn    unbroken   surface,    (level 
means  not  canted  or  inclined,  not  diverted,  bent  or 
broken  from  a  primary  simple  position)  ;  foathe  (to  put 
far  away),  ?oth  (keeping  far  off),  /oaf,  a  ?oaf,  a  division  ; 
lobby  (a  waiting  dalliance  or  delay-ance  room),  ?ate 
(post-poned),  to  ?eave  (put  off),  ?iberty  (freed  condi- 
tion, enlarged,  extended),  Zife  (continuity  of  being), 
?ava,  ?ane  ;  Zurch,  /ength,  ?ate. 

2.  NOT-ROUGH-NESS,    (not-brokenness    of   surface 
whence  smoothness,  g?abrousness),  fabricatal,  lubri- 
city, /umbricus  (a  slippery  worm),  ?ampry,  ?iver ;  s?id- 
ing,  g7iding,  s/ippery ;  s?ow  (smoothness  or  gent?eness 
of    motion),    luxation    (a   loosing),   luxury    (smooth 
soft-f/attering  condition)  ;  Zusciousness  (softness  and 
sweetness    to   the   taste) ;    /iniment,  faring,   (a  soft- 


86  DOMINANT  MEANINGS  OF  L. 

inner  surface),  Lafc.  Zingua  (the  tongue),  whence  Zan- 
guage,  from  its  glabrous  or  sZippery  character  ;  lick, 
Zap,  lecher ;  ?ee  (calm  shelter) ;  like  (smooth  or  even 
with),  Zeef  (kind,  fond),  love  (gently  affecting),  as  Zief  ; 
leer  (to  look  flatteringly),  Zeman  (a  sweet-heart.) 

3.  NOT-EOUND-NESS  (not  continuously   diverted   or 
broken),  whence  Zong  (the  opposite  idea  to  roundness), 
to  Zong  for  (to  be  drawn  out  in  a  direct  Zine  towards  an 
object,  by  one's  desires) ;  Zank,  /ink,  Zean,  line,  Zane, 
loon,  Zeap,  Zanguish,  Zanguid,  leisure  (time  prolonged), 
Zymph,    Zath,   Zathe    (thinness  and   extension),   Zatus 
(Lat.  for  broad  or  extended)  and  Zatus  a  side  (the 
f/ank  or  thin  part)  ;  Zead,  Zode,  Zoin  (the  thin  extended 
part.) 

4.  NOT-GKABBED  (or  held),  Zax  (let  go  Zoose),  Zaugh 
(to  relax  the  features)  ;  Zoose,  Zose,  Zoss,  to  Zeave,  a 
Zeaf  (something  folded  out),  Zet  (permit  to  go),  Zeft, 
Zoud,  Zease,  Zot,  Zicense ;  Ziquid,  Ziquor  (what  is  Zet  to 
flow) ;  Zout,  Zubber,   sZuggard,  Zummox,  ?ob?olly-boy, 
Zuck  (what  happens  without  constraint) ;  Zazy  ;  Zack, 
Zace  (having  Zacunaa  or  Zacking  places),  *s?ack,  sZow, 
Zower,  Zag,  Zay,  Zie,  Zodge,  Zatent,  Zurk,  Zure,  Zair,  Zinger ; 
Fr.  Zit   (a  bed),  Zitter,    Zand  (the   flat   surface)  ;   Zow 
(sagged  down  from  Zaxity),  Zisten  (cf.  to  Zie  Zow)  ;  Zake 
(a  low  place,  a  "  sink-hole  "),  Zagoon  (stagnant  water), 
Zedge,  the  Zap  (a  fold) ;  Zance,  Zaunch,  Ziinge  (Zet  drive), 
Zunch  (a  free  irregular  meal) ;  Ziberty,  (freedom,  per- 
mission, Zet  go),  /iber  (the  bark,  what  sttps  off ;  a  book 
tho  Zeaves  of  which  fall  asunder  or  are  free)  ;  Zinib, 
Zobe  ;  Zung,  Zobstcr,  Zug,  Zuggage,  Zoad,  Zip  (what  hangs 
or  dangles,  what  is  Zoosely  attached)  ;  Zunip  ;  Zapse, 


SUBDOMINANT   MEANINGS   OF  L.  87 

Lat.  /abor  (to  slide  and  go  down)  whence  /abor  as  that 
which  fatigues,  relaxes,  overcomes ;  ?atch  (what  is  lei, 
to  fall),  /atches  (faults,  things  which  fail  or  fall  away 
from  the  obligation) ;  louse,  Wizard  (a  glider.) 

b. 
Sitbdominance  of  the  Opposite  Meanings  of  L. 

1.  To  BEAT  or  strike ;  2.  To  GRAB,  fasten  or  hold. 

1.  To  BEAT  or  strike ;  to  Zick,  to  /amn  (let  fly  at  and 
hit),  a  ?amb,  a  young  animal  arrived  at  the  killing  or 
knocking-down  age)  ;  Zamina  (anything  beaten  flat), 
Ger.  Watt,  a  feaf,  a  f'at  thing  (Eng.  bZade) ;  Lat.  fax 
and   famen,   Eng.   light     (Lat.   faceo,   to    shine — to 
stream  or  beam  out  and  strike  or  fall  upon),  lucid, 
luminous,  ?ook ;    Hit   (up-heave),    Ger.   ?uft   (the  air, 
what  is  above) ;  foft,  ?evity,  tightness. 

2.  To  GKAB  (or  fasten),  a  ?igue  (a  binding,  Lat.  ligo, 
TO  BIND,  the  use  of  a  line  ;  Fr.  ?ier,  TO  TIE)  ;  a  lock 
(as  of  the  hair ;  what  is  first  left  free  to  flow,  whence 
it  curies  in  upon  itself  or  fastens  together,  Lat.  pfico, 
to  fold),  ?ock  (a  fastener) — this  opposite  idea  result- 
ing from  that  of  first  leaving  free.) 

120.  In  respect  to  the  scientific  probability  that 
Sounds  should  comport  their  own  meaning,  there  are 
two  schools  of  opinion  among  philologists,  on  the 
subject.  Socrates,  Plato,  Heyse  and  Max  Muller  re- 
present a  class  of  scholars  who  have  persisted  in  be- 
lieving in  this  inherent  natural  alliance  between 
sound  and  sense,  in  advance  of  any  great  positive 
ability,  on  their  part,  to  establish  the  theory.  There 


88  DE.    LAEDNEE  ;  PROF.    WHITNEY. 

is,  however,  in  tliis,  as  in  all  things,  an  adverse  class 
of  able  but  innately  conservative  thinkers  who  have 
always  great  capacity  for  pronouncing  dogmatically 
as  to  what  cannot  be  true  or  can  never  be  accomplished  ; 
and  sometimes  it  occurs  that  their  croaking  proph- 
ecies of  impossibility  are  refuted  almost  before 
they  are  uttered,  by  the  actual  accomplishment.  An 
illustration  occurs  in  what  is  popularly  attributed  to 
Dr.  Lardner  in  respect  to  the  impossibility  of  navi- 
gating the  ocean  by  steam.  Of  the  same  character 
will  be  found  to  be  such  utterances  upon  the  subject 
now  under  consideration  as  the  following  ex  cathedra 
announcement  by  the  learned  Professor  Whitney,  of 
Yale :  "  That  some  degree  of  such  subjective  correspond- 
ence, felt  more  distinctly  in  certain  cases,  less  so  in 
others,  may  have  sometimes  suggested  to  a  root 
proposer,  by  a  subtle  and  hardly  definable  analogy,  one 
particular  complex  of  Sounds  rather  than  another,  as. 
the  representative  of  an  idea  for  which  he  was  seek- 
ing expression,  need  not  be  absolutely  denied.  Only,  in 
admitting  it,  and  seeking  for  traces  of  its  influence, 
we  must  beware  of  approximating  in  any  degree  to 
that  U'ildest  and  most  absurd  of  the  many  vagaries  re- 
specting language,  the  doctrine  of  the  natural  and  in- 
herent significance  of  articulate  sounds."1 

1  "  Language  and  the  Study  of  Language,"  by  Win.  Dwight 
Whitney,  Professor  of  Sanscrit  and  Instructor  in  Modern  Lan- 
guages, in  Yale  College,  p.  430.  This  last  expression,  "  the  inher- 
ent significance  of  articulate  sounds,"  seems  probably  to  have 
been  quoted  from  previous  publications  of  my  own.  The  italics, 
in  the  above  extract,  have  been  supplied  by  myself,  to  exhibit  both 
the  admissions  and  the  assumptions  of  this  dictum.  S.  P.  A. 


THE   COUNTER-VERDICT.  89 

Despite  of  this  verdict  of  conservative  science, 
the  truth  of  the  subject  will  rapidly  vindicate  itself 
with  the  progress  of  the  development  of  the  new 
language.  In  the  following  chapter  a  few  prelim- 
inary specimens  of  word-building  by  the  new  prin- 
ciple will  be  exhibited.  It  is  only  with  the  expansion 
of  the  subject,  however,  far  beyond  what  the  limited 
nature  of  this  little  work  will  permit,  that  the  over- 
whelming force  of  the  demonstration  will  fully  ap- 
pear. It  is  a  mere  basis  which  we  can,  at  the  most, 
hope,  herein,  to  establish. 


CHAPTER   VI. 

DISCRIMINATION  OF  THE  POSITIVE  AND  THE  NEGATIVE  ; 
THE  CHAOTIC  AND  THE  OEDEELY ;  THE  HOMOGENEOUS 
AND  THE  HETEEOGENEOUS,  WITH  OTHEE  FUNDAMENTAL 
ONTOLOGICAL  DIFFEEENCES  ;  AND  OF  THE  COEEESPOND- 
ING  LINGUAL  AND  ALPHABETICAL  CLASSIFICATIONS. 

121.  Although  Nature  Science  and  Art  have  been 
presented  and  hitherto  insisted  upon  as   the  leading 
distribution,  practically,  of  the  whole  Universe  of  Af- 
fairs, still  there  are  other  distributions  which  are  in 
a  sense  more  primitive,  and  to  which  we  must  now 
give  a  portion  of  our  attention.     Metaphysically,  the 
Fundamental  distribution  of  the  Universe  of  Concep- 
tion is  into,  1.  SOMETHING  or  REALITY,  2.  NOTHING  or 
Non-Reality,  or  Negation,  and  3.  LIMITATION,  which 
last  is  properly  Articulation,  or  the  Hinging  Line,  or 
the  Joint,  between  the  Something  and  the  Nothing. 
Kant's  Three  Categories  of  Quality  or  of  the  Quali- 
tative  Constituency   of   Being   are,    accordingly,    1. 
Rwlity,  2.  Negation,  and  3.  Lint  if  of  ion. 

122.  In  the  corresponding  Qualitative  Constituency 
of  that  Special  Universe  called  Language  (which  we 
are  now  treating  as  the   epitome   of  the  Great  Uni- 


CONSTITUENCY  OF  UNIVERSE   AND   SPEECH.  91 

verse),  1.  THE  SOMETHING  or  Reality  is  SOUND  or  the 
Intoned  Breath,  2.  THE  NOTHING  or  Negation  is 
SILENCE,  or  the  Intervening  Spaces,  or  Silences,  be- 
tween Discourses,  Sentences,  Words,  Syllables,  and 
Sounds,  and  3.  LIMITATION  is  ARTICULATION,  or  the 
breaking  up  of  the  homogeneous  or  continuous 
sounding  breath  into  special  or  differentiated  partic- 
ular Sounds,  while,  still,  these  Sounds  are  held  to- 
gether in  Discourse  ;  and,  so,  being,  at  the  same  time, 
both  separated  and  united,  and,  hence,  cardinated  or 
bearing  a  hinge-wise  relationship  to  each  other,  they 
are  denominated  Articulate,  or  Articulated  Sounds ; 
the  word,  "Articulated3  being  derived  from  the 
Latin  articulus,  A  LITTLE  JOINT  or  HINGE. 

123.  In  a  similar  or  correspondential  manner,  in  the 
Outer  Material  Universe,  the  diffused  Ether  which  in- 
fills Space  echoes  to  and  represents  the  mere  Abstract 
or  Metaphysical  Something  or  Reality  of  Being  ;  the 
Blank'  Space  itself  holds  the  same  relation  to  the 
Metaphysical  Nothing  ;  and  the  Mathematical  Posit- 
ings  and  Divisions  of  Space,  and  the  Bodies  organ- 
ized from  the  Ether  in  the  Space  in  subordination  to 
the  mathematical  points,  lines  and  surfaces  limiting 
or  articulating  them,  as  the  planets  or  other  objects 
in  nature,  correspond  collectively  to  the  Metaphysical 
Category  of  Limitation  ;  ("  The  Limiting"  and  "  The 
Limited,"  B.O.  a.  20,  t.  204);  so  that  there  is  CORRES- 
PONDENCE or  ECHO  between  the  constitution  of  Language 
and  that  of  the  Material  Universe  and  that,  again,  of  the 
Abstract  Metaphysical  Domain  of  Pure  Thought,  re- 
spectively. 


92       "REALITY"  AND  "LIMITATION'   IN  SPEECH. 

Accordingly,  the  Silences  of  Speech  are  repre- 
sented on  the  printed  page  of  any  book  by  "  Blanl;*" 
or  by  what  the  printers  call  "  Spaces  " — the  identical 
two  terms  (Jilank  and  space)  which  are  applied  to  the 
Nothing,  or  Negative  Aspect,  of  the  Material  Uni- 
verse— Blank  Space,  itself. 

124.  Dismissing  this  back-lying  and  lowest  dis- 
crimination ;  dismissing,  in  better  terms,  the  Nothing- 
Element  of  Speech,  the  Silence  or  Silences,  which  last 
correspond  to  the  Interstices  of  Space  in  the  Consti- 
tution of  Matter ;  and  turning  our  attention  to  what 
remains,  or  rather  to  what  results  from  the  Some- 
thing-Element in  conjunction  with  its  Negative  Base  ; 
to  the  Utterance,  in  other  words,  or  Phonos  of  Lan- 
guage ;  this,  then,  undergoes  a  primary  division  which 
echoes,  in  a  higher  or  concrete  sense,  to  the  remaining 
one  of  these  metaphysical  differences,  that  between  1. 
Reality,  and  2.  Limitation.     The  "  Reality  "  of  Lan- 
guage, or,  what  is  the  same  thing,  the  Substance-like 
Element  of  Speech  is,  then,  Vocality,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  Complex  or  Aggregate  of  the  Vowel-Sounds ;  and 
the   "Limitation"    or    Articulation   of   Speech,   the 
Morphic    or    Form-like    Element,    is    the    complex 
or  aggregate  of   the  Consonant-Sounds — whence  it 
happens  that  the  Consonants  are  habitually  denomi- 
nated Articulations,  in  a  more  special  sense  than  that 
in  which  the  term,  Articulate,  is  applied,  generically, 
to  Speech  or  Language  at  large. 

125.  But,  intermediate  to  the  prior  distribution  of 
Speech  into  Sound  and  Silence-,  and  the  subsequent 
distribution  into  Vocality  and  Articulation,  there  is 


."THE  INFINITE"  AND  "THE  ABSOLUTE."         93 

another  (less  important)  division  or  distribution  to 
be  noticed.  -  This  concerns  the  difference  between 
the  so-called  Inarticulate  Sounds  made  by  animals, 
and  in  part  also  by  the  human  voice,  as  in  sneezing, 
coughing,  and  the  like,  and  True  Articulate  Speech. 
By  Inarticulate  is  here  meant,  however,  Indeterminate 
Articulation,  or  articulation  of  a  lower  grade,  in  the 
same  manner  as  by  the  term  Inorganic  we  do  not 
mean  that  which  has  no  kind  or  degree  of  organiza- 
tion, but  that  which  is  relatively  without  organization. 
Inarticulate  sounds  may  be  taken  to  correspond  with 
meteors,  meteoric  dust,  and  the  like,  which  have  the 
same  amorphous  and  anomalous  relation  to  the  regu- 
larly constituted  planetary  bodies  and  other  stih1 
more  highly  organized  objects  which  these  inarticu- 
late sounds  hold  to  language  as  articulate  speech. 
This  Indeterminate  Kegion  is  the  Analogue  of  the 
"  Primitive  Chaos,"  of  the  poetical  conception. 

126.  Assuming,  now,  the  diphthong  au  (ah-oo),  as 
representative  of  the  vowels  at  large, — the  whole 
Vowel-Scale  (92), — which  it  is,  with  sufficient  ac- 
curacy for  ordinary  uses,  the  termination  -io  (ee-o) 
to  mean  Realm  or  Domain  and  -ia  (ee-ah)  to  denote  a 
Principle,  we  have  the  Alwato  word  au,io  (ah-oo-ee-o) 
to  denote  the  realm  or  domain  of  Unlimited  or  Infinite 
KEALITY — Unlimited  or  Infinite,  because  there  is  no  such 
element  of  sound  appearing  therein  as  denotes  Limi- 
tation, which  it  is  the  special  function  of  the  Conso- 
nants to  do.  Au,io  means,  therefore,  The  Infinite 
Reality,  or  Simply  "  THE  INFINITE."  It  is,  still,  how- 
ever, The  Infinite,  (Illimited  or  Unlimited)  in  a  Sen- 


94  "THE  INFINITE''  AND  "THE  FINITE. 


or  Comprehensible  sense,  such  as  is  Relative,  or 
Related  to  our  Comprehension  or  Capacity  of  Under- 
standing. Hence  it  is  The  Ordinary  or  Non-tran- 
scendental Infinite.  If  we,  then,  add  the  Nasalization, 
(97,  153,  156)  as  the  sign  of  Incomprehensibility,  we  have 
aunio,  meaning  The  Absolutely  Infinite  or  Transcen- 
dental Beality,  —  rationally  inferred,  but  incomprehen- 
sible, —  or,  in  simple  terms,  "  THE  ABSOLUTE."  In  this 
latter  coupling,  the  meanings  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Au,io,  "  The  Infinite  "  (The  Unlimited  ;  The  Homogeneous.) 

2.  Aunio,  "The  Absolute"   (The   Incomprehensible,    "The   Un- 

knowable.") 

The  termination  -ski  (skee)  means  science  or  lore 
(German  -lehre,  24.)  Auski  means,  therefore,  Phil- 
osophy in  the  general  or  ordinary  sense  (Empiri- 
cal), and  aunski  means,  specifically,  Transcendental 
(or  Cardinary)  Philosophy,  (purely  Rational.) 

127.  We  may,  in  the  next  place,  assume  the  Con- 
sonants ng,  k,  v,  1,  as  the  appropriate  representative 
group  of  those  Sounds  (including  one  of  each  Con- 
sonant Class)  to  denote  the  Consonants  at  large,  or 
all  the  Consonants,  as  au  was  chosen  to  denote  the 
Vowels  (126.)  Aided  in  utterance  by  the  au,  (the  Con- 
sonants so  require  the  Yowels),  and  (if  preferred)  by  a 
prosthetic  e,  we  have  ngkauvlio  or  engkauvlio  (eng- 
kah-oo-vlee-o)  to  mean  "  THE  FINITE,"  or  The  Lim- 
itary (the  function  of  the  Consonants  being  Limita- 
tion). Coupled  in  this  sense  we  have  : 

1.  Au,io,  ''  The  Infinite  "  (Relative,  Common,  or  Ordinari/.} 

2.  Engkauvlio,  "The  Finite"  (Eiigkiiuvlski,  Echosophy,  B.  0.  t. 

13  and  c.  J3  do.) 


THE  UNCONDITIONED  AND  THE  CONDITIONED.    95 

128.  Sir  William  Hamilton  has,  with  great  subtle- 
ty, perceived  The  Infinite  and  The  Absolute   to  be 
the  two  species  of  a  genus,  which  he  calls  The  Un- 
conditioned.    This  last,  The  Unconditioned,  should 
embrace,  therefore,  in  its  representation,    both  the 
pure  or  unnasalized  Yowels  and  the  Nasal  Yowels. 
Hence  its  appropriate  naming  is  au,i,aun,io  (ah-oo-ee- 
ah-oon-ee-o.)     To  this  the  proper  and  full  antithet 
is    engkau,i,aunvlio     (f.ngkah-oo-ee-ah-oon-vlee-o) 
meaning  The  Conditioned,  including  enkauvlio,  The 
Ordinary,     and    engkaunvlio,    The    Transcendental 
Finite.     Some  of  these  terms  may  seem  somewhat 
awkward  to  the  neophyte  ;  but  the  ideas  themselves 
are  of  the  most  subtle  and  embarrassing,  and  natural 
language  then  exactly  echoes  this  embarrassment.    As 
we  descend  to  more  feasible  domains  the  words  will 
become  correspondingly  feasible.     (The  i  at  the  mid- 
dle of  these  compound  terms  means  and.)     It  will 
appear,    elsewhere,    that    Shau,io    (shah-oo-ee-o), 
is   the  more   usual    naming  for    The   Conditioned, 
Aushio  (ah-oosh-ee-o)  for  the  Unconditioned  ;  Sau,io 
(sah-oo-ee-o)  for  The  Finite  (The  Collected  and  In- 
cluded), and  Ausio  (ah-oos-ee-o)  for  The  Infinite, 
(The  Excluded  Unlimited.)     (  .) 

129.  Intermediate  between  these  two,  The  Unlim- 
ited "  Reality  "  (The  Yowels),  and  The  "  Limitation," 
(Consonants),  there  is  a  still  more  subtle  Spiritual 
Region,  the  RATIONAL-BEING-DOMAIN,  (the  God-Spirits- 
Humanity-domain),  The  Theandric  Domain,  or  Thean- 
drismus ;  which  is  represented  by  the  Ambigu's  or 
Coalescents   (Half   Yowels,   half  Consonants ;   h,   y, 


9G  -10  AND  -SKI  COMPARED. 

w,  n.)  This  is  named  Hwaunio  (lioo-ah-oon-ee-o). 
Swedenborg  may  be  mentioned  as  a  representative 
name  in  connection  with  this  subtlest  of  all  possible 
domains  of  human  investigation. 

130.  We  return  now,  from  this  embarrassing  pre- 
amble of  all  philosophical  distribution,  to  the  more 
feasible  and  pleasing  arena.  Assuming  au,io  for 
the  Common  Infinite,  or  merely  Unlimited,  the  Simple 
Undefined  Domain  (which  is  to  be  primarily  subject- 
ed to  distribution),  it  subdivides  into  the  following 
Eleven  (or  with  the  Collective  au,  Twelve)  depart- 
ments, (guarding  the  termination  -ski  for  Science.) 

TABLE    No.   4. 

a.  Elementary. 

I,io,  (ee-ee-o),  The  Ens-  or  Being-Do-       Iski,  (ee-skee),   Ontology   (not-trans- 

main.  cendental.) 

E,io,  (a-ee-o),  The  Relation-Domain.          Eski  (a-ski,    Nomology    "Logic"  — 

E»ski,  Hegel.)    (000.) 

b.  Elaborate. 

04,  io,  (a(ir)-ee-o),  Etheriality-domain.       ^Iski,  (a(ir)-skee),  Etherialogy  ;    the 

Science  of  the  Second  Form  of  Mat- 
ter, (B.  O.  t.  63). 

A,io,  (ah-ee-o),  Matgriality-domain.  Aski,    (ah-skee)  MATERIAXOQY  ;    the 

Science  of  the  First  Form  of  Matler, 
(B.  O.  t.  03)  ;  Indeterminate  or  Phi- 
losophoicl  NATUROLOGY. 

£7",io,  (uh-ee-o),  Time-domain.   "Con-        fski,  (uh-skee),  TEMPOROLOGT.) 
tinuity"  —  Container  of  Co-Sequen- 
ces. 

O,io   (aw-cc-o),  Space-domain.    Soli-        Cteki,  (;iw-skee),  SPA-CE-OLOGY.) 
clarity  —  Container    of    Co-exi^ten- 


O,io,  (o,  ee-o),  Form-,  or  Idea-Domain.        Oski,(o-skc('),l!i<li>fluite  MORPHOLOGY, 
,  Vision,  Ken.)  Ideoloyy  ;  Iiidt'tcnninate  or  Phiios- 

SCIEN'IV  )L(  )(  ;  V—  Sri  I:NTI> 
t.  Pluto,  O\vcu.; 


RE-STATEMENT. 


97 


U,  io,  (oo-ee-o),  Movernent-tlomairi. 
(Practice,  Experience,  Feeling.) 


Uski,  (oo-skee),  MOTOLOGY,  Pracfical- 
ogy,  Indeterminate  or  Philosophoid 
ARTOLOGY ;  (PRACTICAL  PHILOS- 
OPHY.) 


Iu,io,  (ee-oo-ee-o),  Harmony-,  or  Con- 
j  un  ction-domatn. 

6>i,io,(aw-ee-ee-o),  Super-incumbency- 
domain. 

Ai,io,  (ah-ee-ee-o),  Sub-recumbency- 
domain. 


luski,  (ec-oo-skee),  Harmoniology. 
Oiski,  (aw-ee-skee),  SUPEKNOLOSY. 

Aiski,  INFEKNOLOGY,   Ihrndamentalr 
ogy. 


131.  We  may,  now,  restate,  in  abstract,  the  lead- 
ing portions  of  the  preceding  distribution,  as  follows. 
(Bead  from  below  upward  in  this  more  formal  Tabu- 
lation.) (B.  O.  c.  3-6,  t.  15.) 


TABLE    No.    5. 


ELABOEISMUS. 

3.  Uski,    (oo-ski),  AKTO-PHILOSOPHY,  (B.  O.  In- 
dex), 

(AETISMAL.) 


Aouski,  (ah-o-oo-ski),  Ela- 
borology,  of  the  Indeter- 
minate  or  Philosophic 
Domain.) 


Ieeld,(ee-a-i?kee).  ELEMEN- 
TOLOGY;  The  Recondite 


2.  Oski,  (o-skes),  SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY,  (B.  O. 
Index), 

(SCIENTISMAL.) 

1.  Aski,  (ah-skee),  NATURO-METAPHYSICS,  "PHIL- 
OSOPHY "  in  the  Most  Ordinary  and  General 
Sense. 

(NATUEISMAL.) 

ELEMENTTSMUS. 


/„ 
'  (< 


8'  IskL  (ee-skee)>  ONTOLOGY;  (The  Things.) 


132.  This  same  Domain  is  again  re-stated,  in  a 
modified  but  more  practical  way,  in  the  following 
Table.  (Read  still  from  below  upward.) 


98  PHILOSOPHY,   SCIENCE,   RELIGION. 

TABLE    No.   6. 

3.  Iu,ia,  (ee-oo-ee-ali),  RELIGION. 

(Ecstatic,  Vital,  Cuhninative,  Harmonic.) 
(Cf.  Gr.  en  WELL,  and  Gr.  ending  -ia, — The  Essence  of  all  Good.) 

2.  Oski,  (o-skee),  SCIENCE,  in  the  High  Idealistic 

Sense.     SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY.  (B.  O.  Index.) 

(Pure  Theoretical,  Guiding,  Governing.) 

1.  Auski,  (ah-oo-skee),  PHILOSOPHY. 

(Metaphysical,  and  Practical,  as  Basis.) 

Two  Grand  Leading  SUB-SCIENCES. 

2.  I,iaski,  (ee-ee-ah-skee),  COMPAEOLOGY,  (Science 
of  the  Identity  of  Principle  as  occurring  in  different 
Spheres  or  Domains.) 

1.  I,ioski,  (ee-ee-o-skee),  MONOSPHEROLOGY  (Sci- 
ences of  the  Single  Sphere  or  of  Single  Spheres.) 

(These  two  also  culminate  in  luski — the  Science 
of  Religion — as  Harmonic  Reconciliation.) 

133.  Among  the  sets  of  correlative  terms  employed 
in  General  Science,  two  of  the  most  important,  while 
yet  of  the  most  vaguely  comprehended,  are  the  terms 
Homogeneous  and  Heterogeneous.  The  first  of  these  is 
derived  from  two  Greek  words,  liomolos,  SAME  or 
SIMILAE,  and  genos,  KIND  or  SORT,  and  the  second  from 
heteros,  OTHER,  and  genos.  Etyinologically,  there- 
fore, Homogeneous  means  or  THE  SAME  KIND,  and 
Heterogeneous,  OF  DIFFERENT  KIND  or  KINDS  ;  but  the 
etymological  meaning  of  scientific  terms  frequently 
gives  a  very  inadequate  idea  of  their  actual  meaning 
as  they  are  practically  applied. 


HOMOGENISM  AND   HETEROGESISM.  99 

• 

134.  Nothing  whatsoever  is,  throughout,  of  one  and 
the  same  kind  to  that  absolute  degree  that  no  dif- 
ferences can  be  discovered  in  its  various  parts ;  and 
nothing  is,  on  the  other  hand,  so  composed  of  dif- 
ferences that  no  common  ground  of  sameness  or  simi- 
larity can  be  found  to  exist  between  the  parts.     But, 
relatively,   or    in    Preponderance,    some   objects  are 
Uniform,  that  is  to  say  they  are  nearly  uniform  in 
their  composition  and  in  all  their  parts,  as  Water  or 
the  Air,  for  instance ;  and  other  objects  are  highly 
complex,  as,  for  instance,  the  Human  Body,  or  an 
Edifice,  the  Mind  of  Man,  Human  Society  (with  all 
its  manifold  interests)  and  the  like.     It  is  this  dif- 
ference between  objects  as  Simple  or  Uniform,  and 
as  Complex  or  Multiform,  especially  in  respect  to 
the  Substances  of  which  they  are  composed,  which  is 
intended,  in  Science,  by  the  terms  Homogeneous  and 
Heterogeneous.     The  terms   U/idi/ferentiated  and  Dif- 
ferentiated have   similar  meanings,  but  may  perhaps 

tend  to  apply  rather  to  Forms  than  to  Substances. 

135.  Even  the  same  word  may  be  differently  used 
to  mean  at  one  time,  the  Homogeneous  Aspect  of  an 
object,  and  at  another  time,  the  Heterogeneous  As- 
pect.    For  instance,  if  we  speak  of  Earth  as  a  sub- 
stance, as  when  we  say  Earth,  Air,  fire  and  Water, 
we  assign  to  it  a  Homogeneous  character,  leaving  it 
unlimited  (or  nearly  so),  even  in  our  thoughts,  in  re- 
spect to  shape  or  form,  or  the  lines  of  difference,  be- 
tween its  Component  Parts ;  but  if  we  speak  of  Earth 
or  the  Earth,  meaning  the  planet  which  has  that  name, 
we  have  before  the  mind  a  heterogenized  or  highly  dif- 


100  THE   HOMOGENEOUS  AND   THE   GDKEIIAL. 

• 

ferentiated  object,  with  definite  shape  or  external  limits, 
and  with  distinctive  differences  of  the  parts.  So,- in 
another  sphere,  if  we  speak  of  Mind  in  general,  we 
mean  mind  as  a  uniform  and  unlimited  ideal  Substance, 
and,  therefore,  as  Homogeneous ;  but  if  we  speak  of 
The  Human  Mind,  or  of  the  mind  of  a  particular  indi- 
vidual, we  mean,  as  it  were,  a  determinate  and  highly 
differentiated  object,  a  Complicated  Organismus,  and 
as  such,  something  Heterogeneous  in  kind. 

136.  The  diffused  Universal  ether  which,  theoreti- 
cally at  least,  fills  all  space,  may  be  taken  as  the 
Type  of  what  is  signified  by  THE  HOMOGENEOUS — 
technically  THE  HOMOGENISMUS  ;    as  the  typical  re- 
presentative, in  other  words,  of  all  objects  or  parts 
of  Nature  which  are  homogeneous  in  character.     A 
planet,   with  its  freightage   of  "minerals,   vegetables 
and  animals,  our  world,  the   earth,  for  example,  the 
limited  Cosmos,  enucleated  from  its  matrix  of  dif- 
fused and  attenuated  matter  is,  on  the   other  hand, 
the  Type  of  what  is  meant  by  THE  HETEROGENEOUS 

-technically  THE  HETEROGENISMUS  ;  as  the  typical 
representation,  in  other  words,  of  all  objects  or  parts 
of  Nature  which  are  heterogenized  in  character. 

137.  The  Homogenisnius  of  the  General  Cosmos  in- 
cludes TheProto-pragmata,  Bdmj,  Matter,  Tune,  S}  'ace, 
etc.,  and  easily  lapses  into  the  idea  of  general  diffusive- 
ness and  Liquidity,  winch  belong,  however,  really  to  the 
Generabismus,  defined  in  the  next  subsequent  paragraph 
(138.)     These  Liquidities  are,  primarily,  the  Great 
Ocean  of  Ether,  then,  the  Atmosphere  as  repeating  it, 
then,  Water  and  all  Fluids,  and  finally,  all  Plasm;  is. 


MLAU.IO  AND  MLAUSKI.  J01 

Emulsions  and  the  like  ;  and  the  Analogues  of  all  these 
in  other  more  special  spheres,  as  in  the  human  mind, 
for  instance.  The  Heterogenismus  subdivides,  on  the 
contrary,  into  the  Inorganic  "World  (the  Inorganismus) 
and  the  Organic  World  (the  Organism  us) ;  or  into  The 
Mineral  World,  on  the  one  hand,  and  The  Vegetable 
and  The  Animal  Kingdoms,  on  the  other  hand.  (140.) 
138.  The  Universal  Homogenisrnus — Al,au,io — is 
(par  excellence)  THE  INFINITE  ;  and  Time  (*/,io),  Space 
(o,io),  etc.,  are  Special  Infinities  ;  but  The  Horno- 
geneoiis,  with  any  less  extensional  affix  than  al-,  lies 
nearer  to  The  Conditioned  or  Limited.  It  is  a  tech- 
nicality of  the  Sciences,  or  of  what  is  Positive,  though 
diffused,  and,  hence,  it  is  closely  allied  with  the  idea 
of  Generality.  This  latter  (Generality)  is,  however, 
wholly  within  the  Limitary,  and  is  named,  there- 
fore, from  the  Consonants ;  but  from  that  class  of 
them  which  is  most  confluent  or  least  distinctifying. 
These  are  analogous  with  the  Liquidities  described 
in  the  preceding  paragraph  (137)  and  are  specifically 
the  "  Liquids."  These  are  adapted  especially  to  the 
naming  of  all  Being  the  type  of  which  is  Liquidity. 
The  combination  ml  is  then  chosen  (a  leading  sound 
taken  from  each  Class  of  Liquids)  to  serve  with  au  to 
supply  the  name  for  Generality.  Mlau,io,  is,  therefore, 
The  General  Domain  (technically  the  Generajisnms), 
and  Mlauski,  is  Generalogy  (The  Indeterminate  As- 
pect of  things,  broadly  extended  and  interblended,  the 
lines  of  discrimination  partially  obliterated.)  Auguste 
Comte  functionates  in  this  department  of  Positivity 
which  he  calls  Natural  Philosophy. 


t 

102  KAUVIO. 

189.  The  Counterparting  term  is  kauvio,  The  Spe- 
cial, (technically  The  Specialismus  ;  or  the  Domain  of 
Special  and  Exact  Limitation,  or  Discriminations,  or 
of  Speciality.  The  Particular  Sciences  are  called 
Specialities  and  their  Professors  Specialists.)  Kauvski 
is  Specialogy.  It  is  within  this  that  Spencer  begins 
his  distribution  of  the  Sciences — into  1.  THE  AB- 
STRACT, 2.  THE  CONCRETE,  and  3.  THE  ABSTRACT-CON- 
CRETE Sciences.  Shaupski  is  Abstractologij  (Logic 
and  Mathematics),  s3ta«!*ski  is  Concretology,  and 
mblaufiski,  Abstract-Concreiolor/y.  This  last  term  is 
nearly  unpronounceable  in  itself,  but  it  implies  in  its 
Composition  these  Special  Sciences  1,  Mlauski  Chem- 
istry (in  a  Special  Aspect  named  Jauski,  Monadol- 
ogy),  2.  Blauski  Mechanics,  and  3.  Fauski  Physics — 
of  which  three  it  is  sgmewhat  arbitrarily  composed.1 

1  The  awkwardness  of  the  word  in  such  instances  is  not  the  fault 
of  the  new  language  (Alwato),  but  one  of  its  chief  cxaUcnces,  for  it 
reveals  by  the  incongruity  of  the  Sounds  so  brought  together  the 
corresponding  incongruity  in  the  classification  of  the  subjects  them- 
selves. Yet,  there  may  be  reason  and  convenience  (in  some  very 
general  aspects  of  Classification)  which  would  furnish  names  es- 
sentially uneuphonious.  The  words  may  still  serve  as  a  visible 
notation  for  things  too  heterogeueously  allied  to  comport  any 
better  single  naming  ;  or,  the  effort  to  pronounce  such  words  may 
serve  as  a  vocal  gymnastic;  or,  finally,  their  very  incongruity  may 
serve  as  the  most  effective  criticism  on  a  classification  which  would 
demand  such  namings,  as  a  lingual  vote,  so  to  speak,  against  it, 
and  perhaps  as  a  means  of  banishing  it  from  popular  acceptance. 
But  if  it  be  desirous  to  retain  the  particular  class,  other  and  more 
euphonious  designations  can  always  be  devised  by  changing  the 
principle  of  Comminution:  thus  Shauso-zlianbski  is  a  literal  Al- 
\vas.>  translation  for  Abstract-Concretology.  (S;v,  also,  other  works.) 


BO,IO   AND  VO,IO.  103 

140.  ZhaubsM  distributes  into  the  proper  Sciences 
of  the  three  kingdoms.     Without  tracing  the  details 
it  may  be  said  that  b  meaning  body  apart  from  the 
specific   idea   of   life   (109)    bau,io   (bah-oo-ee-o)    is 
the  Alwaso  term  for  Inorganismus  (the  mineral  and 
planetary  world),  and  v,  meaning  living  body,  vau,io 
(vah-oo-ee-d)  is  the  Alwaso  term  for  Organismus  (or 
Living  World.)     Treated  of,  however,  in  respect  to 
their  more  presentative  aspect,  these  terms  modulate 
more  properly  in  the  simple  and  euphonious  single 
vowel  o.      Thus  bo,io  is  the  Inorganic  Cosmos,  and 
vo,io  the    Organic    World    culminating   in,  and  spe- 
cially signifying  man,  mind- vision  mind.    (Zhauv-io  is 
more  strictly  The  Organismus  entire.)  This  last,  vo,io, 
(or  zhauvio)  then  subdivides  into  (or  has,  as  subordi- 
nate) zJiotio  The  Vegetable  Kingdom  and  zo9io,  The  Ani- 
mal Kingdom,  the  two  Grand  Branches  of  the  Organic 
World,  respectively.     (The  termination  -so  converts 
them  into  Adjectives,  thus  ;  bo,iotso,  RELATING  TO  THE 
INOKGANIC  WORLD,  and  Vb,io,so  RELATING  TO  THE  OR- 
GANIC WORLD,  zho,io,so  RELATING  TO  THE  VEGETABLE 
KINGDOM,  and  vo9io,so,  RELATING  TO  THE  HIGHER  ANI- 
MAL KINGDOM,  etc.) 

141.  Objects  which  are  homogeneous  or  of  the 
same  constitution  throughout,   are  the  materials  or 
stiffs  out  of  which  heterogenized  or  differentiated  ob- 
jects are  composed  ;  whether  as  an  outlying  ocean  of 
such  substances  not  yet  constructed  into  specific  ob- 
jects ;  or  as  the  interstitial  confluent  materials  which 
permeate  and  so  infill  the  more  specifically  differen- 
tiated parts  of  objects ;  or  as,  in  fine,   the  plasmas, 


104  VOWEL   AND   CONSONANT   CHARACTERS. 

emulsions,  and  fluidities  contained  in  the  vessels  of 
the  more  highly  organized  beings ; — the  Horaoge- 
nismus  and  the  Generalismus  being  readily  con- 
fluent with  each  other,  as  Liquid  Sounds  readily 
decline  into  Yowels.  Homogeneous  things  are, 
therefore,  greatly  identified  with  SUBSTANCE,  or  the 
"  Reality '  of  the  Metaphysicians,  the  element  of 
Form  (or  "  Limitation  ")  figuring,  in  respect  to  them, 
only  in  a  subordinate  way.  The  appropriateness  of 
the  "  Real "  or  Pure  Vowel-Sounds,  the  soft,  mushy, 
concessive  element  of  language,  for  their  representa- 
tion is,  therefore,  very  obvious.  (91,  111,  143.) 

142.  Heterogeneous  or  heterogenized  objects,  and 
the  heterogenized  parts  of  objects  have,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  element  of  FORM  or  Shape,  or  the  "  Limi- 
tation "  of  th.e  Metaphysicians,  predominant  or  ruling 
in  them  ;  and  Substance  is  subordinated.     They  are, 
therefore,  appropriately  represented  by  the  Conso- 
nant-Sounds ;  for,  while  the  Yowels  are  homogeneous 
in  character,  the  Consonants  are  heterogeneous,  or 
heterogenizing  or  limitative  of  the  Vowel  or  Substan- 
tive element. 

143.  The  actual  cavities  and  interstices  of  struc- 
tures, as  of  a  planet  (caves,  etc.)   or  of  the  human 
body,  as  relative  vacuums,  are  the  analogue  of  Noth- 
ing, or  the  "  Negation  '    of  the  Metaphysicians,  con- 
jointly with  the  outlying  and  surrounding  space  (123). 
This  Nothingness  is  closely  allied  with  Generalization 
which  carried  to  the  ultimation  exhausts  all  Particu- 
larity and  ceases  to  be,  except  as  the  metaphysical 
echo   (of  the   "  Realist  ")   to  the  Heal  World;  and 


.  EXTENSION  AND  CAEEEES.  105 

Generalization  is,  in  turn,  allied  (141)  with  Liquid- 
ity. The  Liquids  are  of  two  kinds,  1.  Static  and 
Nasal,  m,  n,  ng,  (Nose-Sounds,  resonant),  and  2.  Mo  tic 
and  Oral  or  Flowing,  I  and  r.  The  Nasal  Liquidity 
(m,  n,  ng)  Static  and  resonant,  has  for  its  Analogue 
in  Nature,  the  Great  Reservoirs  of  Fluidity,  with 
their  glassy  or  mirror-like  surface  or  Reflexion  (Mind- 
wise)  in  Calm,  and  The  Resonance  of  Ocean-Caves 
in  Activity,  and  so  Expanse  or  EXTENSION  ;  and  The 
Flowing  Liquidity  (I,  r)  is  analogous  with  Cur- 
rents or  Streams,  and  so  with  Orbital  and  other 
CAREERS.  (It  is  the  Bastard  Vowels  u  and  o,  for  Time 
and  Space,  which  counterpart  the  Heal  Yowels  and 
correspond  with  "Negation.") 

144.  Homogeneous    objects    or    substances    are 
named  by  Substantive  Substantives — non-pluralizable, 
or  such  as  have  no  proper  plurals,  as  air,  mud,  pitch, 
gold,  metal,  liquid,  etc.     If  plural  forms  occur  in  re- 
spect to  such  nouns,  they  denote  not  so  much  dif- 
ferent individual  objects  as  different  kinds  of  the  same 
object.    Liquids  means,  for  instance,  different  varieties 
of  liquid,  and  not  merely  different  masses  of  the  same 
liquid.     Heterogenized  objects  are,  on  the  contrary, 
pluraliza'ble,  or  have  true  plurals,  as  horses,  houses,  men. 

145.  The  Incorporated  Homogenismi  of  the  Cosmos 
have  been  recently  discriminated  with  some  accuracy, 
by  Hugh  Doherty,  in  a  work,  called  "  Organic  Phil- 
osophy," Volume  First,  "  Epicosmology,"  and  have 
been  furnished  with  a  seriated  list  of  names  ;   Geo- 
sphere    (earthy)   Atmosphere    (aerial),    Thaflatosphere 
(watery),  etc. 


CHAPTER  VIL 

METHOD  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  ALWATONI  WORD- 
BUILDING. 

146.  The  Ultimate  Elements  of  Speecli  (or,  other- 
wise, the  Primitive  Elements,  according  to  the  order  in 
which  we  consider  the  subject)   are,  practically,  as 
results  from  all  that  has  been  shown,  the  Vowel  and 
Consonant-Sounds,  represented  by  the  Alphabet  of 
Signs  or  Letters.     These   correspond  with   the  so- 
called  Ultimate  Elements  of    Organized  Substance 
(Chemical.)      But,  the  proper    Working  Elements   of 
Language  are  different  from  these   and  correspond 
with  the  so-called  Proximate  Elements  of  an  Organ- 
ized Object,  the  human  body,  for  instance.     These 
are  the  Two-letter  (or  Bi-Uteral)  Root-words,  which  are 
produced  by  compounding  one  consonant  with  one  vowel- 
sound,  as  BI,  (bee),  BE,  (ba),BA,  (bah),  or,  inversely,  one 
voivel  with  one  consonant-sound,  as  IB,  EB,  AB,  etc. 

147.  To  make  the  primitive  combinations  of  the  Vow- 
el and  Consonant-sounds  into  these  Two-Letter-Root- 
words,  seizing  the  appropriate  meaning  of  the  r<«>t- 

llrord  so  formed  as  logically  derived  from  the  mean- 


AN  EXPLANATION.  107 

ings  of  the  prior  elements  (those  of  the  separate  Yowel 
and  the  separate  Consonant-sound  involved  in  each 
such  combination),  is  a  work  of  skill,  tasking  the 
keenest  insight  of  the  expert  Phonetician-and-Univer- 
sologist,  and  demanding,  perhaps,  a  specific  faculty  for 
the  quick  perception  and  the  profound  appreciation  of 
analogies ;  as,  in  the  case  of  Chemistry,  it  must  be 
the  professional  chemist  who  deals  with  ultimate  (or 
primitive)  analysis  and  synthesis.  The  meanings  of 
the  Two-Letter-Roots  are  best,  then,  for  ordinary 
purposes,  stated  dogmatically  and  accepted  on  au- 
thority— the  way  being  always  open  for  recurring  to 
the  deeper  analysis  by  all  those  who  take  pleasure 
in  doing  so,  or  by  those  whose  mental  constitution 
or  state  demands  the  more  absolute  demonstration. 
148.  To  illustrate  :  the  h-sound  denotes  breath-like- 
being,  spirit,  and  o  denotes  presentation;  b  denotes  head- 
and-trunk  (or  bulb-and-shaft),  and  o  presentation  ;  and 
m  denotes  muchness  and  outness,  and  a  (ah)  denotes  sub- 
stance. Now  it  may  require  the  mental  tact  us  erudi- 
tus,  and  a  large  and  clear  oversight  of  the  whole 
field  of  analogy,  to  derive,  with  scientific  confidence, 
the  meaning  man  or  humanity  from  the  combination 
of  h  and  o  into  ho  ;  or  that  of  body  from  that  of  b 
and  o  into  bo ;  or  that  of  mass  (or  matrix)  from  that 
of  in  and  a  into  ma.  It  will  be  better,  therefore, 
practically,  for  ordinary  works  of  instruction  in  the 
new  language  not  to  go  so  far  back  towards  the 
beginning-point  of  the  verbal  creation,  but  to  assume 
as  known,  after  the  fact  shall  have  been  established 


108  AN  ILLUSTRATION. 

by  the  more  occult  philosophy,  that  ho  means  man, 
that  bo  means  body,  ma  mass,  etc. 

149.  But  from  this  point  onward  and  outward  the 
process  of  Word-Building  becomes  simple  and  delight- 
ful. Taking  our  departure  from  the  Two-Letter-Roots 
as  a  basis,  of  which  there  are  nearly  two  thousand 
— more  than  the  number  of  actual  root-words  now 
extant  in  the  whole  Indo-European  family  of  lan- 
guages (including  those  of  five,  six,  and  even  seven 
sounds) — the  compounding    of   these,  as    syllables, 
into   longer  words,   with   corresponding    compound 
meanings,  is  a  process  which  will  be  instinctually  and 
easily  acquired  by  the  common,   and  even  by  the 
wholly  uneducated  mind.     This  process  corresponds 
with  the  Confection  of  Proximate  Elements,  as  of  the 
albumen  of  the  egg,  the  starch  of  the  flour,  and  the 
sugar,  by  the  cook,  in  the  domestic  economy  of  the 
kitchen ;   not  necessarily   demanding   any  previous 
chemical  education. 

150.  To  illustrate  :  the  meanings  of  ho,bo,  and  ma, 
being  known,  or  accepted  on  authority  for  man  or 
humanity,  body,  and  mass,  respectively,  it  requires  no 
special  genius   or  learning  to   combine   them    into 
hobo,  for  the  human  body,  hoboma,  for  the  mass  or 
bulk  of  the  human  body  ;  homa  for  human  mass,  society, 
or  folks,  (as  we  say  the  masses,  for  the  people),  honiabo, 
for  the  body  of  society,  etc.     It  is  in  this  manner  that 
(not  a  few  thousands  of  words,  all  that  we  have  now 
in  any  existing  language)  but  milhons  on  millions  of 
words  will  be  spontaneously  formed,  so  simple   in 
their  structure  as  to  be  self-defining,  dispensing  with 


TWO   CONSTITUENCIES   OF  ALWATO. 

the  necessity  (so  far  as  they  are  concerned)  of  any 
dictionary,  and  serving  the  most  complex  and  varied 
necessities  of  the  human  mind.     Another  department 
of  the  new  language  ivill,  however,  be  derived  from  the 
materials  now  extant  in  existing  languages ;   a  more 
arbitrary   department,    for  the  definitions   in   lohich 
the  services  of  the  dictionary  will  still  be  required. 
Even  the  forms  of  the  words  and  sentences,  and,  sub- 
stantially,   the   whole   of   the   leading   existing  lan- 
guages, and  hence,  their  literature  intact,  may  be 
thus  preserved  and  imbedded  in  the  matrix  of  the 
New  Scientific  Universal  language  ;  and  the  acquisi- 
tion of  these  Special  tongues  will  be,  at  the  same  time, 
immensely  facilitated  by  the  knowledge  of  the  phil- 
osophy  which   underlies   and   has   produced   them. 
Alwato  will  then  stand,  centrally,  like  a  Rotunda  in  the 
midst  of  a  huge  Speech  Temple — the  Entire  Lingual 
Structure  of  the  Planet — with  an  internal,  direct,  and 
convenient  passage-way  conducting  to  the  heart  and 
centre  of  each  of  the  Old-style  or  Instinctual  Lan- 
guages or  forms  of  speech  ;  so  that  while  it  may  seem 
to  replace  them  all,  and  ultimately  to  dispense  with 
them,  it  will  truly  conserve  them  all  ;  and  will  more 
than  compensate  for  the  partial  obsolescence  it  may 
bring,  in  the  coming  ages,  upon  the  extant  literature 
of  a  single  tongue,  the  English,  for  instance,  by  the  im- 
mense facility  it  will  offer  for  the  mastery  of  that  which 
will  then  be  the  ancient  literature  of  all  tongues. 

151.  The  remainder  of  this  chapter  will  be  devoted 
to  a  very  abridged  exhibit  or  slight  sample  of  the  two 
methods  of  the  Composition  of  the  Vocal  Elements 


110  i  (EE)  BEING. 

into  Significant  Words,  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  Alwato ;  which  may  be  called 

A    TABULATED    SYNOPSIS 

OF 

ALWATON1    OB   ALWASO    WOKD-BUILDING. 

I. 

Ultimate  (or  Primitive)  Synthesis— from  the  Alphabetic 
Sounds  and  their  Meanings,  up  to  the  Two- Letter 

Hoots. 

1. 

Alphabetic  Sounds  and  their  Meanings,  selected  from 
TABLE  No.  3,  CHAPTER  IV.,  (with  some  license  and 
enlargement  of  Statement),  as-  Elements  of  Sound 
charged  with  Elementary  Meanings. 

a.  Sele-cted  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. 

I  (ee),  BEING  (Entity);  Centre  or  Core  (of  Being); 
Continuance,  PEOTENSION,  Persistence  or  holding 
on  (since  anything  in  order  to  be  must  continue 
through  Time) ;  Stretch  towards  a  centre  or 
given  point ;  INTENSITY,  Intention  ;  INTUITION  or 
gazing  on  ;  a  stretching  of  the  vision  towards  ; 
the  Affection  and  Competency  for  immediate 
and  essential  or  absolute  knowledge.1 

1  It  will  be  a  natural  first  impression  with  the  student  of  Alwato 
that  every  word  of  the  new  language  should  have  a  single  •uniform 
and  invariable  meaning,  so  that  all  possibility  of  ambiguity  should 
be  at  once  and  for  ever  excluded.  But,  such  is  by  no  means  the 
case  Indeed,  in  respect  to  Elementary  or  Root-Words,  just  the 


E   (A)    RELATION.  Ill 

E  (a),  RELATION  ;  Siding  ;  that  which  is  accessory  or 
adjunct  (applied  or  added  to  the  centre)  ; 
iving-like,  ancillary,  or  coefficient ;  The  Affec- 
tion and  Competency  for  relative  and  exact 
or  scientific  knowledge,  and  discursive  rea- 
soning. 

A  (ah),  SUBSTANCE;  thickness,  richness,  goodness; 
THE  GOOD. 

£7(uh),  TIME  ;  Flow,  Flux,  On-going ;  Stream  or  Cur- 
rent ;  Vaguely  PEOTENSIYE  and  Experiential. 

0  (aw),  SPACE  ;  Expanse,  Out-and-In-going ;  EXTEN- 

SIONAL. 

O,  PRESENTATION;  View,  Theory;  Idea ;  Aspect  or 
Prospect ;  THE  TRUE,  The  Lucid,  or  Luminous. 


opposite  phenomenon  occurs.  These  words  are  charged  with  such 
an  immense  quantity  of  meaning,  or,  in  other  words,  with  such  an 
aggregate  of  different  but  related  meanings,  that  they  can  only  be 
defined  by  accumulating  a  crowd  of  words  from  the  Old-style  or  In- 
stinctual Languages.  The  specializing  division  of  this  aggregate 
meaning  is  then  indicated  by  some  new  or  additional  element,  and 
the  more  special  meaning  by  still  another  additional  element,  and 
so  on,  until,  in  the  end,  the,  exclusion  of  Ambiguity  is  attained  to 
to  the  estremest  practicable  degree,  and  the  minutest  specific  dif- 
ferences indicated.  For  example,  i  signifying  all  the  various  as- 
pects of  Being  undifferentiated,  mi  signifies  Affirmative  Being,  ni 
Negative  Being  (Inness  to  the  Vanishing  Centre,  In  ;  nor,  neither), 
li  Perpetual  or  Continuous,  Level  or  Similar  Being,  ri  Temporary,  In- 
terrupted, or  Broken  Being  ;  (reflected,  turned  back),  bi  Concrete  In- 
organic Being,  vi  Concrete  Organic  Being,  Life,  etc.  The  Combina- 
tions of  the  Syllabic  Root- Words  so  formed  then  combine  to  repre- 
sent still  more  specific  meanings.  The  transcript  of  Nature  is  in 
this  way  far  more  perfect  than  if  the  new  language  contained  only 
words  of  exact  specification. 


112  SELECTED  CONSONANTS. 

U  (oo),  MOVEMENT;  Actuality,  Practice,  (Art);  Per- 
spective; THE  BEAUTIFUL;  Shaded;  Blended. 

lu  (ew),  Copulation,  Conjunction,  Marriage. 

Oi,  Superincumbency,  Overshadowing,  Masculinity. 

Ai,  Ground,  Lap,  Bosom,  Matrix,  Femininity.    (        .) 

Au  (ah-oo), — having  the  general  force  of  the  Yowels  ; 
Mixed  or  Undifferentiated  KEALITY  ;  The 
HOMOGENEOUS  ;  but  Elaborate.  (92,  .) 

le,  ELEMENTISM  (Including  i  and  e),  The  Substrate  of 
Abstract  Principles  (131,  132.) 

lau,  The  Aggregate  of  Elenientism  and  Elaborism. 

b.  Selected  Consonants. 

K,  OrF-ness,  Froni-ness,  Apartness,  DIFFERENTIATION; 
Division. 

T,  AT-ness,  Conjoint-ness,  Primitive  or  Simple  INTE- 
GRATION. 

P,  HiNGE-wise-ness,  CARDINALITY;  higher,  compound, 
or  double-acting  INTEGRATION  ;  bi-compound 
Condition ;  (the  sound  is  made  at  the  lips.) 

G,  FORCE,  active  energy ;  projectivity ;  PROCEEDUEE, 
PROCESS,  TRUNK. 

D,  EESISTANCE,  SOLIDITY,  OBJECT,  Counter-presenta- 
tion ;  Reaction,  "  that  which  is  given ; ':  the 
Somewhat ;  HEAD,  KNOB,  LUMP,  ROTUNDITY. 

B,  CONFLICT,  or  Co-aptation ;  Blow  (force-with-reac- 
tion) ;  BODY,  the  embodiment,  in  form,  of 
direct  and  reactionary  forces ;  knocking  to- 
gether, BUILDING,  STRUCTURE.  (Cf.  Fr.  I"'/  . 

TO  BEAT,  lath',   TO  BUILD,    latin  tent,  A    BUILDING, 

SHIP,  etc.) 


AMBIGU'S,   NASALIZATION,   ETC.  113 

c.  Ambigtfs. 

H,  BEEATH-like  Being  ;  Halitus,  SPIEIT  ;  Attenuated 
and  Diffusive  Essence. 

Y,  Personal  PIYOTALITY  ;  Spiritual  Centricity  ;  Kadiat- 
ing  Centre  ;  Godhood,  or  eminent  personality. 

W,  MUTUAL  SIDE-INCLININGS,  as  of  the  two  sides  of  the 
body  in  walking,  or  of  two  companions  walk- 
ing and  talking  with  each  other  ;  ivee-icali  or 
see-saw,  as  the  flapping  of  wings,  or  of  the 
battens  of  a  double  door,  or  of  the  lips  in  talk- 
ing ;  Mutuality,  Reciprocity,  Intercourse,  Conver- 
sation, (Lat.  con,  WITH  ;  and  verier  e,  TO  TUKN)  ; 
LANGUAGE. 

n,  (the  Nasalization,  97),  Incomprehensibility,  Con- 
fusion, blending  Inde  terrain  ateness  ;  je  ne  sais 
quoi  ;  the  twang  in  the  nose  of  the  religious 
enthusiast,  striving  for  unity  with  the  Absolute 
(and  the  Infinite.) 

2. 

Primary  Combinations  of  Ultimate,  or  Primitive,  Ele- 
ments (Alphabetic  Sounds),  into  Secondary,  Proximate, 
or  WonE-iSG-Ekments  —  Tivo-  Letter-  Roots. 


-io,   (as  a  termination  ;  i  being  and  o  presentation 

display],  meaning  -dom,  realm,  or  domain,  (pro- 
nounced ee-o.) 

-ia,  (as  termination;  i  being  and  a  substance),  meaning 
-ism,  -ness,  -ity  ;  the  Principle  or  substance  of 
the  being  of  an  object,  (pronounced  ee-ah.) 


114  TERMINATIONS. 

Ki,  (k,  o^-ness,  _par£-itivness,  and  i,  "being,  meaning  the 
paftncss  or  partitiveness  of  I  icing,  and,  especially, 
or  (the  Preposition ;  pronounced  kee.) 

Ti,  (t,  a/-ness,  conjointness,  and  i,  being),  meaning  AT 
(the  Preposition  ;  pronounced  tee.) 

Ku,  (k,  o^-ness,  and  u,  proceedence  or  movement),  mean- 
ing FROM  (the  Preposition  ;  pronounced  koo.) 

Tu,  (t,  a£-ness,  and  u,  proceedence,  meaning  TO  (the 
Preposition  ;  pronounced  too.) 

Ho,  (h,  Spiritual  Centre — punctum  vitce,  and  o,  pres- 
ence), meaning  MAN. 

Bo,  (b,  embodiment,  and  o,  presence),  meaning  bod)/, 

Ma,  (m,  muchness,  owfness,  and  a,  substance),  meaning 
Mass,  Outer  or  Gros  Matter;  (pronounced  man.) 

Na,  (n,  littleness,  inness,  and  a,  substance),  meaning  In- 
ner or  Choice  Mass  or  Substance,  MIND  ;  (pro- 
nounced nah.)  (Cf.  Gr.  nous,  Mind.) 

-so,  (as  a  termination ;  s,  collection,  compression,  smootJt- 
ness,  and  o  presence),  Adjective  Termination, 
meaning  of  like'  quality  as,  -ous,  definitively 
like,  (Fr.  -eux,  euse.) 

-sho,  (as  a  termination ;  sh  dispersivcness,  diffusion, 
roughness,  and  o  presence),  Adjective  Ending, 
meaning  crudely  like,  approximately  like,  -isJi,-  oid. 

-to,  (as  a  termination  ;  t,  a^-ness  and  o,  presence),  the 
most  general  Substantive-ending,  meaning 
thing,  any  object  or  idea  whatsoever. 

-ski,  (as  a  termination;  s,  definite  collection,  cn-ordi tui- 
tion, k  cuts,  lines,  divisions,  and  i,  bein.'j],  mean- 


:'  REALMIC  '     TERMINATION,   -TO.  115 

ing  Science,  -logy,  -ology,  -lore,  Ger.  -lehre;  (pro- 
nounced skee) ;  -skiso,  -ological. 

-li,  (as  a  termination  ;  1,  continuity,  level,  equality t  and 
i,  being)  Adverbial  Ending,  Eng.  -ly. 

-ni,  (as  a  termination  ;  n,  in,  and  i,  being),  meaning  IN 
(the  Preposition  ;  pronounced  nee.) 

n. 

Proximate   or    Ordinary  Synthesis,  (generally)   of  the 
Two-Letter-Roots  into   Words. 

Au,io,  (pronounced  ah-oo-ee-o),  the  realm  or  domain 
of  ORDINARY  "BEALITY,"  or  of  the  Subject- 
matter  of  Being,  capable  of  being  "  differen- 
tiated" or  "limited,"  but  as  yet  Unlimited  or 
Infinite ;  assumed,  however,  as  comprehensible, 
or  capable  of  being  known — by  the  subsequent 
insertion  of  thought-lines  ;  THE  COMPREHENSIBLE 
BEALITY,  or  Beality  in  an  Ordinary  or  Non- 
transcendental  sense.  The  HOMOGENEOUS,  The 
HOMOGENISMUS  ;  Empirical  Reality  ;  "  The  Un- 
limited." (B.  O.  a.  20,  t.  204.) 

Aunio,  (pr.  ah-oon-ee-o),  The  Incomprehensible 
(Beality)  ;  "  The  Unknowable."  CARDINARY, 
Transcendental,  or  Rational  Beality  or  Being 

I3io  (pr.  ee-ee-o),  The  Central  (Being),  "  The  Abso- 
lute," in  an  ordinary  sense,  as  in  speaking  of 
an  absolute  worldly  ruler ;  or,  philosophically, 
BEING  as  Centered  in  Objects,  as  Contrasted 
with  Rational  or  Intelligent  Being  (Inio.) 


116  DOMAINS   OF  BEING. 

Inio,    (pr.  ee"-ee-o),    "  The   Absolute  '    in   the   high 
philosophic  or  transcendental  sense  ;  The  L 
of  Swedenborg  ;  the  Pure  Universal  Ego,  the 
Ego  in  itself,  The  Self-Centred  Intelligence  of 
Fichte  ;   as   contrasted  with  Objective  Being 


E,io,  (pr.  a-ee-o),  "  The  Relative"  or  Related,  in  the 
Ordinary  sense  ;  The  Collateral  Environment  ; 
What  stands  re-late  /,  or  at  the  Sides. 

Enio,  (pr.  an-ee-o),  "  The  Relative,"  in  the  high  phil- 
osophic, transcendental,  or  Cardinary  sense  ; 
The  Existere  of  Swedenborg. 

A,io,  (pr.  ah-ee-o),  The  Real  or  Substantial  (Mate- 

rial), in  an  ordinary  sense. 
Anio,  (pr.  ahn-ee-o),  "  The  Real"  or  "  The  Ground" 

(of  Being),  in  the  high  Cardinary  sense  of  the 

Transcendental  Metaphysicians. 

Ngkauflio,  (pr.  ngkah-oof-lee-o),  "  The  Limiting," 
"  to  peras"  (B.  O.  a.  20,  t.  204.  ) 

Nggauvlio,  (pr.  nggah-oov-lee-o),  "  The  Limited," 
(B.  O.  a.  20,  t.  204.) 

Ngkauvlio,  (pr.  ngkah-oov-lee-o),  THE  HETEROGENIS- 
MUS,  the  Limit-and-the-Thiug-limited  ;  The 
Limitary,  a  term  which  may  be  employed 
to  signify  combinedly  "  The  Limiting  ' 
and  "The  Limited;"  and,  hence,  the  whole 
scope  of  the  Consonants,  the  Limitary  Ele- 
ments, in  Speech,  and  as  Antithet  for  au,io, 
"  The  Unlimited." 


SAMPLE  WORD-BUILDING.  117 

Al,  (pr.  ahl),  All,  Universal,  Entire.  The  Universe  (cf. 
Ger.  das  All,  THE  ALL,  used  for  The  Universe. 

Wa,  (pr.  wah),  interchange  of  substance,  or  of  some- 
what, or  whatsoever  ;  What  (Fr.  quoi)  ;  Boot  of 
all  words  meaning  (Spiritual)  Intercourse,  or 
Communication,  LANGUAGE,  UTTERANCE,  SPEECH. 

(-to,  (as  termination),  Thing,  object,  in  the  most  gen- 
eral sense.) 

Aiwa,  (pr.  ahl-wah) ,  universal  (spiritual)  communica- 
tion or  interchange. 

ALWATO,  (pr.  ahl-wah-to),  universal  speech-thing ;  the 
name  of  THIS  NEW  SCIENTIFIC  UNIVERSAL  LAN- 
GUAGE. 

(-so,  (Adjective  termination),  meaning  -ous.) 

(-11,  (pr.  lee),  (Adverbial  termination),  meaning  -ly.) 

Alwaso,  (adj.),  relating  to  Alwato  ;  having  the  quality 
or  character  of  Alwato. 

(Alwali,  (pr.  ahl-wah-lee),  after  the  usage  of  Alwato.) 

(-ni,  (pr.  nee),  (as  termination)  meaning  (the  Preposi- 
tion) IN.) 

Alwatoni,  (pr.  ahl-wah-to-nee),  meaning  in  Alwato, 
(as  we  say  anglice,  meaning  in  English,  or  in 
the  method  of  the  English  language.) 

Alau,io,  (pr.  ahl-ah-oo-ee-o),  "  The  Infinite,"  assumed 
as  Comprehensible ;  the  Universal,  Undifferen- 
tiated,  or  as  yet  Unexplored  "  Knowable."  The 
Universal  Unlimited,  (Ordinary,  not  Transcen- 
dental.) 

Alaunio,  (pr.  ahl-ah-oon-ee-o«),  The  Incomprehensible 
Infinite ;  "  The  Infinite '  in  the  Cardiuary, 
Transcendental,  or  Incomprehensible  sense. 


118  SAMPLE   WOKD-BUILDING. 

Go,  TEUNK  ;  train,  track,  trail,  tail ;  elongated  Process, 

pathway,  or  orbit,  as  of  a  planet. 
Do,  HEAD  ;  knob,  lump,  clod  ;  any  roundish  object  or 

body ;  a  planet  or  anj7  of  its  analogues. 
Bo,  anthropomorphic  (or  man-shaped)  BODY  ;  head- 

and-trunk,  somewhat  undiscriminated    (as    in 

the    sepia    or    cuttle-fish),   and  without,   or, 

rather,  irrespective  of  Vitality. 

Zho,  a  vegetable  Object ;  a  tree  or  plant. 

Zq,  an  animal ;  animal  (adj.),  etc. 

Vo,  an  organic  or  living  body,  more  than  vegetable  or 
animal,  being  both ;  humanoid  body ;  human 
attribution  ;  Sight,  Mind  ;  (the  Mind's  Eye.) 

Bodo,  the  head  of  the  body. 

Bogo,  the  trunk  of  the  body. 

Bobo,  THE  BODY,  including  Head  and  Trunk  fully 

discriminated ;   the  complete  man-like  body, 

but  not  distinctively  living. 
Vobo,  the  living  body  specifically. 

Zhodo,  a  vegetable  head,   as  a  cabbage  or  lettuce 

head. 

Zhogo,  a  vegetable  trunk  or  stalk. 
Zhobo,   a  vegetable  trunk-and-head ;  the  stalk  and 

plume  or  clumpy  part  conjoined. 

Zhovo,  the  inflorescence  of  the  plant,  specially  vital. 
Zodo,  an  animal's  head. 
Zogo,  an  animal's  trunk. 


SAMPLE  WOKD-BUILDING.  119 

i 

Zobo,  an  animal  carcass. 
Zovo,  the  living  animal  body. 

Zodoso,  pertaining  to  or  resembling  an  animal's  head. 
Zogoso,  pertaining  to  the  trunk  of  an  animal's  body. 
Zoboso,  pertaining  to  the  animal  carcass. 
Zovoso,  relating  to  the  live  animal  body. 
Zovoli,  in  the  manner  of  a  living  animal  body. 

Ho,  human. 

Ho,io,  (ho-ee-o),  the  Human  Sphere  or  Realm. 

Hobo,  the  Human  Body. 

Hoboma,  the  mass  of  the  human  body ;  (ma,  mass.) 

Hobogo,  the  trunk  of  the  human  body  ;  the  torso. 

Hoboclo,  the  head  of  the  human  body. 

Hobobo,  the  embodiment  of  the  human  body,  as  an 

organically  constituted  whole. 

Masa,  (mah-sah),  mass,  collection;  (sa,  collection.) 
Homa,  or  homasa,  Society,  The  human  mass(es.) 
Homabo,  the  body  of  human  society. 
Sama,io,  (sah-mah-ee-o),  a  collection  or  assemblage 

of  objects. 

Hobosamaio,  a  collection  of  human  bodies. 
Hoboso,  (adj.)  relating  to  the  human  body. 
Hoboni,  (adv.),  within  the  human  body. 

152.  It  will  be  appropriate  to  conclude  this  chapter 
with  some  notice  of  Diacritical  Marks,  as  a  sort  of 
Secondary  Alphabet,  or  of  accessory  means  for  modi- 
fying, further  discriminating,  and,  as  it  were,  multi- 
plying the  Sounds  and  their  Meanings  of  the  Basic 
Alphabetic  Signs — the  proper  Alphabet. 


120  DIACRITICAL   MARKS. 

The  most  familiar  instance  of  a  Diacritical 
Mark  is  the  Accent  (not  the  so-called  French  Accent 
Marks  but)  as  meant  and  used  in  English,  as  the  sign  of 
a  predominant  or  increased  stress  of  the  voice  upon  a 
particular  syllable  of  a  word ;  as  present  (the  Verb), 
and  present  (the  Noun  or  Adjective).  The  same 
Accent  Mark  is  retained,  in  the  same  sense,  in  Al- 

wato. 

i 

153.  The  Nasalization-sign  (n)  has  been  already  no- 
ticed and  described  as  merely  a  Diacritical  Mark  (93, 
97.)  This  sound  (the  Nasalization)  which  abounds  in 
French,  Polish,  Sanscrit,  and  many  other  languages, 
offers,  ordinarily,  a  great  stumbling-block  to  English- 
speaking  people,  but  one  which  even  a  slight  explana- 
tion will  tend  greatly  to  remove.  It  is  confounded 
with  the  English  Throat-Nose^Consonant- Sound  ng, 
to  which  it  is  related,  but  from  which  it  very  de- 
cidedly differs.  The  English  ng-sound  is  a  true 
Consonant-sound,  that  is  to  say,  the  parts  of  the 
mouth  where  it  is  made  completely  close  upon  each 
other,  hindering  entirely  the  passage  of  the  sound- 
ing-breath through  the  channel  of  the  mouth,  and  giv- 
ing it  no  other  exit  than  through  the  nose.  Of  this 
any  one  will  convince  himself  by  putting  the  finger 
deep  into  the  mouth,  and  then  saying  ki?^  /  he  will 
feel  the  back  part  of  the  tongue  rising  at  the  end  of 
the  word  and  pressing  the  finger  very  closely,  striving 
to  close  that  passage-way.  But  the  French  Nasal 
sounds  are  mere  Yowels  with  a  tinge  of  Nasalization 
or  of  Nose-sound  upon  them  ;  that  is  to  say,  they 
are  produced  with  the  piiwt«jc-w~n/  of  the  month 


DIACRITICAL  MARKS   CONTINUED.  121 

completely  open,  a  portion  of  the  sounding  breath 
merely  being  at  the  same  time  thrown  through  the 
nose.  In  the  utterance  of  the  French  an  (ahn),  the 
organs  of  the  throat  and  mouth  are  as  completely 
open  as  in  pronouncing  a  (ah),  and  the  slight  n- 
quality  which  is  heard  with  the  vowel  comes  of  the 
surplus  of  sounding  breath  thrown  at  the  same  in- 
stant into  the  nasal  passages,  or  into  the  head  and 
nose.  The  French  un  (uhn)  is  merely  a  slight  grunt, 
often  heard  in  English,  not  as  a  recognized  part  of  lan- 
guage, but  as  a  sort  of  involuntary  interjection.  For 
a  full  account  of  these  Nasalized  Vowel-Sounds,  as 
they  occur  in  French,  see  Andrews'  and  Batchelor's 
"French  Instructor,"  Introduction,  p.  47;  and  "  The 
Key  "  to  the  same.1 

154.  The  Vowel-Scale  of  Eight  Vowels,  Table  No.  1, 
(94)  leaves  the  Length,  Stress,  and  Peculiar  Ictus  of 
which  those  sounds  are  susceptible  to  be  determined, 
as  may  be  necessary,  by  Additional  Marks  (called 
Diacritical.)  These  are  mostly  such  as  are  already 
of  familiar  use  in  English  for  similar  purposes ; 
namely  the  "  Long  Mark  "  (a),  the  "Short  Mark" 
(a),  and  the  "Accent  Mark  "  ('),  already  noticed  (151.) 
The  so-called  Grave-Accent  (a)  is  used  to  mark 
"  Stopped  Vowels,"  or  such  as  are  both  Short  and 
characterized  by  Ictus,  or  a  sudden  and  abrupt  style 
of  utterance,  as  i,  e,  a,  in  pit,  pet,  pat,  etc.  These 
words  are,  therefore,  represented,  Alwali,  thus  :  pit, 
pet,  pat ;  while  peet,  pate,  pare,  are  printed  as  pit, 

1  New  York  :  D.  Appleton  &  Co. 
6 


122  DIACRITICAL  MARKS   CONTINUED. 

pet,  par,  etc.  Some  details  of  this  subject  will  have 
to  be  omitted  here.  Vowels  Unmarked  are  to  bo 
understood  as  of  the  medium  and  ordinary  length 
and  character,  or,  as  Undiacriticised,  but  susceptible 
of  being  rendered  definite  by  the  addition  of  the 
marks — like  Un vocalized  Phonography. 

155.  The  hyphen  (-)  is  only  retained  for  casual  pur- 
poses, as,  chiefly,  for  connecting  the  parts  of  a  word, 
when  occurring  at  the  end  of  a  line  and  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  next  line.  In  the  real  composition 
of  words  it  is  dispensed  with,  and  the  following  im- 
proved system  is  adopted.  Commas,  Semicolons  and 
Colons — the  bulk,  as  it  were,  of  the  Ordinary  System 
of  Punctuation  as  it  has  heretofore  occurred  between 
words  only,  and  then  "  spaced  out,"  as  the  printers 
say,  or  with  openings  between  the  words — are  used, 
also,  Alwali,  in  the  body  of  the  ivords  theTnsdves,  but 
without  spaces  /  to  mark  the  divisions  of  Syllables  in 
any  way  liable  to  undue  coalescence,  and  to  indi- 
cate the  composition  of  the  words,  generally.  Thus, 
i,ki,ia  is  a  different  word  in  composition  and  meaning 
from  ik,i,ia  ;  and  the  English  word  potjtook  is  so  pre- 
vented from  being  pronounced  pojhook.  If  it  is  not  a 
mere  separation  of  Sounds  and  Syllables,  but  a  Com- 
pound Word,  which  is  to  be  indicated,  the  semicolon 
is  substituted  for  the  comma ;  as  in  English  Ave  might 
print  thunderstorm  or  house  ;  carpenter  (instead  of  tlnni- 
der-storm,  house-carpenter)  ;  and  in  the  case  of  still 
more  complex  combinations  the  colon  is  introduced  ; 
as  if  in  journey man:house;carpenter,  where  the  n'*f  of 
the  voice  is  something  greater  after  the  first  word, 


DIACBITICAL   MARKS   CONTINUED.  123 

than  between  the  last  two.  In  other  respects  the  Or- 
dinary System  of  Punctuation  remains  unchanged 
except  by  a  few  additions  which  need  not  be  speci- 
fied here.  This  endo-lexic  (within  the  word)  punc- 
tuation is  not  rigorously  prescribed  ;  but  may  be 
employed  somewhat  ad  libitum,  according  to  the 
views  or  purposes  of  the  author  ;  as,  in  a  preceding 
paragraph  sama,io  employs  the  comma,  but  in  hobo- 
samaio  it  is  dispensed  with.  (000.) 

156.  The  small  raised  letter  n,  used  to  denote  the 
Nasalization  (97)  is  of  a  style  of  types  called  techni- 
cally, among  printers,  "  Superior  '  letters  or  types. 
A  still  more  extended  use  is  made,  diacritically  and 
Alwali,  of  this  variety  of  types,  solving  many  of  the 
most  difficult  problems,  met  by  Lepsius  and  others, 
in  the  attempt  to  arrange  a  Romanized  Ethnical  or 
International  Alphabet.  The  "Superior"  h  is  used 
to  express  the  slight  Aspiration  which  accompanies 
at  times  nearly  every  consonant  in  the  Sanscritic 
family  of  Languages,  as  kh,  gh,th,etc.  The  "Superior" 
vowels  are  used  to  express  "  Glides '  or  Indistinct 
YowTel-Sounds  ;  the  "  Superior '  y  (or  the  cognate 
vowel  i)  is  used  after  a  back  or  middle-mouth  Con- 
sonant, to  soften  it,  and  so  to  constitute  what  is 
culled  The  Palatal  Consonants,  as  Span.  anJ'o,  or  au*o 
(for  ano,  A  YEAR),  ITr.  family  or  famiy  (for  famitte, 
FAMILY),  etc.  The  Sanscritic  "  Cerebrals,"  The  Se- 
mitic "  Gutturalizations,"  the  Zulu  "  Clucks,"  and 
some  other  of  the  rare  phenomena  of  speech  are 
provided  for  by  Special  notations,  for  which  see 
"  The  Universal  Alphabet." 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

CONTINUED  EXPOSITION   OF  THE   PRINCIPLES  AND  METHOD 
OF  ALWASO  WOKD-BUILDING. 

157.  In  order  to  a  further  expansion  of  the  results  of 
what  has  been  previously  shown,  it  will  be  requisite, 
now,  in  part  to  recall,  and  in  part  to  state  anew,  certain 
preliminary  considerations  :  1.  The  Diphthong^  au, 
(pronounced  ah-oo)  may  be  adjoined  to  each  Conso- 
nant-Sound, as  a  Yowel-stem  such  as  is  necessary  to  a 
full  exhibit  of  the  Consonant  value  (92,  94,  109,  126.) 
This  has  been  already  done,  in  a  preliminary  man- 
ner. 2.  It  must  be  known  that  each  Consonant- 
Sound  has,  first  a  Direct  Value  or  Meaning  (such 
mainly  as  has  been  shown  in  the  preceding  Tables),  and, 
then,  an  Inverse,  Counter-,  or  Reflected  Value  or  Mean- 
ing— according  as  the  Consonant  precedes  or  follows 
the  Vowel-Stem.  Thus,  auk  is  the  Inversion  or 
Counter-presentation  of  kau.  The  Consonant  has,  in 
other  words,  a  Final  Volne,  which  is  the  opposite  of 
its  Initial  Value.  3.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  each 
Root-word  which  has  in  it  the  Diphthong  au  (ah-oo) 
or  iau  (ee-ah-oo),  that  is  to  say,  a*  representing  lie 
whole  Voir.-t-Sculf,  is,  consequently,  a  Fasciculated  or 


FASCICULATED   ROOT-WORDS.  125 

Bundle-Root- Word,  which  breaks  up  by  Analysis 
into  a  Series  of  Eleven  (or  including  the  au,  Tiveln1, 
and  including  iau,  Thirteen)  Single  or  Special  Boot- 
Words,  one  for,  and  containing,  each  single  Vowel 
and  Diphthong,  so  represented.  To  illustrate  : 

Auski,  (ah-oo-skee),  is  Philosophy  in  a  very  ex- 
tended but  yet  in  an  Ordinary  or  Non-Transcendental 
Sense ;  and 

Aunski,  (ah-oon-ski),  is  Cardinary  or  Transcen- 
dental Philosophy  ;  the  Absolute  or  Pure-Reason- 
Variety  of  Knowledge. 

157.  Auski,  (ah-oo-skee),  then  divides  into  : 

Iski,  (ee-skee),  Ordinary  Ontology  (The  Science  of 
Things.) 

Eski,  (a-skee),  Ordinary  Eelatology  (The  Science  of 
Relations  between  Things.) 

Aski,  (a(ir)-skee),  Etherialogy  (The  Science  of 
Ethers,  Aromas,  Auras,  and  the  Analogously  tenuous 
Realities  in  the  Universe.) 

Aski,  (ah-skee),  Mdterioid  SUBSTAN-CE-OLOGY  (but 
PhilosopJioid,  or  Indeterminately  Considered) — Ordinary 
Metaphysics  or  Philosophy  ;  NATURO-METAPHYSIC,  o5? 
Indeterminate  NATUROLOGY ;  (The  Philosophy  of 
the  Mere  Inert  Grossness.) 

£7ski,  (tth-skee),  Temporalogy,  the  Science  of  Sufilif- 
nary  Eventualities ;  of  Transitory,  Passing-away,  or 
Currental  Conditions  ;  Mortalities,  etc. 

Oski,  (aw-skee),  Spa-ce-ology,  The  Science  of  Ce- 
lestialities,  SPIRITUALITIES,  of  Spheral  and  Firmtt- 
mental  Permanencies,  or  Perpetuities,  Immortalities, 
etc. 


126  ORDINARY  PHILOSOPHIES. 

Oski,  (o-skee),  Ideo-Morphology ;  Science  of  Ideas 
as  Types  of  things ;  of  the  Platonic  "  Ideas ; '  of 
Type-Forms,  in  Science — Richard  Owen  ;  SCIENTO- 
PHILOSOPHY,  Indeterminate  SCIENTOLOGY,  based 
on  the  Abstract  T}7pical  Representation  of  Principles 
and  Laws ;  Pure  Scientific  Theory. 

Uski,  (oo-skee),  Actualogy  ;  Science  of  the  Practical, 
or  of  Real  Activities ;  Practical  Philosophy;  ARTO- 
PHILOSOPHY  ;  Indeterminate  ARTOLOGY. 

luski,  (ee-oo-skee),  Conjuncturology,  Eventuology, 
Transitology ;  Science  of  Conjunctures  (Lat.  con, 
WITH  ;  and  jungere,TQ  JOIN),  of  Epochs,  Climacterics, 
Transitions,  Critical,  Transitional,  or  Supreme  Events  ; 
of  Births  and  Deaths ;  of  Marriages,  Copulations, 
Reconciliations  and  Alliances ;  of  Inosculations,  Im- 
pregnations and  Reproductions,  universally. 

Oiski,  (aw-ee-skee),  Super(n)ology;  Science  of  Over- 
shadowings,  Canopies,  Coverings,  Protections ;  of 
Divine  Efflux  and  Spiritual  Generative  Eorce ;  of 
Male  Potentialities,  etc. 

Aiski,  (ah-ee-skee),  Infer(n)ology  ;  Science  of  Suc- 
cumbencies  ;  Bases,  Grounds  ;  Receptivities-aiid-Re- 
actions ;  Concubinisnis,  Conceptions,  Pregnancies 
and  Prolifications  ;  of  all  Earth-and-womb-like  Ca- 
pacities and  Potencies  ;  of  Female  Qualifications  and 
Attributes,  etc. 

Auski,  (ah-oo-skee),  PHILOSOPHY  in  the  sense  so 
general  as  to  include  all  the  preceding  so-called 
Sciences  or  Branches  of  Theory  and  Knowledge ; 
The  Vague  or  Inexact  Aspect  of  Human  Knowledge, 
generally;  although,  at  i  (ee),  and  o,  The 


CARDINAEY  PHILOSOPHIES.          127 

nafe  approximates  the  Determinate,  or  Eckosophic,  (The 
Articulateness  of  the  Consonants  ;  as  These  Two  Vowel- 
Sounds  are,  among  the  Yowels,  the  nearest  approxi- 
mations to  the  Consonants,  and  so  generate  the  Weak 
Consonant-Sounds  y  and  w).  Indeed,  in  the  i  (ee), 
as  THING  in  se  (or  per  se)  is  the  Natural  Basis  of  all 
Reality,  and  hence  of  all  Determinateness,  and  in  the 
o,  as  MANIFESTATION  IN  IDEA,  Presentation,  or  Re- 
presentation, is  the  Natural  Basis  of  all  Lucidity  of 
Exposition,  and  hence  of  Science  itself  in  its  highest 
expression ;  or  more  properly  of  the  Philosophy  of 
Science,  or  of,  in  a  word,  SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY. 

158.  Finally,  Aunski,  (ah-oon-skee),  then  subdivides, 
in  like  manner,  into  Inski,  Enski,  Anski,  etc.,  which  re- 
peat the  same  Grand  Departments  of  Philosophy  as 
in  the  subdivisions  of  auski  (ah-oo-skee),  with  the  sole 
difference  that  they  pass  over  from  the  Empirical 
or  Ordinary  to  the  purely  Rational,  Oar  dinar  y, 
or  Transcendental  regions  of  Thinking.  It  will 
*  suffice  to  give  some  idea  of  the  whereabouts  of  these 
subtle  departments  of  Thought,  to  suggest  that  Fichte 
modulates  in  Inski  ]  the  Doctrine  of  Pure  Transcen- 
dental INTELLIGENCE  ;  Hegel  in  that  of  Enski,  the  Doc- 
trine of  Pure  Transcendental  THOUGHT-RELATION(S) 
(Dialectics) ;  Schelling  in  that  of  Ienski,  (a  seeking  to 
Unite  The  Thing  and  the  Relation,  the  Subject 
and  the  Object  in  a  common  Ground) ;  The  Her- 
metics,  Mystics,  and  Magi  in  A"s\d ;  the  Great  bulk 


1  When  a  Science  is  abstruse  and  subtle,  note  the  corresponding 
difficulty  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  word  which  names  it,  AlwalL 


128  ORDINARY  AND  CARDIXARY. 

of  the  more  Ordinary  Transcendental  Philosophers 
in  Anski ;  the  Experientialists  in  £7"ski,  Tho  Idealists 
in  0"ski,  Plato  in  Onski,  Charles  Fourier  (Transcen- 
dental Practical  Philosopher)  in  Unski,  etc.  To 
Kant  may  be  assigned  the  whole  range  of  Aunski,  or 
Transcendental  Philosophy.  The  i  (ee)  and  o,  pass- 
ing, by  merely  more  stress  or  pressure  (a  squeezing 
process),  into  y  and  w,  Schelling  (ien— yen)  was  the 
only  German  Transcendentalist  who  went  so  far 
towards  Mysticism  as  to  affiliate  with  Jacob  Boahme, 
and  Plato  by  the  similar  tendency  of  his  Yowel  (o) 
to  become  w  (o-au=wau)  holds  a  corresponding  re- 
lationship to  Swedenborg,  the  great  Theandrologist 
and  Pneumatologist,  or  the  Prince  of  Theological  and 
Spiritual  Science  mixed  with  Mysticism;  (Modulating 
in  ?6'au,?/au,^au,  or,  in  a  word,  in  Hwaunio.) 

159.  Is  it  any  wonder  that  a  staunch  Echosophist  like 
Herbert  Spencer,  (modulating  in  shaup  and  zhaub,  or 
pf  and  bv)  has  but  little  comprehension  of,  and  finds 
nothing  to  admire  in  Hegel,  for  example,  (in  e11),  whose 
range  of  thought  was  so  different  from  his  own ;  or  that 
Auguste  Comte  (in  mlau)  should  feel  so  little  sym- 
pathy for  the  Metaphysicians,  even  those  to  whom  he 
was  so  greatly  indebted.  It  will  be  the  sublime  of- 
fice of  Universology  to  interpret  all  these  conflicting 
systems  of  Thought  to  each  other  ;  reconciling  and  co- 
ordinating them  all  in  a  Higher  Complex  Unity  ;  and 
in  effecting  this  GRAND  EECONCILIATION  Alwato  will 
serve  as  one  of  the  most  effective  Instruments.  (For 
the  letter-references  not  explained  above — shaup, 
zhanb,  mlau — see  138,  139,  and  Chapter 


FASCICULATED   ROOT-WORDS.  129 

160.  The  subjoined  list  of  Alwaso  words  consists  of 
Fasciculated  (or  Bundle-)  Boot- Words,  (each  dissolv- 
able into  Twelve,  according  to  the  preceding  model.) 
They  are  given  in  their  Plural  Forms,  the  Singulars 
being  readily  inferred,  by  rejecting  the  Signs  of 
Plurality.  These  signs  are  -s  (sometimes  -z),  or' 
when  requisite,  to  facilitate  the  utterance  -es  (or  -ez), 
as  in  English.  Whether  as  bundled  or  dissolved,  as 
singular  or  plural,  these  very  primitive  words  do  not 
figure  so  much  as  Actual  Single  words  of  the  Alwaso 
language  (although  they  occur  in  this  way),  as  they 
do,  as  Abstract  Hoots  (as  in  the  Sanscrit),  capable  of 
being  converted  into  any  Part  of  Speech,  by  Special 
Affix  or  Suffix,  or  by  the  Context  merely ;  and  capable 
of  entering,  with  infinite  variability,  into  the  composi- 
tion of  the  less  elementary  or  more  elaborate  words. 

Fasciculated  (or  Bundle-)  Hoot-words  arise,  then, 
of  the  following  orders  : 

Aus,  (ah-oos),  ORDINARY.  Idealities,  (Unlimited,  Inde- 
terminate), Proto-pragmata  or  First  Entities  (i,  Being, 
e,  Relation,  o,  Space,  etc.),  Sensuously  realized. 

Auns,  (ah-oons),  CARDINARY  (or  Transcendental) 
Realities — the  same  as  aus,  but  rationalized  or  enter- 
tained in  the  Reason. 

(Aus,  Integral  Entities,  Wholes  ;  aus,  Fractional 
Entities,  Parts ;  aas  or  aus  Equalities ;  aus  or  aus 
Inequalities ;  Odd  Things,  Odd-like  properties, 
actions,  etc.  Observe  that  au,ia  (ah-oo-ee-ah)  Or- 
dinariness  and  aunia  (ah-oon-ee-ah)  Cardinariness 
hold  an  echoing  relationship  to  Ordinal  Numbers  and 
Cardinal  Numbers,  respectively,  in  the  Mathematics ; 


130  BUNDLE-EOOT-WORDS. 

I 

that  aii,ia,  (ali-66-ee-ali),  Wholeness  (of  Reality),  and 
au,ia  (ah-bb-ee-ah)  Partness  (of  the  Bealify),  have 
similar  correspondences,  respectively,  with  Integral 
and  Fractional  Numbers  ;  and  that  Inequality  and 
Equality  in  mere  Length  of  Vowel-Sounds  echoes  in 
like  manner  to  the  difference  between  Odd  and  Even 
Numbers.  It  is  at  this  point  that  the  Analogy  between  the 
Elements  of  Speech  and  Elementary  Mathematical  Dis- 
criminations begins  to  occur.  It  is  barely  noted  here 
for  reference,  explanation,  and  expansion  elsewhere.) 

Kaus  (kah-oos),  kauts  (kah-oots),  or  kautos  (kah- 
oo-tos),  Single  or  Simple  abstractoid  liniar  PARTINGS 
or  Parts.  (Cf.  Eng.  Cats,  Cuttings.) 

Taus,  (tah-oos),  Single  or  Simple  abstract  point- 
like  UNITINGS,  as  of  any  two  different  Attributes  or 
Qualities  in  the  Constitution  of  the  (ideal  abstract) 
Thing  or  Object;  togethernesses,  wholenesses,  Things. 
(Cf.  French  tout,  ALL.) 

Paus,  (pah-oos),  Single  or  Simple  abstractoid  liniar- 
PARTiNGS-a?icZ-point-like-UNiTiNGS ;  single  HINGINGS 
viewed  from  the  Flanges  to  the  Bivet-and-joint ;  or 
Single  Triangulations  viewed  from  the  Legs  to  the 
Apexes  (or  Apices)  of  the  Angles ;  Converging  or 
diminishing  Conicities ;  Comings  or  bringings  to  a 
Point,  whence  POSITINGS,  pointings.  (Puts,  Puttings.) 

T,  k,  and  p  hold  the  relation  to  each  other  of  as  1. 
Centre,  Absolute  POINT  (the  t)  ;  2.  Cut  and  hence  LINE 
(the  k)  ;  and  3.  Relative  POINT,  Index,  Pointer,  the 
Diminishing  End  of  a  cone,  a?r/,  <ltuj<jci'  or  other 
pointed  object,  hinging  of  Point  and  Line  Quality. 


BUNDLE  -BOOT-WORDS.  131 

• 

Auks,  (ah-ooks),  single  or  simple  abstractoid  liniar 
Counter-PARTiNGS.  (Cf.  Eng.  a?r&-ward  for  Fr.  gauche.) 

Auts,  (ah-oots),  single  or  simple  abstractoid  Coun- 
ter-pointings or  WHOLENESSES  ;  Othernesses.  (Cf.  Fr. 
autre,  OTHER  ;  Eng.  out.) 

Aups,  (ah-oops),  single  or  simple  abstractoid  liniar- 
Counter  -  PARTINGS  -  and  -  point  -  like-  UNITINGS  ;  hence 
single  abstractoid  Counter-HiSGiSGS,  viewed  from 
Rivet-and-joint  to  the  Flanges ;  single  Counter-Trian- 
gulations  viewed  from  the  Apexes  (or  Apices)  to  the 
Legs  of  the  Angles ;  diverging  or  diminishing  Coni- 
cities ;  goings  or  carryings  outward  and  apart  from 
a  point  or  angle,  whence  Openings,  Overtnesses,  Pub- 
lishings,  etc.  (Cf.  Eng.  open  ;  Gr.  ops,  THE  EYE.) 

(Thaus,  (thah-oos),  decussation-points,  (abstractoid) 
cross-roads  "carrefours"  pivots,  etc.  Auths,  other 
or  correlated  pivots.  Qaus,  (ga-oos),  radiating  cen- 
tres, foci ;  auges,  (ah-oo9-es),  other  or  correlated 
radiating  centres  or  foci.) 

Gaus,  (gah-oos),  single  or  simple  concretoid  liniar 
(or  shaft-like)  De-par^-ings,  Pro-cesses,  or  PROCEED- 
INGS (forth-goings) ;  Elongated  or  Trunk -like  Move- 
ments or  Objects.  (Cf.  Eng.  go.) 

Daus,  (dah-oos),  single  or  simple  concretoid  or  head- 
like  Togethernesses,  Wholenesses,  or  THINGS.  Roundish, 
knobby,  clod-like  conceptions.  (Cf.  Ger.  ding,  THING.) 

Baus,    (bah-oos),  single   or   simple  concretoid  De- 
partings-     (Trunk-like  Elongations-)    AND-Head-like  ' 
Knobs   or  Endings  ;  Anthropoid  or  Man-shaped  BO- 
DIES, or  analogous  conceptions.     (Cf.  Eng.  Body.) 


132  BUNDLE-ROOT-WORDS. 

* 

Augz,  (ah-oogz),  single  or  simple  concretoid  liniar 
(or  shaft-like)  Counter-Proceedings.  (Cf.  Lat.  ago, 
TO  DEIVE.) 

Audz,  (ali-oodz),  single  or  simple  concretoid  (or 
head-like)  objects  or  conceptions  ;  Other  or  Counter- 
posited  Objects.  (Cf.  Eng.  aids,  at,  add;  Lat.  ad.) 

Aubz,  (ah-oobz),  single  or  simple  concretoid  Coun- 
ter-Processes- (or  Proceedings-)  AND-Knobs-or-head- 
like-Endings  ;  Man-shaped  bodies  inverted  ;  or 
similar  conceptions ;  Dead  or  Cast-off  Bodies, 
Corpses,  Carcasses.  (Cf.  obsequies ;  Lat.  ob,  AGAINST.  ) 

(For  dhaus,  (dhah-oos),  audhz  (ah-oodhz),  jaus 
(jah-oos),  and  auj,es  (ah-ooj-es)  cf.  Thaus,  etc.,  above. 

Shaus,  (shah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  abstract- 
oid  liniar  Partings,  Dis-partings,  Apartnesses,  or  Parts; 
Ramifications,  De-liniations,  Distributions,  Diffusive- 
nesses, Unconditioned  states.  (Cf.  Eng.  shoo  /) 

Saus,  (sah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  abstractoid 
punctate  (or  point-like)  Unitings ;  Collections,  As- 
semblages, Groupings,  Finitings,  etc,  (Cf.  Ger.  sam- 
meln,  TO  GATHER.) 

Faus,  (fah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  abstractoid 
Liniar-Partings-and-Punctate-  Unitings  (fan-like  ex- 
pansions, the  spider-web,  etc.) ;  Delineations  and  Dis- 
tributions of  Groups  and  Series  ;  Schemata  of  Co-ex- 
istences and  Sequences,  (Classifications  and  Doings); 
Actualities,  Practicalities.  (Cf.  Lat.  /ac-ere,  TO  DO.) 

Aush,es,  (ah-oosh-es),  pluraloid  or  multiform  ab- 
stractoid liniar  Counter-partings  ;  Conditionings,  etc. 


BUNDLE-EOOT-WORDS.  133 

Aus,es,  (ali-oos-es),  the  related  Counter-pointings ; 
Outnesses  or  Exclusions  of  the  Unincluded  or  Un- 
(con)fin(it)ed  Points,  or  Entities.  (Cf.  Ger.  aits,  OUT.) 

Auf,es,  (ah-oof-es),  pluraloid  or  multiform  abstrac- 
toid  liniar  Coiinter-partings-A.'RD-Coiinter-pointinfjs ; 
Counter-classifications-AND-Performances  or  Doings ; 
Counter-feits ;  correlated  Counter- Schemata;  Theoretic 
EXPANSIONS,  Theories.  (Cf.  Eng.  off.) 

Zhaus,  (zhah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  concre- 
toid  liniar  (or  linioid)  Partings,  Dis-partings,  Apart- 
nesses, or  Parts  ;  Upward  and  Outward  Ramifications 
or  Brandlings  in  Real  Being  ;  The  Plumate  or  Super- 
terranean  Tree-or-Plant-like  Orders  of  Existence  ; 
Arborifications,  Vegetable  or  Vegetoid  Entities ; 
Growths,  Developments.  (Cf.  Fr.  jeter,  TO  THROW.) 

Zaus,  (zah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  concretoid 
punctoid  (knobby,  or  head-like)  Unitings ;  Organic 
Collections,  Clumps,  Buncllings,  Collections  or  Con- 
geries of  Organs,  as  in  the  Animal  economy ;  Living, 
Animal,  or  Animoid  Organs  ;  Apparatus,  Systems,  and 
Organoid  Existence,  generally.  (Cf.  Eng.  2o,ology.) 

Vans,  (vah-oos),  pluraloid  or  multiform  concretoid 
Liniar-Partings-and-Punctoid-  (or  -Knobby)-  Gatherings- 
or  -Collections,  (pluraloid  trunk-and-head-like  ob- 
jects ;  tfibrillated-and-ganglionic)  ;  Organic  or  Living 
Entities  or  Orders  of  Existence,  Vegetable-A.ND- Animal ; 
and  their  Analogues  in  Being  Universally.  (Cf. 
Lat.  vi,isi,  LITE.) 

Auzh,es,  (ah-oo-zn-es),  pluraloid  or  multiform  con- 
cretoid liniar  Counter-partings ;  Branchings  downward; 


134  BUNDLE-ROOT-WOUDS. 

Roots,  or  Root-like  Objects,  Conceptions,  Entities  or 
Conditions  ;  Radicatious,  or  Counter- Vegetisms. 

Auz,es,  (ah-ooz-es),  pluraloid  or  multiform  concre- 
toid  punctoid  (or  knob-like)  Counter-pointings  (con- 
trasted objects) ;  EMBRYOS,  and  Embryotic  Orders  of 
Existence  ;  (Counter- Animisms  ;  Incipiencies  of  Ani- 
mal Life,  as  the  Roots  are  so  of  Vegetable  life.) 

Auv,es,  (ah-oov-es),  pluraloid  or  multiform  concret- 
oid  Counter-  Organismi  ;  Counter- Adaptations  to  Or- 
ganic Life ;  Accessories,  Adjunctive  Attributes, 
POSSESSIONS,  (cf.  Fr.  av-oir,  TO  HAVE.) 

Mlaus,  Generalizations. 

1.  Static,  Direct. 

Maus,  (mah-oos),  Exteriors,  Outnesses,  Large- 
nesses, Generaloid  partings,  dis-partings  or  ex-fe??sions ; 
outstretchings  of  the  Omnidirectionally,  of  the  All- 
around-ness,  Space-n'ise.  (Cf.  Ger.  mauer,  WALLS.) 

Naus,  (nah-oos),  Interiors,  Innesses,  Smallnesses  ; 
Contraction  of  the  Omnidirectionally.  (Cf.  Gr.  nous, 
MIND.) 

Aungz,  (ah-oongz),  Indifferences,  Neutralities, 
neither-out-nor-in-nesses ;  neither-great-nor-small- 
nesses  ;  moderate-nesses  ;  Generaloid  Equations. 

2.  Static,  Inverse. 

Aumz,  (ah-oomz),  Counter- Exteriors,  (what  stands 
over  against  the  outside),  ENVIRONMENTS,  Embracings, 
Encirclings,  Surroundings.  (Cf.  Ger.  um,  AROUND.) 

Aunz,  (ah-oonz),  Counter-Interiors,  (what  stands 
over  against  and  is  so  related  to  the  inmost  of 
things),  Propria,  INHERENT  Properties;  (differing  from 


BUNDLE-ROOT- WORDS.  135 

auvz  which  are  adjunct  properties,  or  acquisitions) ;  the 
Essential  Unity  of  any  Being,  (cf.  Lat.  ?m-us ;  Eng.  one 
and  own,  etc.)  Ngaus,  (ngah-oos),  Counter-Indifferences, 
(hardly  pronounceable  and  hardly  definable.) 

3.  Temple,  Direct. 

Laus,  (lah-oos),  Longnesses,  Longings,  Patiences, 
Continuities;  Outstretchings  of  the  Unidirectionality, 
(of  the  On-going-ness,  Time-ivise),  Generaloid  Unities 
of  the  Length- wise  Dimension  (cf.  Eng.  Long,  Longing.) 

Raus,  (rah-oos),  Shortnesses,  Breakages,  Fractious- 
nesses,  Withholdings,  (breakings  off,  and  backnesses)  ; 
Interruptions  or  "  Solutions  of  the  Continuity ;  "  Re- 
versings  of  the  Uni-directionality,  (of  the  On-going- 
ness,  Time-wise) ;  Returns,  Generaloid  Disunitions  of 
the  Length-wise  Dimension,  (cf.  ri-,  re-,  BACK.) 

4.  Temple,  Inverse. 

Aulz,  (ah-oolz),  Counter-Continuities,  Counter-out- 
goings, relaxations,  retardations,  oldnesses,  CESSA- 
TIONS, lowerings,  Deaths,  (cf.  Eng.  loiv,  (s)low9  old,  etc.) 

Aurz,  (ah-oorz),  Counter-break-offs  or  Counter-stop- 
pages, i.  e.  pro-cedencies ;  ORIGINS,  arisings,  births, 
beginnings,  (cf.  Lat.  or-ior,  TO  ARISE;  orido,  AN  ORIGIN, 
contracted  into  ordo,  AN  ORDER  or  PROCEEDURE.) 

Whaus — Spiritual  Attenuations. 

Haiis,  (hah-oos),  Breaths,  Halitus,  Spiritual  Dif- 
fusions. (Cf.  Ger.  haucJi,  BREATH.) 

Yaus,  (yah-oos),  Spiritual /oci  or  Centers  ;  radiating 
Points;  Personalities  ;  Gods,  Men,  etc.  (Cf.  Span,  yo,  I.) 

Wans,  (wah-oos),  Mutualities,  Interchanges,  etc. 
(cf.  Wato,  Speech-thing,  Language.) 


CHAPTER  IX. 

SPECIAL  CONSIDERATION  OF  THE  ABSTRACT  AND  THE 

CONCRETE. 

161.  After  the  preceding  Grand  Distributions  of 
Universal  Being  (into  the  Unlimited  and  The  Limi- 
tary, The  General  and  The  Special,  etc.),  none  re- 
mains of  more  intrinsic  importance  than  that  already 
alluded  to,  and  partially  employed  as  a  basis  of 
Classification,  into  THE  ABSTRACT  and  THE  CONCRETE 
(94,  139.)  Herbert  Spencer,  not  seizing  on  the  more 
subtle  Plnlosoplioid  bases  of  distribution,  to  which 
hardly  anything  else  than  the  Analysis  of  the  Alpha- 
bet could  have  conducted  us,  commences,  indeed,  his 
Classification  of  the  Sciences,  at  this  point,  making, 
his  first  Threefold  Division  into,  1.  THE  ABSTRACT, 
2.  THE  CONCRETE,  and  3.  THE  ABSTRACT-CONCRETE, 
(or  Mixed).1  By  adopting  the  termination  -o-logy,  wo 
may  conveniently  convert  these  designations  into 
Abstradology,  Concrdolocjy  and  Abstract-Concretology 

1 "  The  Classification  of  the  Sciences,  to  which  are  added  reasons 
for  dissenting  from  the  Philosophy  of  M.  Comte,"  by  Herbert 
Spencer — a  Pamphlet. 


THE  ABSTRACT  AND  THE  CONCEETE  DEFINED.   137 

(as  a  transition  to  the  proper  Alwaso  terms  ending  in 
-ski.)  By  Abstract-Concrete,  Spencer  means  to  say 
Mixed  or  Undifferentiated  into  either  completely  Ab- 
stract or  completely  Concrete,  embracing  all  that  is 
neither  wholly  Abstract  nor  wholly  Concrete,  (Mik- 
tonology — B.  O.  Index,  word  Mikton.) 

162.  But  what  is  the  meaning  of  the  terms  Abstract 
and  Concrete?     Few  persons  have  a  very  definite 
conception  of   this  very  fundamental  Scientific  dis- 
crimination.     Only  recentl}7  a  gentleman  who  had 
spent  his  life-time  in  Scientific  pursuits  was  heard  ask- 
ing for  an  accurate  definition  of  these  two  terms.    The 
common  reader  need  not,  therefore,  dread  to  confess  a 
certain  obscurity  which  may  rest  in  his  thought  on 
this  subject,  and  to  seek  by  a  little  close  thinking  to 
remove  it. 

163.  Etymologically,  Abstract,  from  the  Latin  words 
abs  FROM,  and  tractus  DRAWN,  means  draion  asunder  or 
completely  separated,  and  so,  as  it  were,  rendered  thin, 
but,  also,  transparent  or  dear  ;  and  Concrete,  from  the 
Latin  con  WITH,  and  cresco  TO  GROW,  means  grown  to- 
gether, solidified,  or  closely  compacted,  and  so  make  thick, 
heavy,  dense,  impervious  to  the  light ;  liJce  solid  or  actual 
material  Things,  contrasted  with  mere  ideas  or  thoughts, 
which  are  Abstract.     Such  is  what  is  directly  meant  or 
implied  by  the  words.    So,  to  abstract,  mentally,  is  to 
separate  completely  some  one  attribute  of  a  subject,  as 
the  color,  for  example,  in  order  to  consider  it  sepa- 
rately.   But  all  of  this  does  not  give  a  sufficiently  true 
and  distinct  idea  of  the  meaning  of   Abstract   and 
Concrete,  or  of  "  The  Abstract "  and  "  The  Concrete," 

6 


138       ABSTRACTISMUS  AND  CONCHETISMUS. 

spoken  of  as  great  Departments  or  Domains  of 
Being ;  two  halves,  as  it  were,  of  the  Universe — ex- 
cept that  plasmal  and  imperfectly  characterized 
Mikton  which  is  not  wholly  separated  into  either. 
Further  statement  and  illustration  will  render  this 
difficult  matter  distinctly  comprehensible. 

164.  The  Concrete  includes  all  Sensibly  or  Naturally 
REAL  Things;  every  Mineral,  including  the  planets  as  the 
great  Mineral  Bodies,  every  Vegetable,  every  Animal, 
including  Man,  as  to  his  body,  or  all  that  is  present 
of  him  to  the  senses ; — in  fine,  the  whole  Sensibly 
Real  World.     It  may  then  be  asked  with  some  sur- 
prise :  where  is  there  room  for  another  equal  half  of 
the  Universe,  The  Abstract  ?     To  this  the  answer  is 
that  The  Abstract  is  wholly  confined  to  what  is,  from 
this  Natural  Sensuous  point  of  view,  A  PURE  NOTHING. 
Hence,  from  this  Outer  and  Material  Standing-Point,  it 
is  merely  Negative  ;  although,  as  we  shall  find,  the  view 
is  reversed  FROM  ITS  OWN  STANDING-POINT,  and  The  Ab- 
stract is,  then,  THE  MORE  POSITIVE  WORLD  ;  and  the 
World  of  Outer  Sensible  Appearances  is  NEGATIVE  to  it. 

165.  Space  and  Time  are  Abstractions,  and  are,  in  a 
sense,  mere  Nothings.     A  Point  is  defined,  in  Geom- 
etry,  to   be  Position,  without  Length,  Breadth,    or 
Thickness  ;  a  Line  to  be  Length  without  Breadth  or 
Thickness  ;  and  a  Surface  to  be  Length  and  Breadth 
without  Thickness.     All   of  these  are,  therefore,  Ab- 
stract ;  and  that  which  has  Materiality,  and  so  Sub- 
stance, or  a  Real  Yalue,  is  the  only  Concrete.     Even 
the  Geometrical  Solid,  though  it  has  a  ghostly  kind  of 
thickness,  being  yet  destitute  of  Substance  (as  a  pie- 


ELEMENTS   OF  FORM   AND   NUMBER.  139 

nuni  or  filling-in  of  its  depth  or  holding-capacity),  is 
also  Abstract. 

166.  That  which  has  neither  Length,  Breadth,  nor 
Thickness  is,  obviously,  from  the  Sensible  or  Natural 
Point  of  View,  a  Pure  Nothing  ;  so  of  the  Line  which 
has  Length  merely ;  so  of  the  Surface,  and  so  of  the 
Geometrical  Solid,  even.   These  are  all  Pure  Nothings, 
the  mere  Cut-up  of  the  still  more  Negative  or  Noth- 
ing-like Pure  Space,  in  which  they,  as  well  as  the 
Concrete  "World,  are  situated.     Or,  rather,  they  may 
be  merely  Conceptions,  in  the  Mind,  of  Positings  and 
Limitations  which  have  no  Real  Existence  in  Actual 
Space  even ;  but  which  are  put  there,  by  the  Mind,  as  a 
means  of  Measuring  and  so  of  thinking  (or  thinging) 
other  things.     All  these  Primary  Elements  of  Form 
are  Abstract,  and,  in  a  sense,  very  unreal ;  but,  on  the 
other  hand,  if  all  Points,  Lines,  and  Surfaces  were  re- 
moved, or  ihought-away-from  the  Universe,    nothing 
would  remain  before  the  mind  ;  or,  if  the  process 
were  even  partially  effected,  nothing  but  The  SUB- 
STANCE of  Things  would  remain  ;  for  the  Things  them- 
selves must  have  Form,  in  order  to  remain  Things ; 
and  Form  consists  of  precisely  these  Abstract  Points,  Lines 
and  Surfaces,  which,  when   analyzed,   are  Nothings  ; 
except  for  the  Keason  or  the  Mind's  eye,  within  us. 

167.  So  in  respect  to  Number ;  A  Unit  is  not  a  real 
object,  not  anything  Concrete  or  sensibly  real ;  not  a 
mineral,  a  vegetable  or  an  animal;  though  it  may 
represent  any  of  these.  So  of  any  number  of  Units. 
A  Sum  is  only  an  aggregation  of  Units,  or  of  Pure 
Nothings ;  except  to  the  reason.  Number  is  there- 


140  THOUGHT-LINES  AND   -SURFACES. 

fore,  as  well  as  Form,  an  Abstract  Domain.  A 
repeats  a  Point,  a  Sum  of  Units  repeats  an  Aggregation 
of  Points  ;  both  of  these  may  be  representative  of  an 
Aggregation  of  Things,  as  of  Stars,  for  instance,  in  the 
Heavens  ;  but  the  moment  we  make  this  Real  appli- 
cation of  them,  we  have  gone  over  from  the  Abstract 
to  the  Concrete  Domain. 

168.  Between  any  two  Units  in  a  Sum,  between  the 
separate  Units  in  the  Number  Two,  for  instance,  there 
is  an  almost  imperceptible  Thought-line,  which  con- 
nects them  together,  and  makes  them  into  a  Sum.  This 
Thought-line  repeats  the  Geometrical  Line  as  reaching 
from  one  Point  to  another  in  Space.  If  three  Units 
are  held  in  the  mind  connectedly,  and  at  the  same 
time,  they  are  necessarily  in  the  same  Thought-plane  ; 
that  is  to  say,  there  is  a  filmy  -surface  in  the  mind's 
perception,  in  which  the  three  points  lie,  of  which  we 
are  ordinarily  unconscious,  but  which  can  be  brought  out 
by  Close  Reflection;  as  the  picture  upon  a  daguer- 
reotype plate  is  developed  by  a  chemical  process. 
Through  the  existence  of  these  very  Attenuated  or  Ab- 
stract Thought-lines,  and  Thought- Surf  aces,  intervening 
among  the  Units  of  Number,  there  is  an  exact  Echo  of 
Likeness  (hitherto  occult),  between  The  Elements,  or 
Least  and  Lowest  Components,  of  Number  and  the 
known  Elements  of  Form.  It  is  here  that  an  exact 
Analogy  between  The  Two  Grand  Departments  of  the 
Mathematics — the  Geometrical,  and  the  Abstract  (the 
Calculus) — takes  origin,  a n  Analogy  which  Universology, 
in  its  Scientological  or  Ejcact  Branch,  dcvelopes  into  (in 
immense  new  science  of  Symbolic  Morphology,  and  Deter- 


THOUGHT-POINTS.  141 

minate  Correspondences.  Abstract  PRINCIPLES,  as  Ori- 
gins, repeat  Points;  and  LAWS,  inherent  in  Being,  cor- 
respond in  like  manner  with  Lines.  Logic,  in  the 
grand  sense,  as  the  Science  of  Laws  and  Principles,  is 
thus  also  swept  into  the  same  circle  of  Correspondences 
or  Analogies.  Spencer  reckons  Logic  and  The  Mathe- 
matics as  the  only  Abstract  Sciences.  Univer- 
sological  Scientology  is  a  Third  ;  and  remains  to  be 
demonstrated  to  the  Scientific  world.  LAWS  and 
PRINCIPLES,  are,  then,  another  special  variety  of  Ab- 
stractions. 

169.  It  will  be  a  first  step  towards  comprehending 
these  mysteries  of  Abstraction,  and  one  of  the  least 
difficult  ones,  to  realize  that  a  Unit ;  not  any  thing 
whatsoever,  (as  an  apple,  or  a  block) ;  but  a  purely 
Abstract  Unit  of  Number,  is  a  Thought-Point,  in  the 
mind  ;  nothing  more  and  nothing  less  than  that.  It 
is  not  (necessarily),  even  in  imagination,  posited  ox  put 
at  any  particular  place  in  External  Space,  but  it  is 
nevertheless  posited  as  a  point  of  thought,  rationally, 
or  before  the  mind's  eye ;  in,  as  it  were,  an  Internal 
Thought-Space,  or  "in  the  Mind."  These  exceeding 
subtleties  or  refinements  of  Speculation  on  the  Echoes 
or  Correspondences  of  what  happens  in  different 
Spheres  of  Being ;  as,  here,  bettueen  Number  and  Form 
in  their  very  Elements ;  loom  up,  in  the  higher  depart- 
ments of  Universology,  into  great  importance.  The 
subject  is  only  introduced  here,  incidentally,  to  aid 
in  furnishing  an  idea  of  Abstractness  or  The  Abstract; 
which  extends  to  and  covers  the  whole  field  of  those 
concei^tions  which  are  so  fiiic  that  they  only  exist  Bz- 


142  NEGATISM    BECOME  POSITIVE. 

fore  the,  Mind,  or  in  the  Scope  of  the  Reason  ;  but  which 
externally,  and  as  things  to  be  seen  by  the  natural 
eye,  or  heard,  snielled,  tasted,  or  handled,  are  Pure 
Nothings. 

170.  And  yet  these  same  Abstract  Ideas,  as  Units, 
Points,  Lines,  Surfaces,  and  those  finer  Thought- 
Lines  and  Thought- Surf  aces,  intervening  among  Units 
(or  Thought-Points),  are,  from  the  High  Scientific,  or 
Abstract  (also  called  the  Logical)  Point  of  View,  more 
POSITIVE  and  EEAL  Things,  than  Kocks,  Trees  and 
Animal  Bodies  ;  somewhat  as  superheated  steam,  or 
gas,  which  bursts  a  solid  encasement  of  rock  or  iron 
(though  in  another  sense  far  finer  and  feebler  than 
it)  is,  in  this  encasement,  more  Positive  or  Potent 
than  the  Bock  or  Iron  itself.  Or,  as — for  a  better  il- 
lustration— the  Diamond-Point  which  cuts  the  Glass, 
though  a  mere  point  (and  hence,  theoretically,  as  it 
were,  a  Nothing)  is  stronger  and  wore  Positive,  more 
a  Real  Something,  than  the  more  massive  Glass  itself. 
Or,  again,  The  Thin  and  Vanishing  Edge  of  any  Cut- 
ting instrument,  though  a  Mere  Edge,  that  is  to  say, 
a  mere  Line,  (as  nearly  as  any  thing  Concrete,  for  the 
knife  is  still  Concrete,  can  be  the  imitation  of  an  Ab- 
stract thing  such  as  a  Line  is,  geometrically  consid- 
ered), is  Positive  to  the  wood, or  meat, or  other  Concrete 
Object,  which  it  cuts ;  and  the  Concrete  Object  is,  as 
it  were,  Negative,  or  a  mere  Nothing  before  it.  Such 
or  similar  is  the  relation  between  the  Ken  or  K«  aness 
(the  acumen)  of  the  Intellect,  or  those  Clean-cut  Dis- 
criminations which  represent  it,  (as  Point*,  Linen,  Prin- 
ciples, Definitions,  Laws  and  Relations),  and  the  Gross 


WHY  THE  ABSTRACT   IS   THE   SCIENTIFIC.  143 

Outer  Substances  and  Objects  to  which  we  subse- 
quently apply  them.  So  it  is,  also,  that  Points  and 
Lines — which  are  really  the  Domain  of  the  Science 
of  Geometry,  the  leading  (relatively  "  Concrete ") 
branch  of  Mathematics — and  Units  or  Thought-Points, 
the  Subject-Matter  or  Domain  of  Arithmetic  (or  the 
Calculus),  another  (and  the  more  Abstract)  branch  of 
Mathematics;  that  the  Mathematics,  in  fine,  are  or 
belong  to  The  Scientifically  Positive  or  Governing 
Domain  of  Being  ivliich  is  "The  Abstract ;  "  as  against 
the  whole  world  of  Sensibly  Real  Things,  which  are 
The  Concrete.  This  happens  while,  at  the  same  time, 
this  whole  Abstract  Domain  of  Being  is,  from  the  Na- 
tural, Real,  or  Materialistic  Point  of  View,  no  Being 
at  all ;  a  mere  congeries  of  Pure  Nothings  ;  a  Set  of 
Ideal  Positings  (Puttings  of  Points)  and  Cuts  of  mere 
External  Yacant  Space,  or  still  more  subtly,  of 
Thought-Space  ;  or  of  still  other  Pure  Nothings. 

171.  But  why  is  this  Nothing-Realm,  The  Abstract, 
assumed,  as  in  the  last  preceding  paragraph,  to  be 
more  cognate  or  closely  allied  with  Science,  than  the 
Real  World  of  Objective  or  Concrete  Things  ?  It  is 
because  the  outer  Real  World  is  Nature ;  or  has  the 
same  alliance  with  Nature  which  the  Abstract  World 
has  with  Science  ;  and  because  Nature  is  Spon- 
taneous and  utterly  (or,  at  least,  seemingly  so) 
Irregular.  There  are,  for  example,  positively  no 
Straightnesses  or  Straight  Lines  in  Nature.  The  near- 
est approach  to  Straightness  in  her  domain  is,  per- 
haps, in  the  Edges  of  Crystals ;  but  even  these  suf- 
ficiently magnified,  or,  at  any  rate,  when  tested  by 


144  NATURE   TRANSMUTED  INTO  ART. 

the  ideal  sfraightness  of  a  mathematical  line,  are  ir- 
regular. But  sfraightness  is  the  one  essential  quality 
of  a  Rule  or  Ruhr ;  and  so  of  a  LAW  which  is  a  Rule 
of  Conduct,  or  a  Regulator  of  our  ways  of  Thinking, 
and  hence  of  Acting.  We  cannot,  therefore,  look  to 
Nature  for  RuL  s  or  Laws  ;  and  Science  itself  being 
nothing  but  a  Systematized  Collection  of  Rules  and 
Laws,  it  follows  that  we  cannot  look  to  Nature 
for  Science,  in  the  highest,  most  exact  sense  of  that 
term.  Even  in  Astronomy,  it  is  not  the  bodies 
of  the  sun  and  planets,  primarily,  but  only  thrir 
geometrical  relations,  which  we  study.  From  the  High 
Scientological  Point  of  View,  Abstract  Science  is,  there- 
fore, THE  ONLY  TRUE  SCIENCE  ;  Natural  and  all  Obser- 
vational Science  is  Pseudo-Science ;  or,  at  least,  Sub- 
ordinate and  less  positively  entitled  to  the  name. 

172.  In  Pure  Ideal,  in  Thought  itself,  in  Blank  Ex- 
ternal Space,  or  in  the  Echoing  Mind-Space  within, 
nothing  hinders   us   from  drawing  Lines   Absolutely 
straight,  (saving  an  ulterior  transcendental  criticism 
upon  even  this  statement.)     It  is  here,  therefore,  and 
here  alone,  that  we  can  establish  RULES,  and  LAWS,  and 
Systematic  Scientific -Schemes  of  Thought,  witli  which 
afterwards  to  compare  the  Deviations  of  Nature  ;  by 
which,  therefore,  to  measure  Nature  ;  and  so  even  ulti- 
mately to  control  and  systematize  her  operations  ;  to 
regenerate  NATURE,  in  fine,  through  SCIENCE  ;  and  so, 
ultimately,  to  convert  the  Crude  Realm  of  Nature  into 
the  Sublime,  Beautiful  and  Divine  Realm  of  ART. 

173.  It  follows,  therefore,  as  said  above,  that  Science 
is  radically  planted  in  "  The  Abstract,"    and  not  in 

7 


TWO  KINDS  OF    TRUTH.  145 

"The  Concrete;'  That  Abstract  Science,  as  The 
Mathematics  and  the  Logic  of  Being,  or,  otherwise, 
Exact  Science,  is  SCIENCE  pre-eminently,  or  Science 
in  the  ruling  sense ;  and  that  Concrete  Science  or 
The  Natural  Sciences  are  only  Scientific  in  a  Secondary 
and  Inferior  sense. 

174.  Some  quarrel  arises,  however,  at  this  point,  be- 
tween The  Mathematics  and  The  Natural  Sciences. 
As  Natural  Science  proceeds  upon  the   minute  and 
careful   Observation   of    Nature,  what   it   perceives 
and  records,  must,  it  is  urged,  be  true — although  its 
Facts  are  confessedly  full  of  deviations,  intertwinings 
and  overlappings,  which  nearly  defy  classification  at 
all ;  and  absolutely  defy  EXACT  CLASSIFICATION,  such  as 
is  illustrated  by  /Straight  Lines,  Squares  and  Cubes,  in 
Geometry.     On  the  other  hand,  Mathematical  prop- 
ositions,  as  that  Two   are  Equal  to  Two,  that  Two 
and  Two  are  Four,  that   a   Square  has   (and  must 
have)  four  Eight  Angles,  are  not  only  true,  but  are 
peculiarly  true,  not  to  the  Exterior  Senses,  but  to  the 
Reason  ;  and  even  in  the  sense  that  it  is  inconceivable 
that  they  should  be  otherwise. 

175.  The  Solution   is  that  there  are  two  kinds  of 
Truth;  one  addressed  to  the  Senses,  and  one  to  the 
Pure  Reason.     To  discuss  radically  the  claims,  rank 
and  offices  of   each  of  these   hemispheres  of  truth 
would  take  us  too  much  aside  from  the  present  pur- 
pose.    It  must  suffice  to  indicate  the  issue,  as  the 
real  issue  in  the  conflict  of  all  past  thinking ;  and  as, 
again,  especially,  the  rising  issue  of  the  hour.    The  so- 
called  ""Positive  Science"  now  triumphantly  dominant 


146        SUBDIVISION  OF  ABSTRACT  AND   CONCRETE. 

in  the  Scientific  World,  stands,  representatively,  for 
the  Supremacy  of  the  Senses,  of  Observational  Knowl- 
edge, of  Materialistic  Realities  and  Tendencies,  or, 
in  a  word,  of  Nature  over  Science.  Universological 
Scientology  will  re-assert  and  vindicate,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  Ruling  Function  and  Legitimate  Supremacy 
of  the  Abstract  and  Absolute  Reason  ;  of  Reflective 
and  Analytical  Truth  ;  of  Spiritualistic  Realities  and 
Tendencies  ;  or,  in  a  word,  of  Science  proper ;  of  the 
Higher  Positivism,  over  Nature  or  the  crudity  of  the 
Primitive  Appearances.  The  Theologica-Metaphysical 
First  Essay  of  Thinking  has  yielded  or  is  yielding,  it 
is  true,  to  Observational  Positivism  ;  butUniversology, 
reverting  from  this  surrender ;  on  higher  grounds  ; 
while  standing  on  and  affirming  in-full  that  Observational 
Basis,  (but  merely  as  basis),  reasserts  the  Superior 
Dominion  of  the  PURE  REASON  ;  the  Metaphysics  of 
Science  itself. 

176.  The  Abstract  is  named,  Alwali,  Sliaup,io  (cf. 
Eng.  shape,  as  Form ;  Ger.  sc7iqffe.n,  TO  MAKE)  ;  and  the 
Concrete  is  &SiaiiI>,io  (139.)  These,  again,  subdivide 
immediately  into  their  own  Abstracts  or  Concretes, 
respectively.  Within  the  Concretismus,  fo.r  example, 
all  Light,  Thin,  or  Attenuated  and  Trivial  Objects, 
and  markedly  such  as,  by  some  other  quality  than 
massiveness  or  weight,  attest  inherent  power ;  as  the 
gases  and  cutting  edges  above  cited  (170) ;  echo,  from 
their  place  in  the  Concrete  world  (for  such  objects 
are  still  concrete),  to  the  Entire  Pure  -  act  W<>il<l, 
outside  of  the  Concrete  ;  while  Sulky  and  Heavy  Ob- 
jects within  the  Concretismus  echo,  or  rep.vit  within 


ANALOGUES  DEFINED.  147 

The  Concrete,  the  Entire  Concrete  World  itself.  This 
echo  (of  the  Abstracted  of  The  Concrete  to  the  Ab- 
stract, and  of,  as  in  the  instance  just  given,  the  Con- 
cretozcZ  of  the  same  to  the  Concrete)  is  an  instance, 
and  an  important  one,  of  Scientific  Analogy,  (11.) 

177.  The  Objects  and  Ideas  which  so  repeat  each 
other,  are  called  ANALOGUES  of  each  other  ;  and  this 
subtle  echoing  character  of   Objects  to  Objects,  of 
Ideas  to  Ideas,  of  Objects  to  Ideas,  of  Objects  and 
Ideas  to  entire  Spheres  or  Domains  of  Being,  of  Do- 
mains to  Domains,  and  the  like,  throughout  all  the 
Departments  of  Being,  is  what  is  meant  by  "  Universal 
Analogy"  or  "The  Doctrine  of  Correspondences,"  as 
it  is  now  specifically   discovered,   and  is  about  to  be 
utilized  in  the  Sciences.     It  is  this  discovery  which 
renders  a  Universal  Language  and  a  Universal  Sci- 
ence possible,  because  it  establishes  the  possibility 
of  a  True  although  Transcendental  Classification  of 
All  Things,  and  even  of  all  possible  Ideas.1 

178.  Nothing  can  be  more  striking,  to  one  who  is 
familiar  with  the  qualities  of  Sound,  than   the  exact 
appropriateness  of  the  Thin,  Light,  (or  Abstractoid) 
Class  of  the  Consonant-Sounds,  t,  k,  p,  etc.,  to  the 
denotation   of  The  Abstract,   universally,  (THE  AB- 
STKACTISMUS),  and  of  all  the  Details  and  Particulars 
of  the  same  ;  and  of  the   Thick,  Heavy,  (or  Concre- 

1 1  cannot  speak  too  highly  of  the  recent  work  of  Dr.  McCosh,  on 
"  The  Discursive  Laws  of  Thought  "  (Logic),  as  furnishing  to  the 
careful  student  one  of  the  best  preparations  for  the  still  subtler 
definitions,  and  the  deeper  descent  into  the  profundities,  of  the 
Universolomcal  Abstract.  S.  P.  A. 


148       "SPIRIT"  AND  "THE  SPIEIT  er  TRUTH.' 


toid)  Class  d,  g,  I,  etc.,  to  that  of  The  Concrete,  uni- 
versally, (THE  CONCRETISMUS),  and  its  Particulars. 

179.  In  addition  to  the  several  namings  for  these 
two  Classes  of  Sounds,  previously  noticed  (113),  Prof. 
Elsberg  has  very  happily  called  the  Thin  Sounds  Un- 
intoned,  and  the  Thick  or  Heavy  Sounds  Intoned,  refer- 
ring  to  the  Vocalify  (the  same   Substance  of   Sound 
which  makes  the  Vowels),  which  is  brought  up  from 
the  Larynx  and  blended  with  The  Abstracts  for  the 
production  of    The  Concretes.      They  might  also  be 
named  Consonets  and  Gonsonads.     (B.  O.  c.  7,  t.  43.) 

180.  Concrete  Objects,  Heal  Things,  and  Persons,  as 
regards  their  Personality,  exhale  or  emane  those  Finer 
Odylic  Substances  or  Spheral  Essences  ("  Spheres  ' 
or  Atmospheres)  which  are  ordinarily  meant  by  Spirit 
in  the  diffusive  sense  of  the  term ;  the  Analogues  oS! 
which  are  the  Cosmical  Airs,  Ethers,  and  Auras,  and 
the  more  determinate  Radiations  (as  of  Light,  Heat, 
Electricity  and  Magnetism)  which  infill  the   Inter- 
stices between  the  Planets  and  blend  them  by  Influx 
and  Efflux ;  but  Abstract  Entities,  as  Lines  and  Laws 
(168)  project  still  finer  Spiritual  AXIALITIES  which  pen- 
etrate, and  co-ordinate,  or  organize  the  more  Massive 
and  unstable  Spirit  of  The  Concrete,  wliich  otherwise 
"  bloweth  where  it  listeth."  These  last  are  "  the  Spirit 
of  Trtiih"  or  of  Science  and  of  Inherent  Necessity  and 
Laic — THE  SCIENTIFIC  SPIRIT.     (B.  O.  c.  8,  t.  9 ;  a.  47, 
48,  t.  204 ;  t.  634 ;  and  B.  O.  Vocnlultinj  w.  Spirit ;  see 
also  what  is  said  ch.  xi.  of  the  Bi-triiiacria,  and  con- 
ceive the   Projci'liiii/   Picijnhnicc   Radiations,    axially, 
from  the  Intellectual  or  Eational  Axes  of  Being.) 


CHAPTER  X. 

EE-STATEMENT  AND  EXPANSION  OF  THE  CLASSIFICATION 
OF  THE  EEALMS  OB  DOMAINS  OF  BEING  ;  WITH  NAM- 
INGS  IN  THE  TERMINATIONS  -10,  -SO,  AND  -TO. 

181.  The  present  chapter  will  be  devoted  mainly  to 
a  further  exercise  in  word-building,  and  with  the  pre- 
dominance given  to  the  namings  of  Domains  by  the  use 
of  the  termination  -io  ;  (with  -so,  and  -to.)  It  will  be 
the  close  thinker  oillv,  and  one  who  is  somewhat  versed 

*j  * 

in  Philosophical  discriminations  who  will  fully  ap- 
preciate the  far-reaching  and  exhaustive  nature  of 
the  Analysis,  upon  which  these  namings  depend. 

Au,io,  (ah-oo-ee-o),  The  REALiTY-Doraain  (as  con- 
trasted with  Limitation^  THE  HOMOGENEOUS;  The 
Qw«s/-Indeterrainate,  The  Qwasi-Inarticulate  ;  Proto- 
plasmal,  Confused. 

Aunio,  (ah-oon-ee-o),  The  Incompre7iensibiUty-Do- 
main,  The  Unknowable,  THE  PURE  RATIONAL;  The 
Cardinary  or  Transcendental  Philosophical  Realm. 

Engkauvlio,  (eng-kah-oov-lee-o),  or  Shaumblio, 
(shah-oombl-ee-o),  THE  HETEROGENEOUS  ;  represents 
collectively  the  Consonants,  as  Au,io  does  the  Yowels. 


150  DOMAINS,    IN   -10. 

Laumbzhio,  (lali-oombzli-ee-o),  THE  LIMITARY  or 
RELATIONAL  (Lat.  re,  BACK,  and  lotus,  SIDE)  ;  Ke-sicliDg 
or  Coaptation  of  borders  or  edges ;  (cf.  Lat.  limbus, 
EDGE,  BOEDER  ;  Eng.  limb.) 

Xau,io,  (kah-oo-ee-o),  The  Parking,  De-part-ing, 
Parf-uritional,  Originative,  Cfows-ative  Domain ;  The 
Domain  of  the  THEREFORE,  (for  that  reason,  or 
cause  —  the  Logical  Conclusion) ;  Eml-to-end-ness, 
Demonstration,  Indexism,  Indication ;  Logic,  as  to 
Co-Sequenciation  or  the  process  of  Ratiocination, 
(The  Chain  of  Logical  Reasoning — SEQUENCES.) 

Aukio,  (ah-ook-ee-o),  The  Counter-PART-ing,  Adjust- 
ative,  Correlative  Domain ;  Side-by-side-ness  (Lat.  con, 
WITH,  re,  BACK  and  latus,  SIDE)  ;  The  Analogical,  Corre- 
spondential,  Comparological  Domain.  Logic  as  Ana- 
Logic,  or  the  Law  and  Doctrine*  of  Correspondences. 

(Kauldo  is  the  unition  of  the  preceding  two,  and 
is  the  Panlological  or  Total  Logical  Domain — relates 
to  the  distribution  of  Parts.  B.  O.  c.  8,  t.  15.) 

Tau,io,  (tah-oo-ee-o),  The  Point-ing,  A.p-point-mg, 
Designating  Domain;  The  Given-Individuality-Do- 
main. 

Aut,io,  (ah-oot-ee-o),  The  Counter-point-ing  or  Al- 
ternative Domain  ;  (The  others,  things  or  persons.) 

(Tautio  is  the  uuition  of  the  preceding  two,  and  is 
the  Entirety-Domain,  as  contrasted  with  the  parts ; 
cf.  Fr.  tout,  ALL.) 

Pau,io,  (pah-oo-ee-o),  The  Positivitv-Domain  ;  the 
Hinge-wise  Integration  of  the  Whole  and  the  Parts ; 
Mechanization;  (cf.  La(.  oos-,  Eng. 


DOMAINS,   IN   -10.  151 

Aupio,  (ali-oop-ee-o),  The  (7o?mfer-Positivity-Do- 
main ;  the  Dubiosity-Domain,  Possibility,  May-be ; 
(cf.  Eng.  "  qpcw-to-doubt.")  (B.  O.  632.) 

Qau,io,  (tshah-oo-ee-o),  The  Abstract  Distribu- 
tive ;  The  Selective  or  Elective  Domain ;  (cf.  Eng. 
choice,  choose.*) 

Augio  (ah-ootsh-io),  The  Abstract  Alternating  or 
Counterpointing  Distributive  Domain ;  (cf.  Eng.  each.) 

Thau,io,  (thah-oo-ee-o),  The  Abstract  Pivotal,  and 
Stabiliological ;  (cf.  Gr.  tkeos,  GOD.) 

Auth,io,  (ah-ooth-ee-o),  The  Abstract  Counter-piv- 
otal. 

Gau,io,  (gah-oo-ee-o),  The  Proceeding,  On-going, 
or  "  Becoming  "-Domain  ;  (cf.  Eng.  go.) 

Aug,io,  (ah-oog-ee-o),  The  Counter-Proceeding, 
Resisting,  Antagonizing  Domain ;  Action  or  the  Effort 
to  overcome ;  (cf.  Lat.  ag-o,  TO  ACT,  Eng.  agony,  etc.) 

Dau,io,  (dah-oo-ee-o),  The  Hard,  Permanent,  Ob- 
jective, Enduring  Domain  ;  (cf.  Lat.  dur-us,  HARD.) 

Audio,  (ah-ood-ee-o),  The  Counter-Objective  Do- 
main ;  Adjunctive  and  Coadjutive  ;  (cf.  Eng.  aid) ; 
Reverberation  ;  (cf.  Lat.  aud,ire,  TO  HEAR.) 

Bau,io,  (bah-oo-ee-o),  The  Corporate,  or  Incorpo- 
rate Domain  ;  (cf.  for  meaning,  Lat.  corpus,  BODY.) 

Au,bio  (ah-oob-ee-o),  The  Counter-Corporate-Do- 
main ;  The  Inert  or  Dead-body  Domain. 

Jau,io,  ( jah-oo-ee-o),  The  Concrete  Distributive 
Domain ;  (see  cauio.) 


152  DOMAINS,    IN   -10. 

Auj,io,  (ah-ooj-ee-o),  The  Concrete  Alternating  or 
Counter-pointing  Distributive  Domain;  (see  au§io). 

Jaujio  distribution  and  counter-distribution ;  mu- 
tual assignment  of  parts;  (cf.  Eng.  judge,  judgment, 
etc.) 

Dhauio,  (dhah-oo-ee-o),  The  Concrete  Standard- 
and-Pivotal  Domain;  Siabiliological.  (B.  O.  t.  632.) 

Audhio,  (ah-oodh-ee-o),  The  Concrete  Counter- 
Standard  -  and  -  Pivotal  Domain;  (see  thau,io  and 
auth,io.) 

Shau,io,  (shah-oo-ee-o),  The  Abstract  Ramification- 
Domain  ;  within  Limits,  whence  THE  CONDITIONED. 

Aushio,  (ah-oosh-ee-o),  The  Abstract  Counter- 
Ramification-Domain  ;  The  Conditioning,  whence,  it- 
self, THE  UNCONDITIONED. 

Sau,io,  (sah-oo-ee-o),  The  Collective  Individuality- 
Domain  ;  (/7icMec?-Many-Pointism) ;  within  Limits, 
whence  THE  FINITE  ;  (cf.  Engkauvlio,  127.) 

Au(s),io,  (ah-oos-ee-o),  The  Counter-Collective  In- 
dividuality-Domain (IfocMerf-Many-Pomtism)  ;  with- 
out or  outside  of  and  beyond  Limits ;  whence  THE 
INFINITE  ;  (126 ;  cf.  Ger.  cms,  OUT.) 

Fau,io,  (fah-oo-ee-o),  THE  PRACTICAL  or  ACTUAL 
Domain  ;  The  Hinge-wise  or  Cardinated  Pvelation  of 
The  Finite  and  The  Infinite  ;  (cf.  Eng.  fact.) 

Aufio,  (ah-oof-ec-o),  The  Counter-Actual-Domain  ; 
Schemative  ;  Tna  THEORETICAL  Domain,  The  Suppo- 
sititious; (cf.  Eng.  f/'.) 


DOMAINS,   IN  -10.  153 

Mau,io,  (mah-oo-ee-o),  The  Exterior  ;  THE  OBJECT- 
IVE (Realm) ;  THE  MACROCOSM,  (The  Big  World.) 

Nau,io,  (nah-oo-ee-o),  The  Interior  ;  THE  SUBJECT- 
ive  (Realm) ;  THE  MICROCOSM,  (The  Little  World.) 

Aungio,  (ah-oong-ee-o),  "The  Mean  State  or  Con- 
striction between  The  Objective  and  The  Subject- 
ive, in  which  Reason  consists,"  (see  Comte's  Catechism 
of  Positive  Religion.,  Eng.  Ed.  p.  168.)  (Cf.  Lat.  an- 
guis,  THE  SERPENT,  from  the  idea  of  throttling  or  con- 
striction round  the  waist  or  throat ;  Eng.  anguish, 
terrible  stress  or  stringency  of  sorrow.) 

Aumio,  (ah-oorn-ee-o),  "  THE  ENVIRONMENT,"  of  any 
generalized  unity. 

Aunio,  (ah-oon-ee-o),  Any  Given  Generalized  Uni- 
ty ;  The  Environed ;  The  given  Subject,  under  con- 
sideration ;  The  Core  or  Centrum,  which  the  Matrix 
or  Medium  encloses ;  ONE  ;  A  ONE  ;  ANY  THING. 

Lauio,  (lah-oo-ee-o),  THE  LONG  RUN  ;  Ulterior  and 
Reactionary  Consequence;  The  (Realm  or)  Career  of 
The  Eternities ;  (Gentleness,  Calmness,  Rest) ;  The 
Integral,  Continuous,  Entire ;  (of.  Eng.  long,  longing, 
lingering. 

Rau,io,  (rah-oo-ee-o),  THE  SHORT  RUN  ;  Direct  and 
Immediate  Consequence;  The  (Realm  or)  Career  of 
The  Temporalities,  (Disturbance,  Trouble,  Transi- 
toriness) ;  The  Broken,  The  Fractional ;  (cf.  Eng.  rack, 
rag,  rocky.) 

Aulio,  (ah-ool-ee-o),  The  FINAL  or  ULTIMATE,  (con- 
tinuing to  the  end),  The  Complete,  The  Falling  or 
Failing,  The  Mature ;  (cf .  Eng.  Old.) 


154  DOMAINS,  IN  -10. 

Aurio,  (ah-oor-ee-o),  THE  INCIPIENT  or  IMMEDIATE  ; 
that  of  the  HOUR  ;  The  New,  The  Young ;  The  Eising 
(as  of  the  Sun),  The  Original ;  (cf.  Lat.  hora,  Ital.  ora, 
Eng.  hour;  Lat.  on'go,  on'gen ;  Lat.  or,rior,TQ  RISE, 
and  or-do,  for  on'-do,  ORDER,  etc.) 

Hau,io,  (hah-oo-ee-o),  THE  SPIRITUAL  (Eealm),  The 
Spirit-world,  or  Spiritual-Rational  Universe,  (God, 
Men,  Spirits) ;  The  World  of  Spiritualities  ;  "  The 
Church." 

Yau,io,  (yah-oo-ee-o),  TheBealm  or  World  of  Piv- 
otal Spiritualities ;  THE  PERSONAL  (Domain) ;  The 
Guild  of  Personages  ;  of  distinguished  or  Represent- 
ative Individuals  ;  of  "  Stars  "  (central  and  radiating 
entities  and  personalities)  ;  "  The  Court "  (of 
Heaven.) 

Wau,io,  (wah-oo-ee-o),  The  World  of  Intercom- 
munications, Intercourse,  Interchanges,  Language, 
Commerce,  etc. ;  of  Conversation,  Association,  So- 
ciety; "The  World." 

182.  The  remainder  of  this  chapter  is  occupied  by 
certain  Special  branches  of  Distribution,  related  to 
what  precedes,  either  as  more  specific,  or  as  otherwise 
elaborative  of  the  same  ideas.  They  are  merely  speci- 
mens of  what  becomes  an  infinite  expansion,  a  limit- 
less ocean,  of  verbal  Forms,  as  the  INHERENT  NATURAL 
NAMLNGS  of  every  possible  variety  of  Human  Thought, 
and  of  External  Being.  These,  in  turn,  force  the 
thought  into  new  channels  of  Discrimination  and 
Analysis  ;  both  tasking  and  culturing  the  intellectual 
powers : 


DOMAINS  IN   -10.  155 

Alio,  (ahl-ee-o),  THE  UNIVERSAL. 


Al,ia,  (ahl-ee-ah),  "QUALITY"— 


'  Au,io,  (ah-oo-ee-o),  "  REALITY  "— Kant 

Laumpshio,  (lah-oompsh-ee-o),    or   Limit- 
oio  "LIMITATION  "—Kant. 


Kant.  Aungio,  (ah-oong-ee-o),  The  Indifference  of 

Being;   "No  Matter;"   "NEGATION"— 
[     Kant. 

(The  Essence  of  The  Keality  is  kw,al-ia,  or  kw,al-iti.) 

Au,io  distributed. 

I,io,  (ee-ee-o),  Domain  of  Entities  (Things.) 

E,io,  (a-ee-o),           "  Relations  ;  Sidings,  Wings. 

.4,io,  (a(ir)-ee-o),    "  Materioidal  Essences,  Etherial  Emanations. 

A,io,  (ah-ee-o),  Material  Realities ;  Gross  Substances. 

£/".io,  (uh-ee-o),        "  Temporalities,  Transitory  Things ;  Sublunary. 

0,io,  (aw-ee-o),  Spiritualities,  Permanencies  (The  Firmament.) 

O,io,  (o-ee-o),  Luminosities,  Ideas,  Theory. 

U,io,  (oo-ee-o),  Turbidities,  Mixed  Movements,  Practicalities. 

Iu,io,  (ee-oo-ee-o),  "  Conjunctures,  Events,  Copulations,  Transits  or  Crossings. 

0i,io,  (aw-ee-ee-o),"  Superincumbencies,  Overshadowings,  Masculisms. 

J.i,io,  (ah-ee-ee-o),  "  Subrecumbencies,  Fundamenta,  Feminisms. 

183.  The  distribution  of  aunio  repeats  the  "  same  ' 
series  in  the  Cardinary  or  Transcendental  sense.    So, 
also : 

Ie,io,  (ee-a-ee-o),  THE  ELEMENTISMXTS.  (82.) 

J.,io,  (a(ir)-ee-o),  THE  NASCENT  STATE,  intermediate  between  Elementism  and 
Elaborated  Composition. 


Au,io,  (ah-oo-ee-o),  THE  ELABOKISMITS,  (82.) 
(From  below  upwards.) 


3.  U,io,  (oo-ee-o),  Indeterminate 
ART. 

2.  O,io,  (o-ee-o),  Indeterminate 
SCIENCE. 

l.A.io,  (ah-ee-o),  Indeterminate 
NAT  ORE. 


Iau,io,  (ee-ah-oo-ee-o),  The  Summation  of  the  Elementismus  with  the  Elaboris- 
mus,  including  the  Nascent  State  as  Intermediate  or  Transitional. 

184.  Or,  re-stated  in  short,  we  have  : 


156  ADJECTIVES  IN   -SO. 


j  lio  —The  Entical  Realm  ;  of  Entities,  Beings,  Things. 
I  Eio  -The  Relative  World  ;  of  Relations,  Laws. 

Aio  — The  Magic  World;  TranamutationaL 

Aio  — THE  EARTH  ;  The  Mundane  World. 

Z7io  — "  Continuity  ;  "  The  Time  World.    (Transitory.) 

Oio  — u  Solidarity  ;  "  The  Space  World,  (Eternal.) 

Oio  —The  Ideal  World ;  Imaginative. 

Uio  —The  Practical  World,  (Mixed,  Turbid.) 

luio  — The  Germinative  World  ;  (Einbryotic.) 

0iio — HEAVEN.    (Space-Centre-World.) 

Aiio  —HELL.    (Earth-Centre-World.) 

Engkauvlio  (eng-kali-oov-lee-o)  distributed. 

Mlauio,  (mlah-oo-ee-o),  GENERALIZATION — nickok. 
Shaubio  (shah-oob-ee-o),  SPECIALIZATION— Hickok. 
Hwauio,  (hwah-oo-eo  o),  PARTICUXARIZATION— Hickok. 

Sliaubio  distributed. 

Shaupio,  (shah-oop-ee-o ;  cf.  Eng.  shape),  THE  ABSTRACT— Spencer. 
Zhaubio,  (zhah-oob-ee-o),  THE  CONCRETE.— Spencer. 

185.  Adjective  Distribution  of  Au,io. 

Iso,  (ee-so),  Absolute;  Ontological;  but  in  the  Auso  sense  (t.  126). 
Eso,  (a-so),  Relative ;  but  within  the  Au,io  (t.  127). 

.Aso,  (a-so),  Etherial,  Thin,  Attenuated;  Spirit-like-Material. 

Aso,  (ah-so),  (Gross-)  Substantial ;  Thick,  Dense ;  Solid-like  Material. 

Vso,  (uh-so),  temporal,  temporary,  transitory,  sublunary. 
0so,  (aw-so),  Spa-ce-al,  eternal,  permanent,  celestial. 

Oso,  (o-so),  Tfieoretical,  aspectual,  clear,  luminous,  full-face. 
Uso,  (oo-so),  Practical,  experiential,  dubious,  turbid,  averted. 

luso,  (ee-oo-so),  Conjunctional,  copulative. 

<9iso,  (aw-ee-so),  mounting ;  covering,  overshadowing ;  male. 
Aiso,  (ah-ee-BO),  substrate,  covered,  occult ;  female. 

Mlauio  distributed. 

Mau,io,  (mah-oo-ee-o),  THE  OBJECTIVE— Kant,  Comte. 
Nau,io,  (nah-oo-ee-o),  THE  SUBJECTIVE-- Kant,  Comte. 


SUBSTANTIVES   IN   -TO.  157 

Aungio,  (ah-oong-ee-o),  The  Intermediate  RATIONAL — Comte,  Catechism,  p. 
1G8.  For  notice  of  the  omission  of  this  mean  term  by  Kant,  see  "  Ves- 
tiges of  Civilization,"  p.  51. 

Aunio,  (ah-oon-ee-o),  THE  INHERENT  ;  Proprium — Swedenborg. 
Aumio,  (ah-oom-ee-o),  TUB  MEDIUM  or  ENVIRONMENT— Comte,  Spencer. 

Lrauio  distributed. 

Lau,io,  (lah-oo-ec-o),  THE  LONG  RUN  ;  ULTERIOR  AND  REACTIONARY  CONSE- 
QUENCE, see  "  Structural  Outline." 

Rau,io.  (rah-oo-ee-o),  THE  SHORT  RUN;  DIRECT  AND  IMMEDIATE  CONSEQUENCE, 
see  "Structural  Outline." 

Mnaungio,  (mnah-oong-ee-o),  TUB  GENERAL  STATIC  ;  The  Statical— Comte. 

Lrauio,  (Irah-oo-ee-o),  THE  GENERAL  MOTIC  ;  "  The  Dynamical,"  as  it  should 
have  been  conceived  by  Comte,  who,  however,  went  over,  here,  to  his 
"  Three  States  "  which  are  eminently  Special,  instead  of  being  General ; 
not,  therefore,  of  the  same  order  as  Mau  and  Nau. 


Shaupio  distributed. 


Kaupio,  (kah-oop-ee-o ;  cf.  Fr.  coiqj-er,  TO  CUT),  THE  CUT  ;  the  Domain  of  Cut- 
up  ;  Outlay,  Outline  ;  Simple  ;  Co-existential. 

Shaufio,  (shah-oof-ee-o  ;  cf.  Eng.  shape ;  Ger.  schaff-en,  TO  CREATE),  THE  MAKE  ; 
the  Domain  of  Fabrication,  Creation,  "  The  Becoming; "  Complex ;  Co- 
sequential. 

Oaubio,  fgah-oob-ee-o ;  cf.  Eng.  gob\  Aggregation,  THE  INORGANIC  WORLD 

.(Gau  "Force,"  jau  "Mixture,"  Ban  " Structure," Vest,  of  Ore.,  p.  162.) 
Zhauvio,  (zhah-oov-ee-o),  THE  ORGANIC  WORLD  ;  (zho  Vegetable,  zo  Animal, 

Vo Mental;  sight,  insight ;—"  Growth,"  "Life,"  "Mind,"  Vest,  of  Cre., 

p.  3620 

186.  Substantive  Distribution  in  -to. 

Ito,  Being,  Thing,  Entity ;  Centre. 

Eto,  Side-wise  Adjunct ;  Wing,  Relation. 

ylto,  a  ghost,  effigy,  attenuated  object. 

Ato.  a  Substancial  Object. 

ZTto,  fluxionoid  object. 

<9to,  a  solid  or  permanent  object. 

Oto,  a  hyaline  or  clear  object ;  an  Idea. 

Uto,  an  opaque  object,  etc. 


CHAPTER  XL 

SPECIAL  AND  TECHNICAL  INSTANCES  OF  THE  COMPOSITION 
OF  ALWASO  WORDS.  ILLUSTRATION  OF  ALWASO  GRAM- 
MATICAL STRUCTURE. 

187.  It  may  be  appropriate  to  give  at  least  a  single 
illustration  of  the  unequaled  Capacities  of  ATwato  to 
serve  as  the  Lingual  Instrument  for  Technical  Ex- 
pression, by  the  amount  and  precision  of  the  Mean- 
ing or  Meanings  which  may  be  compressed  into  the 
single  word. 

188.  Conceive,  in  the  mind,  in  the  first  instance,  a 
Figure  composed  of  Three  Straight  Lines   cutting 
each  other,  centrally  and  at  right  angles  (in  the  diam- 
eters of  the  three  dimensions),  and  this  figure  placed 
(as  to  Posture  or  Position),    so   that  One  of  these 
Lines  (the  dimension  of  thickness)  shall  stand  per- 
pendicularly to  the  earth's  surface.     This   FIGURE- 
AND-PosiTiON  is  one  of  peculiar  value  and  importance 
in  the  study  of  COSMICAL  MORPHOLOGY,  a  New  Branch 
of  Science  growing  out  of   Universology ;  and  is  a 
Figure-and-Position  for  the  simple  naming  of  which 
the  resources  of  our  Old  Style  Languages  are  wholly 
inadequate.     In  "  The  Basic  Outline  of  Universol- 


COSMICAL  MORPHOLOGY.  159 

ogy  '  it  has  been  called  Bi-trinacria,  a  word  which 
denotes,  however,  no  more  (for  the  want  of  a  better 
term)  than  any  object  having  six  (twice  three)  Legs 
or  Arms. 

189.  To  illustrate  more  concretely  this  important 
idea  (of  the  Basic  Bi-trinacria  of  the  Cosmical  Outlay) 
one  may  conceive  of  a  simple  Ordinary  Turn-style 
(having  a  standard-post  with  two   sets  of  arms  at 
right  angles)  ;  but,  to  be  more  definite,  imagine  the 
four  arms  adjusted  to  the  four  cardinal  points  of  the 
compass,   North,    South,   East   and   West,  and    the 
centering  or  standard-post  to  the  Zenith  and  Nadir. 

190.  This  Figure-and-Posture  is  very  fundamental 
or  governing  in  the  Morphic  Distribution  of  the  Earth 
and  Heavens ;  in  the  Plumb-centering,  and  Orientation 
of  the  Great  World-Dome   which  stands  above  us ; 
and   this   again   in   alliance   with  the  Pathagnomic 
Lines   in  the   Structure   of  the   Human   Body   and 
Head ; l  with  the  Heavens  and  Hells  in  the  Spiritual 
Cosmogony  of  Swedenborg  ;  with  Abstract    Ethical 
or   Moral   Conceptions   and   Science    (as   when    we 
speak   of  the    Uprightness  of  a   character),   with  the 
Nature  of   Chemical  Substances  (see  Introduction), 
with  numerous  other  branches  of  Science  and  Phil- 
osophy ;  and,  pre-eminently,  with  the  Analogical  Echo- 
ing of  each  of  these  aspects  of  Being  to  every  other. 

191.  By  reference  to  these  Axial  Lines  of  Cosmical 
Structure,    and  by   the   Analogical  Outworkings   of 


1  "  Outlines  of  Anthropology,"  by  Joseph   R.   Buchanan.     For 
Definitions,  see  Vocabulary,  p.  xi-xi:i. 


160  THE  BI-TRINACRIA. 

Principles  and  Laws  derived  from  and  relating  to 
them,  the  Shapings  of  all  things  in  the  Universe  and 
their  Correlations  in  situ  will  come  to  be  as  well  un- 
derstood scientifically,  in  the  final  Outworkings  of 
Universology,  as  the  parts  and  connections  of  any 
simple  machinery  ;  and  these,  in  turn,  will  become 
the  infallible  Working  Patterns  or  Models  to  guide 
us  in  our  Industrial,  Political,  Societary,  Moral  and 
Religious  Constitutions  and  CONSTRUCTIONS  of  all  sorts. 

192.  The  earliest,  and,  for  a  time,  the  governing  use 
of  Alwato  will  be  to  supply  all  the  old  and  the  new  sci- 
ences (those  begotten  of  Universology)  with  Nomen- 
clatures of  infinite  potency,  minuteness,  and  exten- 
sion ;  to  reconstitute,  in  a  word,  the  entire  Word- 
World  of  Technicality,  in  Science,   and  in  Art,  and 
in  Practical  Life. 

193.  To  revert,  now,  to  the  proper  Alwaso  descrip- 
tion of  the  Figure-and-Posture  in  question  (190),  the 
following  statement  of  the  Yocal  Elements,  and  their 
Meanings,  and  of  the  resulting  technical  Namings 
involved,  will  be  sufficiently  intelligible  : 

E,  relation,  siding. 

k,  cut,  division,  distribution,  limitation. 

w,   doubleness,    counterpositional   equation,    or 

wing-like  expansion. 
a,  the  substance  (or  even  mere  space)  which  is 

cut,  limited  or  described. 
1,  prolongation,  liniar  extension, 
-sta,  a  termination  meaning  System. 

In  combination,  e,kwal,sta,  meaning  Relational  (o) 


E,KWAL;A,KRIN,STA.  161 

Cut,  Division,  or  Distribution  (k),  equally  duplicated 
or  adjusted  in  balance  (w),  of  the  Cosinical  Sub- 
stance or  Expansion  (a),  predated  (1),  in  the  opposite 
directions,  or  as  elongated  arms  (of  the  Bi-trinacria)  ; 
,sta  System  or  Schemative  arrangement.  This  is  a 
sufficiently  accurate  description  of  the  object  or  con- 
ception under  consideration,  in  respect,  only,  however, 
still,  to  CONFIGURATION,  which  is  only  the  Absolute  (or 
iso)  Factor  or  Constituent  of  Form,  (cf.  Eng.  Equal.) 
It  remains  to  describe  the  Posture  or  Position  which 
is  assigned  to  the  Figure  in  question,  (230,  Relative). 

194.  The  composition  of  this  definition  of  posture 
is  the  following : 

K,  cut  or  division  (de-liniation.) 

1,  laxity,  permitting  inclination  or  deviation  from 
standard  Directional  Positions. 

r,  rigor,  resisting  inclination  or  subsidence  from 
the  standard  positions  ;  (cf.  Gr.  JcLin-em,  TO  LEAN  or 
INCLINE,  and  &Rw-ein,  TO  JUDGE  ;  to  exercise  the  func- 
tion of  a  judge ;  that  is  to  say,  to  non-incline — to  the 
right  or  left ;  to  be  impartial ;  to  decide  equitably  ; 
to  hold  the  balance  of  justice.) 

195.  Krin,sta  is,  then,  a  System  or  Constitution  (Lat. 
con,  WITH  amd.  statuo,  TO  SET  UP,  allied  with,  sto,  stare,  TO 
STAND),  a  standing  together  (of,  in  this  case,  Lines  or 
Axes)  in  a  Posture  or  Position  non-inclined  from  the 
Standard  Directions  (Perpendicular  and  Horizontal.) 
The  prefixing  of  a  (ah) — A,krinsta — gives  Substance 
or  Keality ;  whence  it  follows  that  e,kwal;a5krm,sta  is 
the  technicality  sought  for. 

The  scientific  definition  of  this  single  compound 


162  THE   COSMICAL  BI-TRINACPJA. 

0 

word,  ekwalakrinsta,  is,  then,  as  follows  :  The  Con- 
figurative  Cosmical  Bi-trinacria,  posited  ??,o?i-inclinis- 
mally  (or  without  leaning)  in  exact  adjustment  to  the 
Perpendicular  and  the  Horizon  ;  or,  more  fully  :  The 
Universal  Principle  of  Cosmical  Adjustment  eymbol- 
ized  by  a  Figure  composed  of  Three  Axial  Straight 
Lines  crossing  and  cutting  each  other,  Centrally,  at 
Bight  Angles ;  and  erected,  as  to  Position  and  Di- 
rections, upon  one  of  its  Axes  placed  perpendicularly 
to  a  Basis-surface  (as  that  of  the  Earth)  ;  so  as  by 
its  Non-indinism  and  Regulated  Equation,  in  all  Senses 
or  Directions,  to  serve  as  the  General  Measurer  of 
Exactitude  or  Non-deviation  on  the  one  hand,  and 
as  Points  (or  Base-lines)  of  Departure,  on  all  sides, 
from  which  to  determine  the  degree  of  Inclination, 
Deviation  or  Declinature,  of  all- sorts,  on  the  other 
hand.  A  single  word  charged  with  this  amount  of 
meaning,  of  a  new  and  rare  variety,  but  of  intrinsi- 
cally scientific  importance,  for  a  conception,  without 
which  first  fundamentally  posited  in  the  mind,  all 
constructive  thinking  is  necessarily  at  random,  will 
exhibit  the  power  and  necessity  of  the  new  language. 
Ekwalakrinstaso  is  the  Adjective  relating  to  this 
Noun  Substantive  ;  and  ekwalakrinstali  is  the  Corre- 
sponding Adverb. 

196.  The  following  instances  further  illustrate  the 
extreme  exactitude  or  logical  precision  of  which  the 
Structure  of  Words  in  Alwato  is  susceptible  : 

Kauso  means  cutting,  severing,  dividing ;  hence 
part-ing,  dis-partf-ing,  DIFFERENTIATING  ;  and  distrib- 
utes into  kiso,  keso,  kaso,  etc. 


KISO,   KESO;  IKSO,   EKSO.  163 

9 

Aukso  is  the  reversal  of  kauso,  and  means  counter- 
part-ing, CONFEEENTIATING,  re-coaptating,  or  re-com- 
bining of  the  parts  previously  dis-parfed.  It  dis- 
tributes into  ikst>,  ekso,  akso,  etc.  These  special 
roots  are  also  varied  in  respect  to  the  length  of  the 
vowel,  ki  or  ik,  ki  or  ik,  etc. 

Kiso  (indifferent    as  to  the  length  of  the  vowel) 
means  cutting  along  (lengthwise),  as  the  edge  of  a 
knife,  or  as  a  geometrical  line  produced. 
kiso,  the  same  as  kiso,  but  with  prominence  given 
to  the  idea  of  continuity  or  persistency  in  the  action, 
kiso,  the  same  as  kiso,   but  fractionally,  or   the 
action  suddenly  or  shortly  interrupted. 

kin,  (Eng.  keen),  relating  to  the  sharp  edge,  or  to 
that  which  cuts. 

ikso,  counterparting,  at  the  end,  lengthwise,  (cf.  Eng. 
eke,  to  piece  out  at  the  end.) 

ikso,  the  same  protended  or  continued, 
ikso,  the  same,  but  sudden  or  abrupt. 
Keso,  (ka-so)  cleaving  or  separating  sideidse. 
keso,  the  same  plus  idea  of  continuousness. 
keso,  the  same,  but  sudden  or  abrupt, 
ekso,  counterparting,  liniarly,  at  sides,  or  side- 
wise  ;  hence  collateral. 

ekso,  counterparting,  liniarly,  at  sides,  or  side- 
l)ij-side,  and  continuously,  or  in  a  steady,  equal 
manner ;  with  the  relation  prolated  or  "  pro- 
duced ; y'  hence  PARALLEL. 

ekso,  counterparting,  linially,  and  collaterally  (as 
collateral  lines,  or  the  legs  of  a  triangle),  but 
in  an  abrupted  manner,  as,  by  their  converging, 


164      PARALLELISM  AND  RECTANGULAPJTY. 

* 

the  legs  of  a  triangle  intersect  and  limit  each 

other ;  hence  ANGULAR,  (cf.  Ger.  ecke,  AN  ANGLE.) 
ekia,  or  ekizm,  parallelism, 
ekia,  or  ekizm,  angularity, 
ekto,  an  angle, 
ekso,  or  ekioso,  angular, 
twekso,  (t,  at,  w,  wingness;  folded- wing-posture), 

acute-angular. 
pwekso,   (p,  hingeness  with    an    implication  of 

openness,    cf.   Lat.  pandere,   TO   OPEN  ;  Eng. 

open ;  open-wing-posture),  o&£wse-angular. 
kwekso,  (k  equal  cut ;  half-ness  ;  half-expanded- 

wing-posture),  RECTANGULAR  ;  or  rek  meaning 

straight  (r  break,  e  side,  and  k  cut  for  straight 

edge),  rekti,ekso,  or  rekti, ekioso,  rectangular. 
kwekia,  or  rekti, ekia,  or  rekti,ekloia,  rcdangular- 

ity. 
gekioso,  direct-and-reversed  angularity  as  in  the 

checker.. 
thekioso,  decussation- angular  ;  (double  apices.) 

197.  Perhaps  no  severer  test  could  be  applied  to  a 
new  language  claiming  to  be  a  DISCOVERY,  not  an  in- 
vention, than  to  demand  of  it  accurate  terms  signify- 
ing Parallelism  and  RectangiHarity.     These  two  ideas 
are  the  Core  of  Scientific  Exactification.     The  Rectan- 
gular it  y  and  Cubic  Dimensions  of  the  New  Jerusalem, 
seen  prophetically  in   vision  by  John,  the  revelator, 
on  Patrnos   (Revelations,  v.  16,  cli.  xxi.)   has   come 
under  consideration  elsewhere.     (B.  O.  Index.) 

198.  The  ideas  named  by  the  preceding  list  of  words 
are  such  that  each  one  might  bo  delineated  di<i[/i'<(ni- 


THE  ONENESS  OF  ELEMENTS.         165 

matically.  It  is  at  these  Elementary  Fountain-heads 
of  Thought  itself,  that  Language  and  the  Domain  of 
Form  are  demonstrated,  by  Universology,  to  be  in- 
herently related,  and,  as  it  were,  made  identical.  It 
will  be  the  supreme  triumph  of  Scientology,  the  Ex- 
act Branch  of  this  new  Universal  Science,  to  exhibit 
in  Diagram,  and  by  illustrative  object-teaching,  all  the 
Root-thoughts  of  which  the  Human  Mind  is  capable, 
and  of  which  the  Root-words  of  the  newly-discovered 
but  inherently  NATURAL  Universal  Language  (Alwato) 
are  merely  the  intrinsically  appropriate  vocal  expres- 
sions or  Namings.  (69,  73.) 

199.  It  cannot  be  too  emphatically  repeated  that  the 
Elements  of  Sound,  the  Elements  of  Form,  the  Elements 
of  Number,  and  the  Elements  of  whatsoever  other  domain, 
or,  in  a  word,  of  all  Things,  and  of  Thought  itself,  are 
in  dose  relations  ivith  each  other,  and  are,  in  a  word,  so 
identified  by  an  infinite  echo* of  analogy,  that  they  are 
substantially  ONE.  There  is,  therefore,  at  the  bottom 
of  all  Science  an  Alphabet  of  Sound,  an  Alphabet  of 
Form,  an  Alphabet  of  Thought,  and,  so,  an  Alphabet  of 
all  Things ;  and  these  Alphabets,  are,  in  an  important 
sense,  ONE.  They  are,  THE  Alphabet  or  Fountain-head 
of  the  Pure  Abstract  Realm;  THE  ESSENTIAL  or  IN- 
DWELLING- LAW  of  all  Being ;  in  a  ivord,  the  LOGOS 
of  Scripture,  or  GOD  himself,  manifested  through  the 
Universe  of  Existences,  (19.)  The  discovery  and 
revelation  of  this  Divine  "Word"  cannot,  therefore, 
but  be  the  Crisis-event  of  Human  Development;  the 
inception  of  a  brighter  or  more  glorious  phase  of  Human 
Destiny,  the  Advent  of  Order  and  Harmony  in  tJie 


IGG  THE   CRISIS-EVENT. 

regulation  of  Human  Affairs.  At  all  events,  SCIENCE 
takes  a  new  and  more  commanding  relation  to  Gov- 
ernment and  Human  Administration  in  all  tilings 
from  the  time  when  it  is,  itself,  unified  and  centrally 
and  organically  constituted  by  the  discovery  and  demon- 
stration of  UNIVERSAL  SCIENTIFIC  PRINCIPLES.  (19, 115.) 

200.  We  have  hitherto  dealt  with  the  Structure  of 
the  Words  of  Alwato.     It  will  be  well  to  glance,  for 
a  moment,  at  the  principles  of  its  Syntax  or  Gram- 
matical   Structure.       The    Central    Department    of 
Grammar  is  the  Conjugation  of  the  Yerb  ;  and  pre- 
eminently therein  the  Variation  of  the  Tenses — The 
Temporology  of  the  Yerb  ;  and  there  is  nothing  more 
intricate  and  troublesome  than  this  in    the   whole 
composition  of  the  Instinctual,  Chance-begotten,  or 
Old  Style  languages.    It  is  only  necessary  to  refer  to 
the   Greek   Yerb,   with   its   complication  of   Tense- 
forms,  and  its  immense  difficulty  in  this  particular. 
The  Structure  of  Alwato,  in  the  same  respect,  is  the 
perfection  of  simplicity,  conciseness,  and  precision, 
and  is  dictated  by  that  Law  of  Nature,  scientifically 
evolved,  which  is  applicable  to  the  subject,  as  follows  : 

201.  The  vowel  sound  a  (ah)  is  the  Pivotal  Yowel- 
Sound   at   the   Back-Mouth ;    the   o    at   the   Front- 
Mouth,  and  the  i  (-ee)  at  the  Middle-Mouth,  or  Mean 
position.     I>rtc/£-ward  position  corresponds  with  Pa*t 
Time,  as  the  Past  is  behind  us  ;  Front-ynml  position 
corresponds  with  the  Future,  as  the  Future  is  before 
us  ;  and  Mufinn/  position,  bvlin-'.  n  the  other  two,  cor- 
responds with  Pi't'Ht'iit  Time,  or  the  Now. 

202.  In  accordance  with  these  simple  facts  -a  (-ah) 


ALWASO  VERB   ENDINGS.  167 

as  a  Verb-ending  denotes  Past  Time  (or  action),  -o  the 
Future,  and  i  (-ee)  the  Present.  In  other  words,  i  (ee), 
a  (ah),  o,  are  the  terminations  of  all  verbs,  for  signify- 
ing the  Present,  the  Past,  and  the  Future  Tenses,  re- 
spectively— as  the  Three  Basis  Tenses  of  tl^e  Yerb. 
A  repetition  of  these  Yowels  distributes  the  Tenses 
into  a  Relative  Past,  Present,  and  Future  (called  Per- 
fect, Imperfect,  etc.)  The  vowel  -u  (-66)  is  the  ending 
for  the  Imperative  Mood  (third  Person) ;  otherwise  the 
Root-word  serves  for  the  Imperative  ;  -u  also  denotes 
the  Subjunctive  Mode,  and  receives  the  Pivotal  Vow- 
els added  for  its  Tenses  ;  and  -i,e  (ee-a)  denotes  the 
Conditional  or  Optative — an  assumed  state  (-e)  of  be- 
ing present  (-i),  the  e  serving  for  resultant  state — see 
the  Participles.  The  ending  -ya  denotes  the  Infinitive. 
203.  The  Personal  Pronoun  I  is,  in  Alwato,  yo,  or  io, 
as  in  Spanish  and  Italian  (y,  radiating  centricity,  i,  cen- 
tral being,  and  o,  presence.)  For  a  verb-stem  we  may 
assume  the  English  word  speak,  merely  changing  the 
spelling  of  it  to  spik,  for  while  a  word  wrought 
out  from  Alwaso  Elements  to  mean  the  same  might 
serve,  it  is  equally  permissible  to  naturalize  adopted 
citizens,  in  the  New  Word-Republic,  from  any  of  the 
existing  languages,  only  requiring  of  them  to  con- 
form, in  decency  of  appearance  (their  orthographic 
dress),  and  in  their  relations  with  the  natives  (their 
prepositions,  verb-endings,  etc.),  to  the  constitution 
and  laws  of  the  New  Domain.  These  two  words,  to- 
gether with  the  Verb-endings  shown  in  the  last  pre- 
ceding paragraph,  suffice,  to  exhibit  substantially  the 
whole  Conjugation  of  the  Verb,  as  follows  : 


168 


CONJUGATION   OF   THE   ALWASO   VERB. 


TABLE    No.    7. 


Present. 
Yo  splki,  I  speak, 


Past. 
Yo  eplka,  I  spoke, 


Future. 
Yo  splko,  I  shall  or  will 


INDICATIVE   MODE. 

yo  spiki.i,  I  am  speaking, 

(Imperfect.) 
yo  spiki,a,  Ihave  spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo  splki, o,  lam  about  to  speak, 
(Prospective.) 


f  yo  eplka,i,  I  was  speaking, 
(Imperfect.) 
yo  spika,a,  (or  sp~ik(a)ha,  or  Jca),  I  had  spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo  spika,o,  I  should  speak,  (1  said  that  .  .  .  ) 
(Prospective.) 

f  yo  splko,i,  I  shall  be  speaking, 

(Imperfect.) 
yo  eplko,a,  I  shall  have  spoken, 

(Perfect.) 

yo  sp!ko,o  (or  spikwo)  I  shall  be  about  to  speak, 
(Prospective.) 


IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

Spik,  speak,  (thou,  or  you.) 

Spiku  (pr.  speek-00),  or  ke  ro  eplkfi,  let  him  speak. 


OPTATIVE   OB   CONDITIONAL  MODE. 

Yo  spiki,e,  (pr.  speek-ee-a),  da,  I  should  or  ivould  speak,  if  .  .  . 

Yo  splki,c.ia,  (pr.  ppeek-ee-a-ee-ah),  /  should  or  would  have  spoken,  (if) 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MODE. 

ke  yo  splku,i,  (pr.  epeek-oo-ee),    .  .  .  that  I  may  or  should  speak. 
ke  yo  splku,ia,  (or  splkuya),  .  .  .  that  I  may  or  should  have  spoken. 

ke  yo  gpiku,a,  .  .  .  that  1  might  or  should  speak. 

ke  yo  eplku.a,a,  (or  ka),  .  .  .  that  I  might  or  should  hare  spoken. 


INFINITIVE  MODE. 

Spikya,  (sj)Tkiyu  or  splkoya),  to  speak. 
Splkuya,  to  have 


ALWASO   PRONOUNS.  169 


PARTICIPLES. 

1.  Active. 
Present.       Splkin  (or  -ing),  speaking. 

Perfect  or  (  Splkian  or  }  j,arsn~  ^okm 
Past.      \     Splkan     f  ' 

Future.        SpikOn,  being  about  to  speak. 

2.  Passive. 

Present.  Spikint,  (being  now)  spoken,  (d  for  t  adds  the  idea  of  necessity  —  spiMnd. 


Future.        Splkont  (or  d)  what  will  (or  must)  be  (being)  spoken. 

Special  Adjectivoid  Passive  Past  Participles—  Permanent  States. 
Spik,et  (or  -ed,  contract  for  -enta.  -enda)  Spoken  ;  cf.  Eng.  and  Ger.  Regular. 

f  Spikt  (spik(e)t,  cf.  Eng.    Contracted  forms  ;  d  after  Concretes, 
Contracted  -j     Liquids  and  Vowels. 

lSplk,e,  cf.  Fr.  prevalent  forms  iu  -e,  -£e,  -es,  -ees. 

Reflective  or  Middle. 
Spikinc(tsh),  speaking  itself. 
Spikiane,  or  Splkan9,  having  spoking  itself. 
Spikonc,  about  to  speak  itself. 

204.  The  additional  termination  -ta  converts  the 
preceding  Active  into  the  Passive  Voice  Tense-Forms  ; 
thus,  Alwato  splkita,  splkata,  splkota,  Aiwa  to  is 
spoken,  was  spoken,  will  be  spoken,  etc.  ;  and  -ga  gives 
the  Reflective  or  Middle  sense  ;  splldca  (pr.  speek- 
ee-tshah),  speaks  itself.  See  Conspectus  (of  the  Pro- 
nouns) below.1 

TABLE    No.   8. 

THE  ORDINARY  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 
1st  Person.  2d  Person.  3d  Person. 


NOM. 

OBJEC. 

NOM. 

OBJEC. 

NOM.               OBJEC. 

Mas. 

To,  I; 

mo,  me  ; 

vo,  thou; 

zo,  thee  ; 

ro,  7<e  ;       lo,  him. 

Fern. 

ya,  I; 

ma.  me  ; 

va,  Z7i#«  / 

za,  #/i^e  / 

ra,  ^A^  ;      la,  her. 

Mac 

yi,  we  ; 

mi.  us  ; 

vi.  j'ow  / 

zi,  you  ; 

ri,  ^iey/     li,  them. 

Fern. 

ye,  we  ; 

me,  us; 

ve,  yow  ,' 

ze,  you  ; 

re,  ^ey  ;    le,  them. 

TiKlif-  j 

yu,  /, 

mu,  me, 

vu,  thou, 

zu,  ^/iee, 

ru,  Ae,        In,  her,  him 

ferent-l 

or  we. 

or  ws. 

or  ?/ow. 

or  you. 

she  or  they,     ortha/t. 

Notice  the  Confused  Irregularity  of  the  English  Pronouns. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

FINAL  KESUME  OF  THE   SUBJECT. 

205.  A  final  word  must  be  said,  here,  in  respect  to 
the  Alwaso  namings  of  Naturology,  Scientology,  and 
Artology,  respectively,  which  narnings  furnish  the 
proper  beginning-point  for  all  subsequent  distribu- 
tions ;  and  the  several  senses  in  which  these  terms 
may  be  taken  must  be  pointed  out  and  carefully  dis- 
tinguished by  appropriate  special  sets  of  Alwaso 
terms.  The  Indeterminate,  Unlimited,  or  Infinite  As- 
pect of  Universal  Being,  represented  by  the  Vowel- 
Sounds,  is  first  in  order,  and  has  its  own  Naturisni, 
Scientism  and  Artism.  Some  re-statement  will  be 
necessary.  The  Central  (Middle-mouth),  most  con- 
densed, and,  consequently,  slenderest  of  the  Vowels, 
i  (ee)  signifies  Thing,  Entity,  Being.  The  ending  -ski 
(skee)  means  Science.  Iski  is  therefore  Ontology  (Gr. 
onta,  THINGS,  BEINGS,  from  ei-mi,  TO  BE,  and  Lnrfos), 
the  Science  of  Thing  in  se — or  abstracted  to  the 
uttermost,  or,  so  far  as  may  be,  from  those  Relations 
or  Condilittn1*  in  which  Things  are  always  <ic/nu1h/ 
found.  Ordinary  Ontology  is  still,  however,  not  the 
Science  of  R.ilimat  Pure  Being  (J"io,  149,  15S), 


PHILOSOPHOID  NATUROLOGY,  ETC.        I'll 

but  of  Actual  or  Sensible  Thing,  considered  apart 
from  Kelations.  The  ending  -io  (-ee-o)  means  a 
Domain  or  Realm,  and  -ia  (-ee-ah)  a  Principle. 
I,io  is  the  Thing-Domain,  and  i,ia  the  Thing-Prin- 
ciple, otherwise  called  Entity  (Lat.  ens,  BEING  or 
THING).  Finally  i,ia,io  (ee-ee-ah-ce-o)  is  The  Eealm  or 
Domain  in  which  i,ia  (ee-ee-ah)  or  the  Thing-Principle 
especially  exists,  presides  or  predominates  ;  and  this 
is  peculiarly  real  (Lat.  res,  THING  ;  realis,  REAL)  ;  and, 
hence,  in  this  high  Indeterminate  Elemental  sense 
i,ia,io  is  Nature,  the  Actual  or  Real  World  (of  Con- 
fluent, Undifferentiated  Substance) ;  and  i,ia,ioski  is 
Naturology,  in  this  attenuated  elementary  sense ; 
i,io,io  is,  then,  the  Corresponding  Scientismus,  or 
Differentiation  into  Domains;  etc.  But,  contrasted 
with  eski  (a-skee),  which  follows,  (206)  the  whole  of 
iski  (ee-skee,  205)  is  Naturology. 

206.  The  next  slenderest  (protensively)  and  most 
central  vowel,  but  more  thinned  or  flattened  (than  i) 
sidewise  (?oferally,  or  re-?a£-ively),  is  e,  (pronounced 
like  the  English  name  of  a.)  This  vowel,  e,  signifies 
^Relation  (the  betweenity  of  Things.)  Relation  general- 
ized or  drawn  out,  or  elongated  or — in  the  phrase  of 
the  geometer  pro-duced, — is  Laiv,  which  is,  therefore, 
denoted  by  e,  (the  same  vowel-sound  as  e,  but  pro- 
lat-ed.  or  bearing  the  kw^r-mark,  expressed  or  under- 
stood.) Eski  (a-skee)  is,  therefore,  Nornology,  or  the 
Science  of  abstract  and  necessary  Laws  existing  in  the 
Constitution  of  Things,  (Gr.  nomos,  LAW  ;  and  logos.) 
E,io  is  the  Law-Domain  or  Law-dom,  and  e,ia  is  the 
Law-Principle;  that  of  certainty,  regulation,permamncy  ; 


172  SCIENTOID   NATUROLOGY,   ETC. 

the  understanding  and  systematization  of  wliich  is, 
again,  the  very  essence  of  Science.  Finally,  there- 
fore, e,ia,io  (a-ee-ah-ee-o)  is  the  Eealm  or  Domain  in 
which  Law,  or  Certainty  and  Kegularity  prevails — re- 
flecting upon  and  governing  Thing  or  Things — Science 
governing  or  presiding  over  Nature.  This  is  peculiarly 
un-real,  or  abstract.  In  another  high  Indeterminate 
Elemental  Sense  e,ia,io  is,  therefore,  Science  (as  pure 
Logic,  or  the  Kealin  of  Laws) ;  and  e,ia,ioski  is 
Scientology. 

207. 1  and  e  are  the  Elementary  (central  and  slender) 
Yowels.  The  Kemaining  Vowel-Sounds  are  Elabo- 
rate (circumferential,  bulky,  weighty).  Again,  there- 
fore, in  the  more  Elaborate  and  usual  Aspect  of  this 
Philosophical  View  of  Being,  (denoted  by  the  Vow- 
els), it  has  been  shown  already  that  ASKI  is  NATU- 
ROLOGY, OSKI,  SCIENTOLOGY,  and  USKI,  ARTOLOGY,  (57- 
59,  130-131.)  All  of  this  Elaborismus  is  contrasted 
with  the  Elementisrnus  represented  by  i  and  e  (130.) 

208.  Still,  however,  all  the  preceding  distributions, 
inasmuch  as  they  rest  wholly  in  the  Vowels,  are  Phil- 
osophical rather  than  Scientific ;  and  are  quite  vague. 
The  Scientific  namings  are  NA,ski  (Naturski  or  Natura- 
ski)  for  NATUROLOGY  ;  SKi,ski  for  SCIENTOLOGY,  and  AR- 
ski  for  ARTOLOGY.  Observe,  however,  also,  that  Maski 
(prefixing  in  for  macro-,  or  exo-)  signifies  Exo-Naturol- 
ogy,  including  the  whole  bulk  of  the  Existing  Sciences, 
as  sporadically  developed  ;  and  Naski  (prefixing  n  for 
micro-,  orendo-)  signifies  Endo-Naturoloey.  theNatu- 

O  Ov*     ' 

rology  especially  developed  from  Uuiversology  and 
presided  over  internally  and  centrally  by  the  Sciento- 
logical  Principle  and  Idea.  (75.) 


GENERALIZED  NATUROLOGY,  ETC.        173 

209.  But,  again,  Nature,  Science,  and  Art,  general- 
ized to  that  final  extent  that  they  are  inclusive  and 
combinative  of  both  the  PHILOSOPHICAL  and  the  SCIENTIFIC 
Aspects  of  Being  demand  still  other  varieties  of  nam- 
ings.  Indeed,  the  Philosophical  Mode  of  this  Distribu- 
tion (208)  itself,  (that-of-Universal-Being  into-Nature, 
Science-and-Art),  is  Naturismal,  the  Scientific  Mode 
of   the   same    (208),   is  Scientisrnal ;    and  the   final 
Mode,  remaining  to  be  specified  (210,  211),  is  Artis- 
mal,  and  Culminative. 

210.  In  this  ulterior  and  inclusive  aspect  of  the  Dis- 
tribution in  question,  Au,ski  (the  Vowel-Domain  = Phil- 
osophy) is  NATUROLOGY  ;  Engkauvlski  (or  Limitosld, 
the  Consonant-Domain,   127)   is   SCIENTOLOGY,    and 
Alski  (Universology  itself),  as  including,  combining, 
and   reconciling   Nature  and   Science  in  the  Grand 
Artismus  or  Completed  Structure  of  Being,  is  ARTOL- 
OGY  ;  but  it  is  Hwaullski,  the  Science  of  the  Yital  and 
Attenuated  Domain  intervening  between  the  Vowels 
and  the  Consonants  (124,  158),  which  is  Artology  in 
the  /Special  Sense  of  THE  FINE  ARTS. 

211.  Al  (ahl)  is  a  word  which  is  constituted  by  the 
combination  of  the  leading  Yowel  a,  (ah),  and  the  ul- 
timate Consonant  (in  the  return-career   from  Con- 
sonantism  to  Vowelism),  the   1 ;  and   as  this  word 
means  the  Unbroken  Whole,  so   Ar   (ahr)   denotes 
the   brokenness    of    the    same    into     Specialty,    or 
Parts.     These  Motic  Liquids  (1,  r),  likewise  put  the 
otherwise  Static  Universe  into  Movement,  or,  as  it 
were,  into  an  Orbital  Career.     The  following  table 
exhibits  those  namings  of  Nature,  Science,  and  Arc, 


174  NATUEASKI ;   SI,ENSKI  ;   ARTOSKI. 

which  take  into  account  this  now  feature,  that  of 
Movement.  (Read  from  below  upwards).  The  order 
is  here  reversed)  as  that  of  Actual  Discovery  is  so  from 
Nature,  and  begins  with  Art  as  Speciality  thence 
rising  to  Nature  as  the  Grand  Whole  : 

TABLE    No.  9. 

3.  ALSKI,  NATUROLOGY,  as  Universology,  or  the  Science  of  Nature  in  the 

Grand  or  Universal  Sense. 

•  2.  Alrski ;  A  Priori  Order  ;  from  the  Universal 
to  the  Particular,  or  from  Whole  to  Parts ; 
(tfitiaski.) 

2.  SKISKI,  SCIENTOLOGY.)   i.  AKLSKI;  A  Posteriori  Order;  from  Particulars 

to  Univcr^als,  from  Parts  to  Wholes,  from 
Causes  to  Effects ;    (Aitiaski ;  cf.  Gr.   aitia, 

CAUSE.) 

1.  ARSKI,  ARTOLOGY  (cf.  Fr.  Art,  pronounced  ahr,  Specialite— Balzac.) 

212.  Finally,  as  the  Condensed  Extract,  and  Gen- 
erally Representative  Trigade  Series  of  terms  for  NA- 
TURE, SCIENCE  and  ART  ;  the  following  Darnings  will 
most  frequently  and  generically  occur. 

TABLE    No.  10. 

3.  ARSKI  or  AKTOSKI — ARTOLOGY. 

2.  SKISKI— SCIENTOLOGY. 

1.  MNASKI,  NASKI,  NATURSKI  or  NATUKASKI — NA- 

TUROLOGY. 

213.  Or,  in  fine,  as  follows  : 

TABLE    No.   11. 

3.  AKTOSKI— ARTOLOGY. 

2.  SKISKI  for  SI,ENSKI)— SCIENTOLOGY. 

1.  NATUEASKI  (Nah-toor-a-skee)— NATUROLOQY. 


UNISMI;   DUISMi;   SESQUISM1,   ETC.  175 

214.  The  au,io  (Homogenismus,  126)  of  Speech,  or 
of  the  Universe,  or  of  whatsoever  Domain  is  the  fun- 
damental Unismus  of  that  Domain ;  the  cnkauvlio  (He- 
terogenismus,  127)  is  the  corresponding  Duismus  ;  and 
the  alio,  (Totismus,  211),  is  the  corresponding  Trinis- 
mus  (6.)     The  Vowels  are,  therefore,  the  Unismus  of 
Oral  Speech  (not  now  including  Music) ;  the  Conso- 
nants, the  Duismus ;  and  The  Syllable,  and  all  the  Ela- 
borate Structure  which  grows  out  of  it,  the  Trinismus. 
The  Yowel-and-Consonant  Domain   is   Elementary. 
At  the  Center  of  this  Elementismus  of  Speech,  be- 
tween the  Yowels  and  Consonants,  are  the  Ambigu's 
(Hwaunio,  129, 158,  210),  the  Pneumatismus  of  Speech, 
the  Analogue  of  Viscerism  and  Vital  Spiritual  Exist- 
ence, universally ;  technically  Sesquism  (Lat.  sesqui, 
ONE-AND-A-HALF.)     Ti,ia  (tee-ee-ah),  ki,ia  (kee-ee-ah), 
and  pi,ia  (pee-ee-ah)  are  The  Abstract  Limitological 
Aspects  of  Unism,  Dtiism,  and  Trinism.     Un,ia  (oon- 
ee-ah),  Du,ia,  (doo-ee-ah)  and  Tre,ia  (tra-ee-ah)  are 
the  more  generalized  aspects  of  the  same. 

215.  Before  concluding  this  little  treatise,  let  us  re- 
turn, for  a  moment,  from  the  special  consideration  of 
Alwato,  as  an  Epitome  of  the  Universe,  to  that  of  the 
Universe  itself ;  and  of  some  few  of  the  other  and 
correlated  branches  of  the  Grand  Whole.     It  is  only, 

in  a  sense,  accidental,  that  we  have  been  mainlv  oc- 

«.< 

cupied,  while  introducing  the  investigation  of  Uni- 
versal Science,  with  Language,  and  especially  with 
the  Elementary  or  Alphabetic  aspect  of  this  par- 
ticular subject ;  but,  oo  the  other  hand,  there  was,  as 
previously  shown  (63,  71,  80,  81),  a  sufficient  deter- 


176  ALL  DOMAINS  MODELIC. 

• 

mining  reason,  for  the  choice  of  this  special  current 
of  investigation  in  a  certain  centricity  of  position 
which  is  held  by  this  rational  core  of  Speech  or  Ut- 
terance (64,  67),  as,  representatively,  the  Logos  or 
god-Principle  of  all  Being  (199,  216.) 

216.  But  apart  from  this  consideration  of  a  certain 
Pivotal  or  God-like  Supremacy  in  the  Loyos  or  Rational 
fundamentum  of  the  Speech-Domain,  there  is,  intrin- 
sically, no  reason  why  we  might  not  as  well  have 
sought  for  and  illustrated  the  same  GOVERNING  PRIN- 
CIPLES OF  UNIVERSAL  BEING  in  the  Elernentisrnus  of 
any,  and,  so,  in  turn,  of  every  other  Domain  ;  for,  by 
virtue  of  their  being  Universal,  they  occur  equally 
in  every  Realm  ;  but,  most  specifically,  in  that  which 
is  most  Elementary  in  every  Realm  of  MATTER,  MIND, 
and  MOVEMENT,  in  the  Universe  at  large,  or  within 
and  throughout  the  Absolute  Totality  of  Being :  So 
that,  had  we  commenced  our  investigation,  instead 
of  choosing  the  Domain  of  Language,  in  that  of 
Number,  we  should  have  been  dealing  mainly  with 
Zero  and  the  Units ;  with  Units,  Duads  and  Triads 
(Ones,  Twos,  and  Threes)  ;  and  with  the  Numerical 
Series,  as  Cardinal  and  Ordinal ;  Integral  and  Frac- 
tional ;  and  Odd  and  Even  ; — which  are  the  Elements 
of  that  Sphere- of  Being  ;  or,  in  fine,  with  Numbers  as 
The  Absolute  (iso),  and  with  +  ,  •-,  and  ==,  as  The 
Relative  (eso)  Elementism  of  Numerical  Science  ; — all 
of  these  as  Analogues  of  Silence  and  Speech-Utter- 
ance ;  of  Vowels,  Consonants,  and  Syllabic  Elabora- 
tions ;  of  Lingual  Developments  expansively  in  Space 
and  historically  in  Time ;  of  Metropolitan  Integra- 


LANGUAGE,   NUMBER,   FORM,   ETC.  177 

tions  and  Provincial  Fractionalities  or  Divergencies  ; 
of  Monologue  and  Dialogue  ;  and,  finally,  of  Prosaic 
Absolutism,  or  Free  Utterance  (iso)  and  of  Poetic  and 
Musical  Measured  Harmony,  or-  Verbal  Relativity, 

(650,  .) 

217.  Or,  had  we  commenced  in  Morphology  (the 
Realm  of  Form,  Geometrical),  we  should  have  been  en- 
gaged in  dealing  mainly  with  another  set  of  Analogues, 
echoing  to  the  two  sets  just  noticed ;  with  Blank 
Space  and  the  Inscribed  Points,  Lines,  and  Surfaces ; 
with  Point,  Line,  and  Surface ;  with  Side-wise-ness 
and  Length-wise-ness ;  with  Uniformity  (Integral)  and 
Pluriformity  (Fractional) ;  with  Unequal  and  Equal,  or 
Equaled,  Shapes  ;  and  with  Figure  as  the  Absolutism 
(i,ia),  and  Posture  or  Direction  as  the  Relatism  (e,m) 
of  Form.  In  Mechanics,  we  should  have  dealt  with 
Pull  and  Push  and  Reciprocating  Action  (Unismal, 
Duismal,  and  Trinismal)  ;  in  Astronomy  with  Centri- 
petal, Centrifugal  and  Orbital  Forces  and  Move- 
ments ;  in  Optics  (representative  of  Physics),  with 
Incidence,  Reflection  and  Vision  ;  in  Chemistry  with 
Synstasis  (Primary  Agglomeration),  Analysis,  and 
Synthesis ;  in  Biology  with  Feminine,  Masculine  and 
Copulative  Phenomena  ;  in  Sociology  (and  pivotally 
in  the  Science  of  Government)  with  1.  CONVERGENT 
INDIVIDUALITY  (Social  Unity  or  Mutuality  represented 
in  some  Pivotal  Personage) ;  2.  DIVERGENT  INDIVIDU- 
ALITY (Democracy,  "  The  Sovereignty  of  the  Indivi- 
dual") ;  and  3.  Social  Reconciliation  (Pantar chatty,  of 
those  two  Opposite  Principles),  the  Trinisrn,  from  the 
two  former  as  Unisin  and  Duism  ;  in  Morals  with 


178  THE  PIVOTAL  IDEAS   HE-STATED. 

1.  INCLINATION,  The  Absolute  or  Individual  Will,  2. 
RECTITUDE,  the  Eelational  Equity,  and  3.  "  GRACE  " 
or  Gracefulness,  from  the  True  Compromise  and  Har- 
monic Reconciliation  of  the  other  two ;  in  Theology 
with  Fetishism,  Polytheism,  and  Monotheism ;  or  in 
another  Sense,  with  Unitarianism,  Trinitarianism,  and 
the  Scientific  Reconciliation  of  these  two,  etc. 

218.  In  conclusion  ;  UNIVEESOLOGY  is  the  Cen- 
tering and  the  All-inclusive  One  Grand  SCIENCE, 
unifying  and  interpreting  and  expanding  all  the 
known  Sub-Sciences,  and  developing  a  crowd  of  New 
and  hitherto  Unthought-of  Sciences ;  and  recon- 
structing Education.  INTEGRALISM  is  the  New 
and  Final  PHILOSOPHY  ;  the  All-sided  and  Complete 
Reconciliation  of  all  possible  Sectarian  Divisions  in 
All  Spheres ;  not  as  extinguishing  Individual  differ- 
ences, but  as  softening,  co-ordinating,  and  utilizing 
them ;  and,  finally,  PANTARCHISM  is  designed  to  be 
the  Ulterior  Planetary  and  Scientific  OKGANIZATION  and 
ADMINISTRATION  of  all  Human  Affairs,  protecting  and 
subserving  the  utmost  practicable  range  of  INDIVIDUAL 
FBEEDOM,  in  the  bosom  of  a  PRESIDING  ORGANIC  UNITY  ; 
— the  harmonicallv  constituted  POLITY  or  ACTIVITY  of 

«• 

Humanity,  centered  by  RELIGION,  as  the  Irradiating 
Spirit  of  the  Whole.  United,  they  may  be  conceived  of 
as  the  Inauguration  of  the  Millennium,  through  Intel- 
lectual Discovery  and  Science  reconciled  witli  Inspira- 
tion and  All  the  Experiences  of  the  Past.  Such  is  the 
Nature  and  Spirit  of  the  Programme,  to  which  the 
World  is  now  invited  ; — Affectional  Enthusiasm  and  a 
New  Religious  Fervor,  based  on  Intellectual  Gratifica- 


THE   CONCLUSION.  179 

fcion  and  Triumph,  demanding  as  their  completion 
the  Sanctified  and  Consecrated  Best  Exertions,  in 
the  Future,  and  from  this  hour,  of  every  Individual 
Member  of  Society,  in  behalf  of  the  Universal  Good 
of  our  Col  ective  Humanity. 

219.  And,  again,  in  conclusion  of  this  special  icork ; 
Universology,  as  such,  is  a  Determinate  Science,  as 
much  so  as  Geometry  or  Chemistry,  and  is  not  to  be 
classed  with  any  speculative  theory  or  so-called  Sys- 
tem of  Philosophy  whatsoever;  but  it  is,  at  the 
same  time,  a  METHOD,  still  more  distinctively  than 
a  SCIENCE  ;  and,  as  a  Method,  it  is  characterized, 
1.  By  a  Primitive  Radical  Analysis  of  the  Elements  of 
All  Things ;  that  is  to  say,  by  the  Analysis  of  the 
Elements  of  each  particular  Sphere  or  Domain  of 
Being  or  Things;  2.  By  the  discovery  of  the  exist- 
ence of  Universal  Echo,  Analogy,  or  He/lection,  as  be- 
tween  the  Elements  of  each  .Domain,  and  those  of  every 
other  Domain;  or  of  UNIVEKSAL  ANALOGY  in  Elements  ; 
and,  3.  By  the  demonstration,  thence,  of  Parallel  Series 
of  Evolution,  from  Analogic  Elements,  in  all  Spheres  • 
and  so,  of  Universal  Analogy,  ALSO  in  ELABORATION 
or  RESULTS  ;  both  in  respect  to  WHAT  is,  in  Nature,  and 

to  WHAT  REMAINS  TO   BE  ACCOMPLISHED  BY   MAN.       (193.) 

The  student-reader  is  reminded  that  this  work  is  only 

t/ 

the  glimpse  of  an  outline  of  an  immense  fabric.  He 
may  see,  as  the  child  sees,  at  first,  only  a  blurred  im- 
age of  the  New  World  which  it  opens ;  it  is,  never- 
theless, a  Neiv  World  of  Ideas,  and  it  will  clear  to  his 
vision  as  he  advances. 


180  APPENDIX   A. 

APPENDIX    A. 

HYBRIDITY,  AND  THE  "  MECHANICS  OF  LITERATURE." 

220.  In  the  matter  of  style  and  the  Mechanics  of 
Literature  it  is  impossible  to  please  all  critics.     The 
term  Universologj  is  open  to  objection  as  a  literary 
Hybrid  ;  it  has  great  popular  advantage,  however, 
over  any  term  of  purely   Greek  extraction,    which 
would  suggest  no  idea  to  the  common  apprehension. 
The  whole  subject  and  others  similar  have  been  con- 
sidered and  discussed  in  "  The  Basic  Outline  "  (B.  O. 
c.  1-9,  t.  3)  ;  it  is  also  alluded  to  further  on  in  the 
work — Appendix  D,  t.  246,  p.  295. 

221.  At  the  point  cited  in  The  Basic  Outline,  the  prin- 
ciples and  policy  of  the  liberal  use  of  Capitals,  Ital- 
ics, etc.,  as  appliances  for  emphasis  and  distinction, 
which  I  have  adopted  in  this,  and  shall  continue  in 
my  subsequent  scientific  works,  have  been  explained 
somewhat  in   detail.     One   additional  consideration 
may  be  stated  here.     It  is  my  desire  and  intention 
to  introduce  a  system  of  Scientific  Headings,  for  the 

•/  O 

more  rapid  promulgation  of  these  new  scientific 
views ;  and,  where  ideas  are  both  weighty  and  new, 
a  judicious  rendering  of  them  for  the  ears  of  others 
requires  a  deliberate  and  special  management  of  the 
voice,  with  appropriate  pauses,  and  a  considerable 
variety  of  emphasis,  changing  with  the  degree  of 
importance  which  attaches  to  each  word  or  phrase. 
The  exceptional  system  of  Punctuation  and  Literary 
Dress  which  characterizes  this  and  the  accompanying 
work,  is  intended  to  aid  tho  reader  in  this  respect ; 


TOWEL-SOUNDS   AND  THE  AFFECTIONS.  181 

and,   in   a   sense,   to   teach   a  special  habit  of  reading 
adapted  to  this  style  of  subject. 

222.  I  have  also  adopt. 'd  the  habit  (liable  to  some 
criticism)  of  signing  my  initials  to  Notes  and  fugitive 
documents,  whether  they  accompany  my  more  formal 
labors  or  not,  especially  where  the  subject  requires 
that  I  fall  down  to  the  familiar  style  which  author- 
izes the  use  of  the  pronoun  I.     It  is  not  altogether 
the  usage,  but  it  suits  best  my  idea  of  the  con£clen- 
tial  relation  which  I  hope  to  establish  with  the  Stu- 
dents of  Universology.  S.   P.  A. 

APPENDIX    B. 

SWEDEKBOKG  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  THE  TOWELS. 

223.  The  Homogenisnius  of  Mind.is  Affection,  as  its 
Heterogenismus  or  Limitary  Aspect  (Form-like)  is 
Intellect,    Intelligence,    or    The    Knowing    Faculty 
(Ideation.)      The    Vowel-sounds    (homogeneous    in 
character)  echo,  therefore,  to,  or  correspond  with,  or 
are  the  analogues  of,  the  Affedionality  of  the  Mind,  (as 
the  consonants  are  related  to  the  Thought-Element.) 
Music,   which   is   the   Language   of    the   Affections, 
modulates  mainly  in  the  Yowels,   and   Thought  or 
Cogitation   prefers   the    Consonants.     It   is  vaguely 
recognized   among   musicians   that     each   Key   and 
Note  of  music  tends  to  awaken  a  different  and  spe- 
cific kind  of  emotion  ;   Helmholtz  has  proven  that 
the  Varieties  of  Vowel-Sound   (in  Oral  Speech)  rest 
on  a  Musical  Basis.  We  are  on  the  verge  of  a  demon- 
stration,  therefore,  from  purely  empirical  and  me- 
chanical considerations,  of  the  fundamental  idea  of 


182  "SPEECH  OF  THE  ANGELS." 

• 

Alwato ;  wliicli  Universology  demonstrates  in  its  own 
way.  Intuitions  of  these  occult  facts  of  science  are 
not  wanting  in  the  writings  of  certain  inspirational 
thinkers ;  and  notably  with  Swedenborg ;  even  to  a 
dogmatic  affirmation  of  the  Meanings  of  the  different 
Vowels,  as  shown  in  the  following  extracts  : 

224.  ["  Of  THE  ANGELIC  LANGUAGE]  ;  E  [a]  and  i 
[ee]    properly   belong  to   the  Spiritual  Affections," 
Doctrine  concerning  the  Sobered  Scripture  (90) ;  Heaven 
and  *HeU  (241.)      That  is  to  say  i  and  e,   Middle- 
Mouth  and  Slender- Vowel-Sounds,  being  Elementary 
(130) — and    the   Vowels    meaning   Affections — these 
two  Sounds,  the  most  meagre  or  skeleton-like  of  the 
Vowel-Sounds,  and  very  like  Consonants,  mean  Affec- 
tions for  Abstractions  and  Limit-like  Tenuities,  or  Subtle 
Entities,  and,  hence,  they  are  u  Spiritual "  or  Belated 
to  Intelligence  (Definition)  which  is  the  characteristic 
of  Swedenborg's  "  Spiritual  "  Sphere. 

225.  "  The  Speech  of  the  Heavenly  (or  Celestial) 
Angels  [above  the  "  Spiritual  "  Angels]  sounds  much 
from  the  vowels  o  and  u  [oo.]    From  the  expressions 
in  The  Word,  in  the  Hebrew  language,   it  may  in 
some  measure  be  known  whether  they  belong  to  the 
Heavenly  class  or  the  Spiritual  class,  thus  whether 
they  involve   Good  or  Truths;  those  which  involve 
Good  partake  much  of  u  [oo]  and  o,  and  also  some- 
iliiiiff  of  A  [ah]  ;  but  those  which  involve  Truth  [In- 
tellectual, Spiritual]    partake   of  E    [a]    and   I    [ee.] 
Because  Affections  manifest  themselves  chiefly   by 
Sounds — [Clangs — Helmholtz],  therefore,  also,  when 
great  subjects  are  treated  of,  as  heaven   and  God, 
those  words  are  preferred  in  human  discourse  which 


THE  GOOD,  THE  TRUE,  AND  THE  BEAUTIFUL.   183 

contain  the  vowels  u  [oo]  and  o ;  musical  sounds  also 
have  an  elevation  to  the  same  vowels,  when  similar 
things  are  expressed ;  it  is  otherwise  when  the  sub- 
jects treated  of  are  not  of  importance ;  hence  it  is 
that  the  art  of  music  is  able  to  express  various  kinds 
of  Affection."  Heaven  and  Hell  (241.) 

226.  The  meaning  of  these  mystic  utterances,  trans- 
lated by  the  light  of  Universology  and  Alwato,  is  this  : 
The  Back-Mouth  (Basis)  vowel-sound  A  (ah)  is  The 
Analogue  of  NATURE,  of  Substance,  Eiches,  Goods,  GOOD 
(151),  in  the  Lower,  unspiritualized,  or  Natural  Sense 
of  Good ;  it  characterizes,  therefore,  the  Speech  of 
Swedenborg's  angels  who  inhabit  the  "Natural 
Heaven  '  beneath  the  "  Spiritual '  and  the  "  Celes- 
tial." The  I  (ee)  and  E  (a)  are  intermediate  between 
this  and  the  o  and  u  (oo),  which  last  pertain  to  the 
Elaborate  or  Artistic,  the  region  of  the  Hlilier  or  Ul- 

O  U 

terior  Good  subsequent  to  Spiritualization,  and  are 
made  at  the  lips — the  top  of  the  mouth ;  hence  i  (ee) 
and  e  (a)  are  Transitional,  Evanescent,  "  Spiritual;" 
while,  finally,  o  (clear,  presentative,  SCIENTIC)  and  u 
(oo)  (retiring,  shaded,  modified,  modulated,  ARTISTIC) 
are  conjointly  "  Celestial,"  Elaborate,  Perfect,  Com- 
plete. A  (ah)  is  also  Elaborate  as  contrasted  with  I 
and  E — elementary.  This  adaptation  of  the  Elaborate 
Vowels  A  (ah),  o,  u  (oo)  to  loftiness  of  the  affections 
or  feelings,  as,  in  part,  shown  by  Swedenborg,  is  well 
illustrated  in  the  pompous  character  of  the  Spanish 
language  where  these  three  vowrels  abound.  When 
Language  shall  be  printed  phonetically,  The  Natural 
and  Ethnical  Phrenology  (or  the  Mental  Constituency 
of  the  different  Peoples  of  the  Earth)  may  be  rneas- 


184  MUSICAL   RECONSTRUCTION, 

ured  with  more  accuracy  than  Callipers  and  Cranios- 
copy  can  apply  to  the  heads  of  Individuals ;  by  the 
simple  means  of  weighing  Hie  types  employed  in  printing 
the  different  languages,  observing  the  predominance 
of  the  different  sounds,  and  apportioning  the  types, 
— and  a  new  branch  of  science  will  thus  be  born.     The 
same  tendency  to  prefer  different  Sounds  and  Classes 
of  Sounds,  or  the  words  which  contain  them,  will  cause 
a  modified  idiomatism  to  prevail  even  in  the -body  of 
Alwato,    characterizing    different   nationalities    and 
classes  of  Society,   down  to  the  "  Individual  Equa- 
tion"— but  without  disturbing  the  general  unity  of  a 
language  which  is  rallied  by  a  constant  appeal  to  its 
scientific  bases. 

227.  I  shah1  take  pains  elsewhere  to  do  justice  to 
the  original  and  profound  instinctual  and  poetical 
feeling  of  Benjamin  Blood  for  the  inherent  mean- 
ing of  Sounds,  as  related  to  Poetry.  When  Oral 
Sounds,  Inherent  Meaning,  and  Musical  Experience, 
are  finally  adjusted  to  each  other  (as  they  will  read- 
ily be)  in  the  Sublime  Musical  Compositions  of  the 
Future,  Music  will  have  experienced  the  influence  of 
Universological  discovery,  and  will  be  radically  re- 
generated. S.  P.  A. 

APPENDIX    C. 

228.  Mr.  Dana,  of  "  The  Sun,"  (newspaper)  recently 
requested  of  me,  for  his  paper,  a  statement  in  brief  of 
my  "  whole  idea,"  measuring  off  on  his  finger  (in  tlio 
true  spirit  of  modern  journalism)  the  space  in  tin 


UNIVERSOLOGY,   INTEGSALIS^I,    TANTAECHY.  185 

column  which  could  be  assigned  to  me.  The  follow- 
ing attempt  at  the  condensation  of  a  whole  scheme 
of  philosophical  thinking  into  a  paragraph  was  the 
result ;  as  introduced  and  published  in  "  The  Sun  "  of 
December  11,  1870.  S.  P.  A. 


UNIVERSOLOGY,   INTEGRALISM,   PANTARCHY. 

229.  We  are  informed  that  the  claim  of  Mr.  STEPHEN 
PEAKL  ANDREWS  to  the  discovery  of  a  new  science  of 
unparalleled  extent  and  importance,  which  he  de- 
nominates Universology,  is  receiving  privately  the  at- 
tention of  influential  parties  in  this  city,  among  the 
men  of  culture,  general  science  and  wealth.     Private 
meetings   are  held,  and  explanations   made   of   the 
subject.     AYe  have  procured  for  the  benefit  of  our 
readers  the  following  statement  of  the  leading  points 
of  the  claim  : 

WHAT  UNIVERSOLOGY  IS. 

230.  As  a  science,  in  the  exact  or  rigorous  sense  of 
the  term,  the  discovery  is  named  Universology. 

INTEGRALISM. 

231.  As  a  Philosophy  of  Reconciliation  among  all 
the  Sects  and  Parties  of  Mankind,  upon  the  basis  of 
the  Scientific  Principles  revealed  by  Universology,  it 
is  called  Integralism,  which  is  defined  to  mean  AU- 
sidedness. 

A   UNIVERSAL   GOVERNMENT. 

232.  As  a  presiding  practical  organization  over  all 
human  affairs,  to  culminate  in  the  institution  of  a 


188  MATHEMATICAL  BASES. 

Single  or  Universal  Government  for  the  planet,  to 
which  all  the  existing  governments  shall  become  sub- 
ordinate as  branches — this  Governmental  Institute 
to  be  based,  in  turn,  upon  the  Science  and  the  Phil- 
osophy— it  is  called  Pantarchy,  from  two  Greek 
words  which  mean  universal  government.  By  Gov- 
ernment is  not,  however,  here  meant  government  in 
the  ordinary  sense,  but  a  Rational-Spiritual  Govern- 
ment, or  an  Organized  Practical  Influence  of  the 
Thinking  and  Aspirational  Leaders  of  Humanity 
and  their  coadjutors ;  to  intervene,  systematically, 
for  the  promotion  of  the  highest  principles  of  states- 
manship and  social  culture  ;  and  to  serve  as  Umpire 
between  the  special  governments  and  the  nations. 

ITS   BASIS  IS   MATHEMATICAL. 

233.  This  new  system  of  thought,  which  divides  into 
these  three  branches  (Science,  Philosophy,  and  Polity 
or  Practical  Life),  and  which  is  best  described,  generi- 
cally,  by  its  philosophical  title,  Integralism,  is  mftthe- 
vidfical  in  its  foundations ;  is,  in  a  word,  the  re-dis- 
covery and  the  expansion,  in  the  modern  scientific 
spirit,  of  the  half-completed  mathematical  doctrine 
and  discoveries  of  Pythagoras,  the  old  Greek  phil- 
osopher. It  claims  to  be  more  abstractly  and  meta- 
physically profound  than  Kant  or  Hegel  ;  more 
analytically  and  specifically  positive  than  Conite,  as 
preparatory  to  a  larger,  more  scientific,  and  more 
powerful  synthesis  of  ideas,  and  of  Societ}T,  than  that 
which  he  has  proposed ;  more  varied  and  magnificent 
iu  its  outlook  for  the  future  of  humanity  than  the 


THE  FUTURE  VERNACULAR  OF  MAN.       187 

semi-scientific  dream  of  Fourier ;  more  accurately 
correspondential  than  Swedenborg ;  more  exhaust- 
ively and  minutely  a  Philosophy  of  the  Sciences  than 
Spencer;  more  beneficently  regulative  of  human  ad- 
ministration than  all  the  merely  experiential  govern- 
ments, and  more  truly  religious  than  the  church ;  in 
a  word,  to  be  Whole  or  Integral ;  and  all  this,  not  as 
any  miracle,  but  as  the  simple  and  natural  result 
of  recurring  for  First  Principles  to  Mathematical  (the 
only  certain)  Origins,  carrying  back  all  possible  con- 
ceptions to  this  primitive  source,  and  deriving  thence, 
by  a  simple  and  infallible  deduction,  the  Unitary  Laws 
which  permeate  and  regulate  all  the  sciences. 

WHAT  ARE  ITS   FIRST  PRINCIPLES? 

234.  These  First  Principles — after  Positive  and 
Negative  Polarity,  derived  from  Unity  (distributed  into 
the  positive  numbers)  and  Zero — are  UNISM,  DUISM, 
and  TRINISM,  by  which  is  meant,  1.  The  spirit  of  the 
number  One  (primitive  synthesis  or  integration,  more 
properly  synstasis)  ;  2.  The  spirit  of  the  number 
Two,  (analysis,  differentiation,  variety) ;  and,  3.  The 
spirit  of  the  number  Three  (ultimate  or  teleological 
synthesis  or  integration,  the  true  synthesis).  All  the 
primary  mathematical  notions,  as  of  Number,  Form 
and  Mechanical  Action,  are  found  in  a  similar  manner 
to  furnish  the  elementary  principles  and  illustrations 
of,  and  so  positively  to  teach  All  Scientific  Laws,  Clas- 
sification, and  Doctrine,  throughout  the  sciences,  up 
to  Sociology,  Morals,  and  Theology.  The  Ordinal 
Series  of  Numbers  furnishes,  for  example,  the  typo 


188  FIRST  PRINCIPLES. 

of  Ordinary  affairs,  and  so  of  Temporalities,  related 
to  Time  (Latin  temp .•••*);  and  the  Cardinal  Series,  tliat 
of  Cardinary,  or  Transcendental  Affairs,  and  so  of 
Spiritualities,  or  the  Fixed  Axes  and  Spheral  Exten- 
sions of  the  Circumambient  Heavens,  related  to  Space. 

THE   NEW   UNIVERSAL  LANGUAGE. 

235.  Mr.  ANDREWS  also  discovers  that  all  the  artic- 
ulate sounds  of  the  human  voice,  vowel  and  consonant- 
sounds,  are  inherently  laden,  by  Nature  herself,  with 
distinctive  and  representative  meanings,  the  same,  by 
an  echo  of  analogy,  which  are  signified  by  the  math- 
ematical origins  of  thought  just  alluded  to ;  whence 
it  follows  that  words  compounded  of  these  Sounds, 
so  first  rightly  understood  in  respect  to  their  natural 
Meanings,     denote    precisely    and    technically    the 
Things  and  Ideas  compounded,  in  a  parallel  manner, 
from   their  Mathematical  Elements ;  so  that  nature 
has,  herself,  as  absolutely  provided,  as  she  has  pro- 
vided music,  an  exhaustless  system  of  the  true  Techni- 
calities of  all  the  sciences.    Mr.  Andrews  is  therefore 
engaged  upon  the  foundations  of  a  New  Scientific  Lan- 
guage, the  future  vernacular  of  the  planet,  which  he 
calls  Alwato.     This  new  lano;aa^e  will  be  derived  in 

o        o 

part  from  the  exact  scientific  bases  above  indicated, 
in  which  sense  it  will  furnish  self-defining  words  by 
the  million,  and,  in  part,  from  the  harmonious  inter- 
blending  of  the  materials  of  existing  languages. 

APPENDIX    D. 

236.  This  remaining  Appendix  contains  the  An- 
nouncement of  The  Basic  Outline  of  Universology, 
referred  to  in  the  Preface. 


CIRCULAR.} 

In  Press,  the  exceedingly  important  Scientific  and  Philosophic  Work,  the  title-page 
and  description  of  which  are  as  follows : — 

THE    BASIC    OUTLINE 

OP 

UNIVERSOLOGY; 

AN  INTRODUCTION  TO   THE  NEWLY-DISCOVERED  SCIENCE 
OF   THE    UNIVERSE;  ITS   ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES; 
AND  THE   PRIMARY  STAGES  OF  THEIR  DEVEL- 
OPMENT IN  THE  SPECIAL  SCIENCES; 

TOGETHER  WITH  PRELIMINARY  NOTICES  OF 

AJLWA.TO, 

THE  NEWLY-DISCOVERED  SCIENTIFIC  UNIVERSAL  LANGUAGE, 
RESULTING    FEOM    THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    UNPvERSOLOGY. 

BY 

STEPHEN  PEAEL  ANDREWS, 

MEMBER  OF  THE   AMERICAN   ACADEMY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES;  OF  THK  AMF.KIOAN 

ETHNOLOGICAL  8OCIKTY,  ETC. 

AUTHOR  OF  "THE  SCIENCE  OF  SOCIETY,"  " DISCOVERIES  IN  CHINESE,"  ETC. 


O  0ebs  del  yew/xerpet— God  perpetually  geometrizes. — PLATO. 


REVELATION  THROUGH  SCIENCE;  PHILOSOPHY  OF  INTEGRALISM; 
ADVENT  OF  THE  HARMONY  OF  IDEAS. 


WITH  EIGHTY  ILLUSTRATIVE  DIAGRAMS. 

NEW  YOKK : 
DION  THOMAS,   142  NASSAU   STEEET. 

1870. 


190  PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR. 

STATEMENT  BY  THE  AUTHOR, 

237.  I  am  requested  by  iny  publisher  to  give  some 
condensed  account  of  "  The  Basic  Outline  of  Univer- 
sology."  It  is  difficult  to  do  this,  in  any  small 
compass,  more  explicitly  than  is  done  in  the  title- 
page.  The  work  is  the  result  of  a  life-time  of  labor 
devoted  to  the  exhaustive  study  of  all  the  great  sub- 
jects of  human  thought,  and  especially  of  those 
which  agitate  the  present  age,  culminating  in  specific 
discoveries  which  it  is  believed  will  greatly  enlarge 
the  scope  of  the  Sciences  and  hasten  the  already 
rapid  progress  of  humanity.  The  work  contains  no 
less  than  five  distinct  Introductions  from  the  able 
pens  of  as  many  learned  gentlemen  whom  the  devel- 
opment of  the  new  science  has  gathered  around  me 
for  some  years  past  as  students,  and,  to  some  ex- 
tent, as  collaborators.  A  preliminary  exposition  was 
given  by  me  some  months  since  before  the  Polytech- 
nic branch  of  the  American  Institute.  This  elicited 
various  notices  from  the  metropolitan  press,  which 
were  appreciative  and  flattering.  I  prefer,  to  any- 
thing which  I  might  add,  to  supplement  this  state- 
ment by  extracts  from  these  two  sources — the  several 
Introductions  to  the  work,  and  the  notices  of  the  press. 
238.  The  publication  of  a  work  definitely  establishing 
the  Unity  of  the  Sciences,  if  it  be  really  such,  must, 
from  the  highest  point  of  view,  be  regarded  as  the 
most  marked  event  of  the  age.  Humanity  take*  a  •m-tv 
departure  from  the  time  when  there  is  a  Clearly  Recognised 
Harmon  if  in  all  our  Inf<-U<--f>-<il  C'omr/;.'A>  ts. 

December,  18GS.  STEPHEN   PEARL   ANDREWS. 


FROM    THE    INTRODUCTIONS 

TO  THB 

BASIC  OUTLINE  OF  UNIVERSOLOGY. 


1.  By  Prof.  M.  A.  CLANCY  : 

239.  "  Universology  is  a  Science  which  —  owing  to 
its  peculiar  character,  the  extent  of  its  subject-matter, 
the  intricacy  and  complexity  of  its  applications,  and 
the  importance  of  its  influence  upon  the  interests  of 
Humanity  —  is  beset,  in  the  labor  of  making  it  under- 
stood and  appreciated,  with  difficulties  commensurate 
with  its  vastness.  If  the  discovery  of  an  isolated 
fact  or  principle  be  not  easy  of  exposition  and  com- 
prehension, the  difficulty  in  the  case  of  Universology 
is  enhanced  by  so  much  as  the  whole  is  greater  than 
a  part.  The  problem  is  the  more  severe  owing  in 
part  to  the  fact  that  the  extreme  simplicity  of  the  fun- 
damental aspect  of  the  discovery  is  such  that  it  is 
exceedingly  difficult  first  to  apprehend  it,  and  then 
to  express  it  in  intelligible  language  ;  and  in  part  to 
the  novelty  of  view  which  the  student  is  called  upon 
to  take  of  facts  and  phenomena  with  which  he  is  al- 
ready to  a  considerable  degree  familiar  ....  This 
discovery  has,  therefore,  a  twofold  character.  It  is 
not  only  a  Science  vast  as  the  Universe  in  its  scope,  but  a 
Method  of  Scientific  Procedure  capable  of  application  to 
every  domain  of  Thought  and  Being,  in  the  new  in- 
vestigations which  will  ever  be  demanded  in  exploring 
new  special  departments  of  Being  ....  It  is  proper 
to  notice  here  one  of  the  more  immediate  and  iin- 


192  PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR. 

portant  results  of  the  application  of  the  Science — 
namely,  the  discovery  of  a  Scientifically  constructed 
Universal  Language.  The  necessity  for  such  a  lan- 
guage, as  one  of  the  exigencies  of  the  Science,  is 
patent,  as,  without  a  Universal  Language,  Universal 
Science  would  be  destitute  of  its  proper  adequate 
Terminology." 

2.  By  Kev.  EDWARD  B.  FREELAND  : 

240.  "Looking  at  Universology  from  the  same  point 
of  view  in  which  this  celebrated  Naturalist  (Agassiz) 
regards  Classification,  we  may  announce  it  as  the 
complete  discovery  and  perfect  interpretation  of  l  the 
Deity  in  creation,'  and  the  entire  unfolding  of  'the 
creative  plan  of  God,'  not  only  as  expressed  in  '  or- 
ganic  forms,'  but   as  involved"  in  every  Sphere  of 
Thought  and  Being  in  the  Universe  of  Matter  and 
of  Mind." 

3.  By  DAVID  HOYLE  : 

241.  "  With  the  Evolution  of  this  Science  is  inaugu- 
rated, if  I  mistake  not,  a  new  era  in  the  history  of  the 
world,  and  one  transcending,  in  the  importance  of  its 
results,   any  by    which  it  has    been   preceded.      It 
possesses  potency  sufficient,  under  enlightened  direc- 
tion, peacefully  and  beneficently  to  revolutionize  the 
world  in  all  its  domains,   whether  Ideal,  Physical, 
Social,  Moral,  Political,  or  Religious ;  and  the  results 
of  its  application,  in  the  solution  of  Problems  within 
these  departments  of  Being,  will  exceed  those  here- 
tofore attained  by  blind  efforts  merely,  in  proportion 
to   the   power    of    ;icliievement   which   methods    of 


PUBLISHER'S  CIRCFIAR.  193 

Scientific  Exactitude  possess  over  tlie  incertitude  and 
failure  of  perpetual  guessing  and  believing.  It  is, 
in  fine,  the  Sublime  Expounder  of  the  Universe  of 
God ;  and  the  means  of  the  eventual  introduction  of 
the  Race  to  a  Paradisic  Existence  whose  pleasures 
will  transcend  the  highest  imaginings  of  so-called 
Utopian  dreamers." 

4.  By  J.  WEST  NEVLNS. 

242.  "A  Universal  Philosophy,  and  its  absolute  ap- 
plication in  a  Positive  Science,  whose  demonstrations 
shall  be  beyond  the  reach  of  question,  must  be  the 
preliminary  theoretical  step,  [to  the  practical  regen- 
eration of  the  race.]  The  tools  must  first  be  fur- 
nished with  which  the  work  is  to  be  done.  Such  is 
Universology,  the  Science  of  the  Whole  Universe,  or 
the  Positive  and  Rational  Revelation  of  the  Organic 
Laws  of  Thought  and  Being  by  means  of  their  Cor- 
respondences, or  of  the  Grand  Pervading  Analogies 
between  them." 

5.  By  Prof.  A.  F.  BOYLE  : 

243.  "  I  feel  as  if  the  world  wants  it  at  just  this  nick 
of  time,  and  that  it  will,  in  the  end,  prove  to  be  just 
the  book  that  should  have  been  written,  even  if  it 
have,  for  the  first  year  or  two,  only  a  dozen  readers 
who  fully  appreciate  it." 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PRESS. 

"A   NEW    SCIENCE." 

244.  "  On  Thursday  evening,  before  the  Polytechnic 
Branch  of  the  American  Institute  (Cooper  Institute 
Building),  a  lecture,  every  way  remarkable,  was  de- 


194  PUBLISHERS   CIRCULAR. 

livered  by  Stephen  Pearl  Andrews.  It  purported  to 
be  upon  the  Unity  of  the  Sciences,  but  it  was,  in  fact, 
the  first  public  announcement  and  exposition  before 
the  scientific  world  of  the  nature  of  what  Mr.  An- 
drews claims  to  be  a  new  science,  the  most  important 
of  the  sciences,  and  a  science  inclusive  of  and  under- 
lying all  the  other  sciences.  From  time  to  time, 
during  the  last  five  or  ten  years,  the  public  have 
been  made  aware,  through  partial  announcements  or 
intimations,  that  Mr.  Andrews  was  devoting  himself 
to  an  unusual  series  of  scientific  and  philosophic  in- 
vestigations which  looked  to  the  discovery  of  some 
recondite  ground  of  unity  between  all  the  sciences. 
A  series  of  articles  by  him  and  by  his  coadjutor, 
Edward  B.  Freeland,  published  in  The  Continental 
Monthly,  three  or  four  years  ago,  upon  branches  of 
the  subject,  attracted  considerable  attention.  The 
New  Science,  or  that  which  is  claimed  to  be  such,  is 
denominated  UNIVERSOLOGY.  One  of  the  branches 
of  the  discovery  is  said  to  be  the  basis  of  a  new 
Scientific  Universal  Language,  which,  it  is  supposed, 
will  be  ultimately  the  vernacular  of  the  world.  The 
lecture,  or  entertainment,  of  last  evening  consisted 
mainly  of  readings  from  the  Introduction  to  the 
Fundamental  Exposition  of  the  New  Science,  which, 
we  understand,  is  now  in  type,  and  will  be  forthcom- 
ing at  an  early  day,  as  a  bulky  volume  filled  with 
diagrams  and  demonstrations.  The  introduction  is 
in  turn  made  up  of  a  series  of  papers  or  special  in- 
troductions by  five  or  six  other  writers  than  Mr. 
Andrews,  who  have  studied,  and  more  or  less  tlior- 


PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR.  105 

oughly  mastered  the  new  science,  and  who  belong,  it 
is  said,  to  an  incipient  University  which  the  new 
scientific  discovery  has  already  been  the  means  of 
organizing.  The  claim  is  certainly  sufficiently  ex- 
traordinary to  excite  general  attention,  and  the  wri- 
ters in  question,  it  must  be  confessed,  give  the  im- 
pression of  being  men  who  understand  themselves 
and  their  subject ;  but  a  mere  introductory  statement 
is  necessarily  general,  and  for  that  reason,  in  a  sense, 
vague.  The  exact  nature  and  scientific  validity  of 
this  supposed  discovery  of  universal  scientific  prin- 
ciples could  only  be  judged  of  after  the  most  thor- 
ough opportunity  should  have  been  granted  to  make 
the  exhibit,  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  American 
Institute  which  has  been  established  to  render  pre- 
cisely this  kind  of  service  to  the  community,  will  not 
fail  to  get  to  the  bottom  of  this  extraordinary  claim." 
—From  the  N.  T.  Tribune  (April  3,  1868). 


245.  "  A  paper  was  then  read  by  Mr.  Stephen  Pearl 
Andrews,  upon  a  new  science,  under  the  name  of 
UNIVERSOLOGY,  which  had  received  his  attention,  with 
that  of  others,  for  the  past  five  years.  The  gentle- 
man first  spoke  of  the  embarrassment  he  felt  regard- 
ing the  proper  method  of  presenting  his  subject,  as  a 
generalization  would  perhaps  only  expose  him  to  the 
charge  of  entertaining  speculative  opinions ;  while, 
on  the  other  hand,  he  could  not  be  expected  to  gire 
an  exposition  of  the  science  in  the  space  of  one 
evening,  as  the  claims  of  Universology  were  of  un- 
paralleled extent  and  importance.  He  stated  that 


196  PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR. 

there  was  a  work  upon  the  subject  in  type,  which 
would  comprise  some  900  pages,  explanatory  of  the 
science ;  he  should  therefore  simply  rely  for  first  im- 
pressions upon  statements  contributed  to  this  book 
by  those  who  have  had  opportunity  to  know  of  the 
nature  of  the  science,  in  preference  to  his  own  affir- 
mation of  its  value.  The  immensity  of  the  field,  the 
necessity  for  lucidity,  and  the  novel  character  of  the 
scope  of  investigation,  together  with  many  other 
things,  made  the  problem  of  presentation  one  of  ex- 
treme difficulty.  The  speaker  then  remarked  that  it 
is  obvious,  on  reflection,  that  there  must  be  a  science 
of  the  universe  as  such,  distinguished  from  the  spe- 
cial sciences  of  the  parts,  or  of  the  spheres,  or  do- 
mains of  the  universe  ;  and  yet  the  very  idea  is  one 
which  is  hardly  entertained  with  any  clearness  of 
conception  in  the  scientific  world. 

246.  "All  Pldlosopluj  has,  indeed,  aimed,  in  a  sense, 
at  this  result,  but  the  methods  of  Speculative  Philos- 
ophy are  too  vague  to  satisfy  the  demands  of  the 
Scientific  World,  and  in  the  sense  of  a  Science  ^prop- 
erly so  called  the  idea  of  anything  Universal  has  been 
almost  entirely  wanting.  The  Scientific  men  are 
Specialists.  Their  labors  are  as  if  a  colony  of  learned 
ants  were  to  have  undertaken  the  investigation  of 
the  Human  Body.  One  section  of  the  little  Com- 
munity devotes  itself  to  the  exhaustive  examination 
of  a  finger  nail,  another  to  that  of  a  lobe  of  the  ear, 
another  to  that  of  the  hair  of  the  beard,  and  others 
to  the  investigation  of  all  the  various  parts  and  or- 
gans and  systems  segregated  and  mjardcd  sinyly  ;  but 


PUBLISHERS   CIRCULAR.  197 

they  have  been  so  busy  in  these  special  and  minute 
examinations,  that  it  has  never  occurred  to  any  one 
of  them  to  guess  even,  or,  in  any  event,  to  give  due 
consideration  to  the  fact,  that  all  of  these  various 
subjects  are  the  parts  and  constituents  of  'a  Man ; 
a  ad  that,  therefore,  the  first  thing  to  know,  logically 
speaking,  in  order  to  know  anything  rightly,  of  these 
particular  subjects,  is  the  General  Design  and  the 
Exact  Outlay  of  the  Man  himself."  (B.  O.  Introduc- 
tion.)— From  the  Hird:iy  Journal 


UNIYERSOLOG-Y,  ALWATO. 

247.  "  Last  evening,  before  the  Polytechnic  branch 
of  the  American  Institute,  Stephen  Pearl  Andrews  oc- 
cupied the  evening  in  making  an  extended  prelimi- 
nary statement  of  what  is  claimed  to  be  a  new  sci- 
ence, which  he  denominates  Universology,  and  one 
of  the  results  of  which  is  to  be  a  new  scientific 
universal  language,  to  be  called  Alwato.  Sufficient 
enthusiasm  was  excited  to  draw  from  the  learned 
body,  contrary,  we  believe,  to  their  usage,  a  vote  of 
thanks  in  behalf  of  Mr.  Andrews  for  the  able  papers 
read  by  him.  This  was  not,  we  understand,  to  be 
considered  as  an  approval  of  the  extraordinary 
claims  of  that  gentleman,  but  as  a  recognition  of  the 
able  manner  in  which  he  had  stated  the  claims  and 
made  his  introductory  exposition.  We  have  several 
years  since  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  Mr. 
Andrews  was  engaged  upon  inquiries  of  this  sort. 
With  the  appearance  of  this  book,  now  going  through 


198  PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR. 

the  press,  the  public  will  have  the  opportunity  to 
judge  of  their  value. 

248.  "  The  term  Universology  is  liable  to  objection 
among  the  learned,  on  the  ground  of  its  hybridity, 
but  no  'more  so  than  sociology,  which  has  now  be- 
come current.  The  objection  has,  we  understand, 
been  well  considered  by  Mr.  Andrews,  and  he  prefers 
to  incur  it  rather  than  to  adopt  a  more  classical  but 

• 

less  popularly  intelligible  name.  The  name  bestowed 
on  the  new  language,  wrought  out  from  the  language 
itself  by  its  own  laws,  is  Alwato,  pronounced  Ahl- 
wah-to.  The  public  will  await  with  interest  the 
further  development  of  these  important  statements 
and  claims." — From  the  Evening  Post. 


249.  "  NEW  YORK  POLYTECHNIC. — Last  evening  the 
usual  routine  of  proceedings  at  the  weekly  meetings  of 
this  useful  institution  were  varied  by  the  introduction 
of  a  subject,  which  may  prove  to  be  something  of 
real  importance.  Stephen  Pearl  Andrews  made  be- 
fore this  body  the  first  formal  announcement  of  the 
discovery  of  a  new  science.  He  read,  from  the  in- 
troduction to  a  forthcoming  work,  an  elaborate  state- 
ment of  the  domain  and  nature  of  the  science  in 
question ;  and  notwithstanding  the  novelty  and 
strangeness  of  the  claim  he  presents,  it  would  hardly 
be  possible  that  a  deeper  impression  should  have 
been  made  by  the  exposition  of  a  single  evening.  It 
is  true,  the  principles  of  the  science  itself  were  not 
reached  ;  but  a  very  clear  case  was  made  out  to  the 


PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR.  199 

extent  that  there  is  room  in  the  nature  of  things  for 
precisely  such  a  science  as  it  is  claimed  is  now  dis- 
covered, and  that  there  ought  to  be,  if  there  is  not, 
precisely  such  a  discovery.  The  new  science,  so 
claimed  to  be,  is  denominated  '  Universology,'  and  is 
said  to  have  the  same  relation  to  the  universe,  as  a 
whole,  as  that  which  any  special  science  now  holds, 
or  has  held,  to  its  own  special  domain.  The  lecturer 
goes  so  far  as  to  propose  the  introduction  of  a  scien- 
tifically constructed  universal  language  with  a  uni- 
versal alphabet." — From  the  Sun. 


250.  "A  NEW  SCIENCE. — A  lecture  was  delivered  last 
evening  before  the  members  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, by  STEPHEN  PEARL  ANDREWS,  on  "  The  Unity  of 
the  Sciences."  The  speaker  claimed  to  have  dis- 
covered an  entirely  new  science,  as  exact  and  pro- 
found as  logic  or  mathematics,  and  even  more  far- 
reaching  and  inclusive  than  either  of  them,  or  than 
any  other  science.  He  endeavored  to  show  that 
there  is,  in  fact,  only  one  science,  of  the  principles 
of  which  all  the  special  sciences  are  merely  particular 
modifications  or  instances.  Mr.  ANDREWS  affirms  that 
heretofore  there  has  not  been  a  single  universal  prin- 
ciple known  in  positive  science,  and  that  conse- 
quently science  is  yet  in  the  chaotic  or  fragmentary 
stage  of  its  development.  The  new  science  is  to 
supply  this  defect,  and  to  base  all  the  known  sci- 
ences, and,  indeed,  all  possible  sciences,  upon  an 
a  priori  knowledge  of  exact  scientific  laws  of  uni- 


200  PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR. 

versal  application,  whether  in  the  department  of 
matter  or  that  of  mind.  Upon  this  new  science  he 
bestows  the  name  of  '  Universology,'  or  the  Science 
of  the  Universe.  As  a  branch  of  it  he  also  an- 
nounces the  discovery,  and,  to  a  great  extent,  the 
elaboration,  of  a  new  scientific  universal  language. 
Mr.  ANDREWS'  audience  appeared  to  be  deeply  inter- 
ested in  his  theories." — From  fhe  N.  Y.  Times. 


SUBSCRIPTION    SHEET 

FOB 

THE  BASIC  OUTLINE  OF  UNiVERSOLOGY, 

ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    WORK. 

I.  The  Text;  II.  The  Commentary  ;  III.  The  An- 
notation. The  text  is  the  basis  of  the  other  two. 
The  Commentary  consists  of  such  additional  original 
matter  as  has  been  prepared  in  direct  connection 
with  the  text,  for  its  greater  elucidation  or  on  minor 
particulars.  The  Annotation  includes  extracts  from 
other  authors,  and  from  Mr.  Andrews'  previous 
manuscripts,  upon  points  related  in  some  measure  to 
the  subject  treated  of  in  the  Text  or  the  Commen- 
tary. IY.  A  Vocabulary  or  Glossary  is  prefixed,  con- 
taining definitions  of  all  philosophic  and  other  un- 
usual terms.  V.  A  digested  Index  to  the  entire 
work,  of  nearly  100  pages.  The  whole  will  be  coin- 
prised  in  900  pp.  8vo,  containing  eighty  illustrative 
diagrams. 

The  author  says  in  conclusion  : 


PUBLISHER'S  CIRCULAR.  201 

"  I  have  thus  laboriously  brought  to  a  conclusion  that  Prelimi- 
nary Treatment  of  Universal  Doctrine  upon  which  I  have  thought 
it  fitting  to  bestow  the  name  of  '  Basic  Outline  of  Universology.' 
.  .  .  .  Whether  this  Treatise  shall  meet  at  once  with  the  wel- 
come reception  and  grateful  appreciation  of  many  minds — the  an- 
ticipation of  which  has  served  to  brighten  my  solitary  path  in  the 
deep  recesses  of  abstract  contemplation  for  thirty  years — the  event 
alone  can  determine The  Signs  of  the  Times  may  in- 
dicate, and  Science  may  confidently  predict ;  but  the  prevision  of 
Science,  in  this  behalf,  is  not  yet  perfectly  secured  from  the  possi- 
bility of  error.  The  Principles  of  Universology  are  held  to  be  in- 
fallible ;  but  no  personal  infallibility  is  claimed  for  its  exponent  " 
— [An  extract  from  the  work.'] 

All  names  received  in  season  will,  unless  ordered 
to  the  contrary,  be  placed  in  the  printed  list,  now 
being  prepared,  of  the  first  patrons  of  the  work. 

There  will  be  a  limited  edition  of  the  work  pub- 
lished on  LARGE  PAPER,  4to,  bound  in  cloth,  (to  sub- 
scribers only),  at  $15  per  copy;  to  non-subscribers, 
if  there  should  be  any  copies  of  it  left  over,  the  price 
will  be  raised  to  Twenty  Dollars  per  copy.  The  re- 
gular edition,  8vo,  bound  in  cloth,  will  be  furnished 
at  $7.50  per  copy,  payable  on  delivery  of  the  work. 

Subscribers  will  please  send  their  names  at  their 
earliest  convenience  to  DION  THOMAS,  Publisher, 
142  Nassau  St.,  New  York. 

Please  signify  which  edition,  and  the  number  of 
copies  you  desire. 


INDEX 


A. 

ABBREVIATIONS,  p.  x. 

ABSOLUTE,  The,  (Subs.),  The  Aunio,  1. 126,  p.  94. ;  (Adj.),  Form  =  Figure, 

t.  193,  p.  161 ;  Number,  t.  216,  p.  176.    Speech,  do. ;  cf.  1. 180,  p.  148. 
ABSTRACT,  The,  in  connection  with  Sounds,  t.  101,  p.  65 ;  t.  113,  p.  78 ; 

THE, — Spencer,  t.  139,  p.  102 ;  named,  do. ;  formally  treated,  t.  161-180, 

pp.  136-148;  defined,  t.  163,  p.  137;  inclusion  of,  t.  164-170,  pp.  138- 

143  ;  t.  169,  p.  141 ;  consists  of  Pure  Nothings,  t.  170,  171,  pp.  143,  144; 

Alwani,  Shaupio,  t.   176,  p.  146 ;  divides  into  Abstract  and  Concrete 

(-oid),  do. ;  t.  184,  p.  156. 
ABSTBACT-CONCBETE — Spencer,  1. 139,  p.  102  ;  namings  for,  do.,  and  Note, 

t.  161,  p.  137. 
ABSTRACTION(S),  Pure  Nothings,  1. 164,  p.  138,  and  to  end  of  chapter  ;  t. 

168,  p.  141 ;  Mysteries  of,  t.  169,  do. ;  or  Pure  Nothings,  t.  164,  p.  138 ; 

yet  Most  Positive,  do. ;  t.  170,  p.  142. 
ABSTRACTISMUS,  limits  of,  t.  164,  p.  138 ;  Shaupio,  t.  176,  p.  146 ;  fitness  of 

the  Thin  Consonants  to  express,  t.  178,  p.  147 ;  see  Abstract. 
ABSTRACT  SCIENCES,  only  two— Spencer; — a  third,  t.  168,  p.  141. 
ACADEMY,  French,  see  Agassiz. 
ACCENT,  and  other  marks,  t.  152-156,  pp.  119-123. 
ACUMEN,  see  Ken. 

AGASSIZ,  on  Universology,  Note,  t.  12,  p.  7. 

AGGEEGATION,  of  Points,  repeats  do.  of  Units  or  Things,  t.  167,  p.  140. 
ALPHABET(S),  kinds  of,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  Imperfect  Phonetic,  t.  66,  p.  42 ;  Perfect 

do.,  to  be ;  t.  66,  do. ;  the  Sanscrit,  Note,  t.  65,  p.  42 ;  a  fountain  of  lingual 

development,  t.  67,  p.  43  ;  t.  69,  p.  44 ;  a  UNIVERSAL,  how  to  be  founded, 

t.  79,  p.  49;  Elements  of,  extend  throughout  Language,  t.  80,  p.  50;  t. 

81,  do.    THE  SKELETON  UNIVERSAL  (Alphabet),  t.  93,  p.  59  ;  t.  95,  p.  61 ; 

t.  96,  p.  62 ;  in  TABLE  No.  1,  t.  94,  p.  60 ;  number  of  Letters  in,  t.  95,  p.  61 ; 

1. 108,  p.  68 ;  English  Adapted,  do. ;  Pitman's  Phonographic,  Table  No.  2, 

t.  106,  p.  67 ;  The  International,  t.  109,  p.  68;  names  of  Classes  of  Sounds 

of,  Table  No.  1,  t.  94,  p.  60;  Table  No.  2,  t.   107,  p.  67  ;  t.  113,  p.  77; 

Universal,  Ethnical,  Romanized,  t.  156,  p.  123. 


204  INDEX. 

"  ALPIIABETICS,"  Science  of,  Alexander  Melville  Bell,  t.  79,  p.  49 ;  t.  87,  p.  55. 

ALSKI,  as  Artology,  t  210,  p.  173 ;  derivation  and  distribution  of,  t.  211, 
o.,  Table  No.  9,  do.,  p.  174. 

ALTAR,  see  Fire-place. 

ALWATO,  (ahl-wa-to),  THE  NEW  SCIENTIFIC  UNIVERSAL  LANGUAGE,  t.  78, 
p.  48;  how  founded,  t.  79,  p.  49  ;  composed  of  two  kinds  of  words,  1. 
Those  which  are  self-defining,  and  2.  Those  not  so,  t.  150,  p.  109 ;  how 
will  affect  Old  Style  Languages,  do. ;  will  serve  to  effect  the  GRAND  EE- 
CONCILIATION  of  all  the  Philosophies,  t.  159,  p.  128  ;  first  use  of,  to  sup- 
ply technicalities,  1. 187,  p.  158  ;  1. 192,  p.  160  ;  the  element  of  precision 
in,  illustrated,  t.  195,  p.  162  ;  a  Discovery,  not  an  invention,  t.  197,  p. 
164 ;  Syntax  (Conjugation  of  the  Verb)  of,  t.  200-203  (Table  No.  7),  pp. 
166-169  ;  Pronouns  of,  Table  No.  8,  t.  204,  p.  169  ;  As  THE  SCIENTIFIC 
OPENING  OF  THE  SLUICEWAYS  FOR  THE  PRACTICAL  COALESCENCE  OF  ALL 
EXISTING  LANGUAGES,  t.  150,  p.  109  ;  t.  203,  p.  167  ;  naturalization  of 
words  in,  t.  203,  p.  168 ;  t.  235,  p.  188;  t.  239,  p.  191 ;  t.  244,  p.  194;  t. 
248,  p.  198  ;  t.  249,  p.  199 ;  see  Elements,  and  Sounds. 

ALWATONI  WORD-BUILDING,  see  Word-building. 

AMBIGU'S,  see  Sounds. 

AMERICA,  description  of,  used  for  illustration,  t.  41,  p.  29. 

AMPERE,  cited,  t.  26,  p.  21 . 

ANALOGUES,  defined  and  illustrated,  t.  177,  p.  147. 

ANALOGY,  first  Vague,  Unscientific  ;  Unscientific  use  of,  t.  9,  p.  4 ;  Chem- 
ical illustration  of,  do. ;  Underlying  Principles  of  the  True  Scientific,  t. 
11  p.  5,  6  ;  t.  62,  p.  39  ;  between  Elementary  and  Elaborate  Domains,  of 
Speech,  etc.,  t.  83,  p.  53  ;  between  the  Elements  of  Arithmetic  and  of  Geom- 
etry, t.  168,  p.  140  ;  t.  169,  p.  141 ;  between  Points  and  Principles  ;  Lines 
and  Laws,  1. 168, 169,  p.  141 ;  between  the  Cut,  keenness,  or  acumen  of  the 
Intellect  and  the  Cut  of  the  Line,  t.  170,  p.  142 ;  Universal,  defined  and 
illustrated,  t.  170  ;  Infinite  Echo  of,  among  Elements,  t.  199,  p.  165 ;  see 
Universal  Analogy,  and  Correspondence. 

ANALYSIS,  of  Speech,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  the  more  rigorous  "  Phonetic,"  t.  69,  p. 
44;  equivalent  to  do.  of  Universe,  t.  71,  p.  45. 

"  ANALYSIS,"  see  Spelling  by  Sound. 

ANGULARITY,  named,  Alwali,  t.  196,  198,  pp.  162-165. 

ANIMAL  KINGDOM,  the,  a  Minor  Universe,  t.  G2,  p.  39  ;  named,  T.  1-iO,  p.  103 

A"SKI,  Magic,  t.  158,  p.  12/. 

ANTHROPOIDULE,  man-shaped  Little  Figure,  t.  54,  p.  38. 

ANTS,  learned,  illustrate  Specialists,  t.  246,  p.  196. 

AOUSK.I,  Table  No.  5,  1. 131,  p.  97. 

APPEARANCES,  World  of,  Sciento-Negative,  t.  164,  p. 

APPENDIX  A,  p.  ISO  ;  B,  p.  Ifil ;  C,  p.  184;  P,  p.  188. 


INDEX.  205 

ARITHMETIC,  and  Algebra,  the  Abstract  branch  of  Mathematics,  t.  170,  p. 
143. 

ARSKI,  Artoski,  Tables,  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  t.  211,  212,  213,  p.  174. 

ART,  there  is  a  Grand  Domain  of,  in  Universe,  t.  44,  p.  31 ;  corresponds 
to  Trinism,  t.  47,  p.  32;  defined;  meaning  of  the  term  enlarged,  t. 
49,  50,  do. ;  Upper  End  of  Column  or  Line,  and  Punctum  Vitx  (in 
plant  or  man),  Analogues  of,  t.  54,  p.  35 ;  androgyne,  t.  56,  p.  37  ;  further 
defined,  t.  59,  p.  38 ;  see  Nature-Science-and-Art,  and  Fine  Arts. 

ARTICULATION,  (Little-jointing),  t.  121,  p.  90;  1. 122,  p.  91 ;  t.  124,  p.  92. 

ARTISMUS,  defined  (see  Vocabulary),  t.  45,  p.  31 ;  there  is  one,  of  every 
Sphere  of  Being,  t.  62,  p.  391. 

ARTISTIC  MODIFICATION,  cited,  t.  59,  p.  38. 

ARTOLOGY,  defined,  t.  59,  p.  37 ;  of  Language,  t.  74,  p.  47  ;  t.  77,  p.  48 ;  t. 
131,  p.  97  (Table  No.  5);  USKI,  t.  157,  p.  126;  named  and  tabulated, 
Tables,  Nos.  9, 10, 11,  t.  211-213,  p.  174 ;  cf.  Naturology,  and  Scientology. 

ARTO-PHILOSOPHY,  Table  5, 1. 131,  p.  97. 

ASKI,  t.  207,  p.  172. 

ASPIRATES,  Sanscrit,  t.  156,  p.  123. 

Au,  diphthong,  representative  of  all  the  vowels,  t.  92,  p.  58  ;  a  stem  for 
consonants  in  Bundle-Koot-Words,  1. 127,  p.  94. 

Air,io,  The  Infinite,  1. 126, 127,  p.  94;  Subdivisions  of  into  Scale,  Table  No. 
4,  t.  130,  p.  96 ;  re-statements  of,  t.  131,  132,  do. ;  t.  157,  p.  126  ;  distri- 
buted, 1. 181,  p.  149  ;  t.  182,  p.  155 ;  1. 184,  p.  156 ;  Adjective  do.  in  -so, 
t.  185,  do.  ;  substantive  do.  in  -to,  do.,  p.  157. 

Aumo,  t.  127,  p.  94;  t.  160,  p.  129  ;  t.  181,  p.  149  ;  t.  183,  p.  155. 

AunsKi,  Transcendental  Philosophy,  1. 126,  p.  94;  t.  157,  pp.  125,  127-128, 
et  passim  ;  see  Inski. 

A  USKI,  Philosophy,  t.  126,  p.  94;  Table  No.  6,  t.  132,  p.  98;  t.  157,  pp. 
125,  126;  as  Naturology,  t.  210,  p.  173. ;  et  passim. 

AXIAL  LINES,  t.  191,  p.  159;  t.  194,  p.  162;  see  Bi-trinacria,  or  Kkwal-a- 
krinsta. 

B. 

BACON,  cited,  t.  26,  p.  21. 
BALZAC,  cited,  Table  No.  9,  t.  211,  p.  174. 
BARBARISMS,  defined,  t.  25,  p.  21. 

"  Basic  Outline  of  Uuiversology,"  the  larger  work  to  which  this  is  an  In- 
troduction, alluded  to,  Preface,  pp.  iii,  iv,  v  ;  et  passim. 
BASIS,  see  Foundation  ;  of  Inverted  Procedure  above,  t.  54,  p.  35. 
"  BECOMING,"  The,  equal  to  Art,  t.  59,  p.  38. 
TELL,  Alexander  Melville,  cited,  t.  79,  p.  49. 
P.I-LATERAL  KooT-woRDS,  t.  146,  147,  p.  106  ;  see  Working  Elements. 


206  INDEX. 

BI-TRINACRIA,  defined,  t.  188,  p.  159  ;  named  Alwali,  t. 193,  p.  160. 
"BLANKS,"  "SPACES,"  1. 123,  p.  92,  see  Silences. 
BLOOD,  Benjumin,  cited,  t.  227,  p.  283. 
BODY,  see  Human  Body. 
B<EHME,  Jacob,  cited,  t.  158,  p.  128. 
BUCHANAN,  Dr.  Joseph  E.,  cited,  t.  190,  p.  159. 

BuNDLE-KooT-WoKDs,  meanings  and  list  of,  t.  157,  pp.  124-135 ;  see,  also, 
t.  181,  pp.  149-157  ;  see  Hoot-words. 

c. 

CARD,  a,  011  Universology,  signed  by  Parke  Godwin,  and  others,  Preface, 
p.  v. 

CARDINAL,  Cardinated,  Cardinism,  t.  6,  p.  3. 

CARDINARY,  meaning  of,  t.  158,  p.  127  ;  t.  160,  p.  129. 

CARDINATION,  see  Hinging. 

CARDO,  Latin  for  a  Tiinge,  t.  6,  p.  3. 

CAREER,  every,  has  a  Beginning,  Middle,  and  End,  t.  54,  p.  34. 

CAREERS,  Liquidoid  and  Proteusive,  t.  143,  p.  105. 

CATEGORIES,  of  the  Understanding,  and  of  Being,  distributed,  t.  71,  p.  45. 

QATOEI,  Logic— Spencer,  1. 139,  p.  102,  mid  Note. 

CAVITIES,  see  Interstices. 

CENTER,  =  t,  etc.,  1. 160,  p.  130. 

CENTRUM,  of  Speech,  The  Alphabet  such,  t.  87,  p.  56. 

CEREBRALS,  Sanscritic,  t.  156,  p.  123. 

CHAOS,  Primitive,  Analogue  of  Inarticulate  Sounds,  t.  125,  p.  93. 

CHEMICAL  ELEMENTS,  illustrations  by,  t.  9,  p.  4;  t.  12,  p.  9 ;  upward  and 
downward  tending,  t.  13,  p.  10  ;  and  Edifice,  and  Lightning,  1. 14,  p.  11; 
t.  15,  16,  pp.  11,  12 ;  t.  17,  p.  14 :  t.  217,  p.  177. 

CHEMICAL  TEMPLE,  t.  13,  p.  10  ;  see  Dome,  Temple. 

CHEMISTRY,  (Masaski),  Special,  c,auski,  t.  139,  p.  102 ;  and  Cosmical  Mor- 
phology, t.  190,  p.  159  ;  Synstasis  in,  etc.,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

"CHRONICLE,  WASHINGTON,"  Extract  from,  Preface,  p.  vi. 

CLASSES,  of  Sounds,  new  names  of,  Solids,  etc.,  t.  113,  p.  77. 

CLASSIFICATION,  in  the  Natural  Sciences  inexact,  t.  12,  p.  10 ;  of  the  Sci- 
ences variously  attempted,  t.  26,  p.  21 ;  really  a  Universology,  t.  27,  p. 
22  ;  but  not  complete,  do. ;  Scientific  Universal,  t.  62,  p.  39  ;  of  Lan- 
guage and  the  Universe,  1. 121,  p.  90,  and  to  end  of  chapter  ;  the  EXACT. 
t.  174,  p.  145 ;  a  true,  possible,  t.  177,  p.  147  ;  see  Sounds. 

CLASS-NAMINGS,  of  Sounds,  sec  Classes. 

CLUCKS,  Zulu,  t.  156,  p.  123. 

COALESCENTS,  see  Sounds,  (Ambigu's.) 

COEXISTENCES,  t.  185,  p.  157. 


INDEX.  207 

COLON,  Alwaso  uses  of,  1. 155,  p.  122. 

COLOES,  gamut  of;  3,  7,  12 ;  referred  to,  t.  26,  p.  21. 

COMMA,  Alwaso  uses  of,  t.  155,  p.  122. 

COMPAEOLOGY,  defined,  t.  69,  p.  44 ;  Table  No.  5,  t.  132,  p.  98. 

COMPOSITION^,  of  the  Vocal  Elements  into  Words  ;  see  Word-building ;  of 
Words  themselves,  t.  155,  p.  122. 

COMTE,  Auguste,  t.  26,  p.  21 ;  Echosophic  Generalogist,  1. 138,  p.  101 ;  t. 
159,  p.  128;  t.  185,  p.  157. 

CONCRETE,  The,  in  Connection  with  Sounds,  t.  101-103,  p.  65 ;  1. 113,  p. 
78 ;  THE, — Spencer,  t.  139,  p.  102;  named,  do. ;  formally  treated,  t.  161- 
180,  pp.  136-148  ;  defined,  t.  163,  p.  137  ;  inclusion  of,  t.  164,  p.  138, 
only  imperfectly  scientific,  (t.  12,  p.  10),  1. 171,  p.  143 ;  The,  Zhaubio,  1. 176, 
p.  146 ;  divides  into  Abstract  and  Concret(-oid),  1. 176,  do. ;  1. 184,  p.  156. 

CONCEETISMUS,  limits  of,  1. 164,  p.  138 ;  zhaubio,  t.  176,  p.  146 ;  the,  fitness 
of  the  heavy  Consonants  to  represent,  t.  178,  p.  148  ;  see  Concrete. 

CONDITIONED,  The,  see  The  Unconditioned. 

CONFECTION,  in  Cookery,  t.  149,  p.  108. 

CONJUGATION,  of  the  Alwaso  verb,  Table  No.  7,  t.  203,  p.  168  ;  t.  204,  p.  169. 

CONSONANTS,  represented  by  ng,  k,  v,  1,  t.  127,  p.  94;  the  Heterogenizing 
Element  of  Language,  t.  142,  p.  104;  as  Scientology,  t.  210,  p.  173. 

CONSONANT-SOUNDS,  see  Consonants  and  Elements. 

CONSTEUCTIONS,  human,  how  to  be  guided,  1. 191,  p.  160. 

COOK,  Confection  of  Proximate  Elements  by,  t.  149,  p.  108. 

COPULATION,  between  Ground  and  Heaven,  t.  55,  p.  36;  denoted  by  iu,  t. 
109,  p.  70,  et  passim. 

COEEESPONDENCE(S),  between  the  Constitution  of  Language  and  that  of 
the  Material  Universe,  1. 121,  p.  90,  and  to  the  end  of  the  chapter ;  be- 
tween Mathematical  and  Lingual  Elements,  t.  160,  pp.  129,  130 ;  doc- 
trine of,  embraces  Logic,  t.  168,  p.  141  ;  doctrine  of,  defined  and  illus- 
trated, t.  177,  p.  147  ;  see  Analogy,  and  Universal  Analogy. 

COSMICAL  MOBPHOLOGY — Bi-trhiacria,  etc.,  t.  188-195,  pp.  158-162. 

COSMOS  (or  Kosmos),  distributed  into  Grand  Sciences,  t.  139,  p.  102;  into 
Grand  Spheres,  t.  145,  p.  105. 

CRISIS-EVENT,  THE,  of  Human  Development,  t.  199,  p.  165. 

CUBIC  DIMENSIONS,  of  the  New  Jerusalem,  t.  197,  p.  164. 

CUBIC  LINES,  of  Dimension,  see  Bi-trinacria. 

Cur,  =  k,  etc.,  1. 160,  p.  130. 

D. 

D'ALEMBEET,  cited,  t.  26,  p.  21. 

DEDUCTIVE  METHOD,  improperly  so  called,  t.  9,  p.  4 ;  see  Method. 

DEFINITIONS,  see  Logic. 


208  INDEX. 

DEPARTMENTS,  of  Language  (Alwato),  two,  self-defining,  and  not  so,  1. 150, 
p.  109 ;  The  Elementary  and  The  Elaborate  compared,  t.  83,  p.  53 ;  see 
Domains. 

DIACRITICAL  MARKS,  nasalization,  t.  97,  p.  62 ;  accent,  nasalization,  long 
and  short  marks,  etc.,  t.  152-156,  pp.  119-123. 

DIAGRAMMATIC  KEPRESENTATION,  of  word-meanings,  t.  198,  p.  165. 

DIALECTS,  of  Alwato  ;  t.  77,  p.  48. 

DIRECT,  and  Inverse  Order,  of  Sounds,  t.  157,  p.  124. 

DIRECT  AND  IMMEDIATE  CONSEQUENCE,  Eau,io,  1. 185,  p.  157. 

DIRECTION,  see  Drift. 

DISCOVERT,  distinguished  from  Invention,  1. 197,  p.  164. 

DISTRIBUTION,  see  Classification. 

DOHERTY,  Hugh,  Epicosmology,  t.  145,  p.  105. 

DOME,  of  Earth  and  Heaven,  t.  13,  p.  10 ;  t.  14,  15,  p.  11 ;  1. 16,  p.  12 ;  t. 
17,  p.  13 ;  t,  180,  p.  148 ;  t.  190,  p.  159. 

DOMAINS,  of  Being  or  Existence,  what  is  meant  by,  t.  23,  p.  19 ;  larger  or 
smaller,  t.  24,  do. ;  are  of  all  sorts,  t.  25,  p.  20  ;  named  by  -io,  t.  126,  p. 
93  ;  distribution  of,  in  -io,  1. 181-183,  pp.  149-157  ;  Elements  in  different, 
identified, — Number,  Form,  Language, — t.  216,  217,  pp.  176,  177. 

DOOR- WAY,  Analogue  of  Punctum  Vitce,  t.  54,  p.  86. 

DRIFT,  or  Direction,  the  First,  t.  53,  p.  34 ;  First,  Second,  and  Third,  t.  54, 
p.  35. 

DUISM,  introduced,  and  naming  of,  t.  2,  p.  1 ;  various  (ordinary)  namings 
of,  t.  5,  p.  2  ;  bifurcates,  do. ;  alliance  of,  with  Plurality,  do. ;  referred 
to,  t.  8,  p.  4 ;  t.  46,  p.  31 ;  echoes  to  Science,  t.  47,  do. ;  tlie  Second  Uni- 
versal Principle,  related  to  the  Number  Two,  t.  214,  p.  175;  various  (Al- 
waso)  namings  of,  do. 

DTTTSMUS,  how  same  as  Ileterogenismus,  t.  214,  p.  175. 

"DYNAMIC  "—  Comte  (motic),  t.  185,  p.  157. 

E, 

EAR,  abused  by  the  Eye,  t.  106,  p.  67. 

ECHO,  see  Correspondence. 

EDGE,  vanishing,  of  Cutting  Instrument,  t.  170,  p.  142. 

EDIFICE,  to  illustrate  Universal  Distribution,  t.  54,  p.  35 ;  see  Dome. 

EDUCATION,  to  be  reconstituted  by  Uuiversology,  Preface,  p.  vii. ;  Unity  of 

System  in,  do. ;  t.  218,  p.  178. 
EKWAL-AKRFNSTA,  t.  195,  p.  162. 
ELABORISMUS,   the,   defined,  t.  82,  p.  52  ;  t.  83-87,  pp.  53-55  ;  t.  87,  p.  ">." ; 

t.  130,  131,  pp.  96-97  (Tables  Nos.  4  and  5);  t.  183,  184,  pp.  155,  156  ;  t. 

207,  p.  172 ;  of  Speech,  t.  214,  p.  175. 
EL ABOROLOGY,  defined,  t.  82,  p.  52  ;  Table  No.  5,  t.  131,  p.  97. 


INDEX.  209 

ELECTRO-NEGATIVE,  1. 14,  p.  11 ;  see  Dome, 

ELECTKO-POSITIVE,  t.  14,  p.  11  ;  see  Dome. 

ELEMENTARY  SOUNDS,  see  Elements,  and  Sounds. 

ELEMENTISMUS,  the,  defined,  t.  82,  p.  52 ;  t.  83-87,  pp.  53-55 ;  t.  87,  p.  55 ; 
t.  130,  131,  pp.  96,  97  (Tables  Nos.  4  and  5)  ;  t.  183, 184,  pp.  155, 156 ;  t. 
207,  p.  172 ;  of  Speech,  t.  214,  p.  175 ;  the  Ambigu's  are  at  centre  of, 
do. ;  of  various  Domains,  t.  216,  p.  176. 

ELEMENTOLOGY,  denned,  t.  82,  p.  52 ;  Table  No.  5,  t.  131,  p.  97. 

ELEMENTS,  24  Chemical,  supposed,  t.  9,  p.  4  ;  t.  12,  p.  9. ;  true  number  of, 
uncertain  do. ;  Phonetic,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  equal  to  do.  of  Universe,  t.  71,  p.  45 ; 
of  Sound  charged  with  Meaning,  t.  72,  73,  pp.  45,  46;  t.  80,  p.  50;  gov- 
ern Elaborations,  t.  83,  p.  53 ;  Sounds  distinguished  from  Signs,  t.  88, 
89,  p.  56  ;  contradictory  usage  of  signs  of,  in  different  languages,  t.  90,  p. 
57 ;  Vowel,  and  Consonant,  defined,  t.  91,  p.  57;  Vowel,  few,  t.  92,  p.  58; 
how  pronounced,  do. ;  t.  94,  p.  59  ;  Exceptional  Sounds,  t.  95,  96,  p.  61 ; 
t.  97,  p.  63;  t.  99,  100,  p.  64;  intimate,  and  Working,  t.  146,  p.  106; 
Mathematical  and  Lingual,  Analogy  of,  t.  160,  p.  130  ;  Primary,  of 
Form  abstract,  1. 166,  p.  189  ;  of  different  Domains,  identical.  1. 198, 199, 
p.  165  ;  t.  216,  p.  176  ;  see  Alphabet,  and  Sounds. 

ELLIS,  Alexander  J.,  cited,  t.  79,  p.  49. 

ELSBERG,  namings  of  Classes  of  Sounds,  t  116,  p.  79 ;  t.  179,  p.  148. 

ENDO-LEXIC  PUNCTUATION,  t.  155,  p.  123. 

ENDO-NATUROLOGY,  Naski,  t.  207,  p.  172. 

ENGKAUVLIO,  defined,  t.  127,  p.  94;  distributed,  t.  184,  p.  156. 

ENGKAUVLSKI,  as  Scientology,  t.  210,  p.  173. 

EnsKi,  Transcendental  Dialectics — Hegel,  1. 158,  p.  127,  et  passim. 

ENVIRONMENT,  Aumio — Comte,  Spencer,  t.  185,  p.  157. 

EPICOSMOLOGY,  Hugh  Doherty,  1. 145,  p.  105. 

EQUALAKR:NSTA,  see  Ekwal-akrinsta. 

ETHER,  type  of  Homogenism,  t.  136,  137,  p.  100. 

ETHEREALOGY,  Table  No.  3,  1. 130,  p.  96. 

ETHICS,  and  Morphology,  1. 190,  p.  159;  Elements  of,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

ETYMOLOGY,  Comparative,  t.  70,  p.  44. 

EVEN,  and  Odd,  t.  160,  p.  129. 

EVOLUTION,  is  Art,  (in  Nature),  t.  50,  p.  33  ;  has  Three  Stages,  t.  54,  p.  34; 
threefold,  t.  55,  p.  36. 

EXACTITUDE,  see  Precision. 

EXO-NATUROLOGY,  Maski,  t.  208,  p.  172. 

F. 

FASCICULATED,  see  Bundle-Eoot- Words. 
FEMINISM,  of  Nature,  t.  56,  p.  36. 


210  INDEX. 

FERRIMA,  see  Form. 

FETICHISM,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

FIOIITE,  alluded  to,  t.  7,  p.  3 ;  a  Transcendental  Ontologist,  t.  158,  p.  12V. 

FIGURE,  is  Absolute,  Position  Relative  Form,  t.  193,  p.  161. 

FiouRE-AND-PosTURE,  a  special,  named,  t.  193,  p.  160. 

FINE  ARTS,  see  Ilwaunski. 

FINITE,  The,  t.  127,  p.  94  ;  a  Species  of  The  Unlimited,  t.  128,  p.  95. 

FIRE-PLACE,  the  Fund  urn  Vitce  of  the  Edifice,  t.  54,  p.  36. 

Focus,  see  Fire-place. 

FORK,  the,  used  for  illustration,  t.  5,  6,  p.  2. 

FORM,   defined,  (Forma,  Ferrima),  t.  52,  p.  33 ;  t.  54,  p.  35 ;  the  Hetero- 

genizing  Element  consonantal,  t.  142,  p.  104;  what  it  consists  of,  t.  100, 

p.  139;  t.  217,  p.  177. 
FORMA,  (Ferrima),  see  Form. 
FOUNDATIONS,  Electro-Positive,  Earthy,  t.  15,  p.  12 ;  Analogue  of  Nature, 

t.  53,  p.  34;  Spiritual,  are  above,  t.  54,  p.  35 ;  Analogue  of  Hoot,  do. ;  t. 

55,  p.  36 ;  of  Languages,  t.  87,  p.  56. 

FOURIER,  Transcendental  Practical-Philosopher,  t.  158,  p.  128. 
FRACTIONAL,  and  Integral,  t.  160-,  p.  129. 
FRENCH  ACADEMY,  see  Agassiz. 

G-. 

GENERALISMUS,  referred  to,  t.  137,  p.  100 ;  mlau,io,  within  the  Limitary,  t. 

138,  p.  101 ;  t.  143,  p.  105 ;  1. 184,  p.  156. 
GENERALOGY,  t.  138,  p.  101. 

GENERATIVE  PRINCIPLE,  science,  Masculine,  t.  56,  p.  36. 
GEOSPHERE,  t.  145,  p.  105. 

GERMAN,  and  Italian  Languages  characterized,  t.  85,  p.  54 ;  t.  86,  p.  55. 
GERMINAL  POINT,  Analogue  of  Art,  t.  54,  p.  35. 
"  GLIDES,"  t.  156,  p.  123. 
GOD-PRINCIPLE,  see  Logos. 
GOD'S  WILL,  the  Supremo  Law,  scientifically  discovered  in  Universology, 

Preface,  p.  vii. 

GOVERNMENT,  The  Universal,  see  Universal  Government. 
"  GRAfE,"  meaning  of,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

GRAMMAR,  distributed,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  of  Alwato  ;  see  Conjugation. 
GRAND  RECONCILIATION,  The,  through  Alwato,  ot  Philosophies,  t.  159,  p. 

128. 

GROUND,  common,  between  Subject  and  Object — Schelling,  t.  158,  p.  127. 
GUTTURALIZATIONB,  Semitic,  t.  156,  p.  123. 

H. 

1! A.MILTON,  Sir  Win.,  on  The  Unconditioned,  t.  128,  p.  '.).">. 


INDEX.  211 

HARMONIOLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  1. 130,  p.  97. 

HEAD,  of  Column,  the  Basis  of  Inverted  Procedure,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

HEGEL,  alluded  to,  t.  7,  p.  3 ;  Transcendental  Dialectician,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

HELMHOLTZ,  cited,  t.  223,  p.  181. 

HERMETIC,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

HETEROGENISMUS,  and  Homogenismus,  t.  133,  p.  98,  and  to  end  of  chap- 
ter; how  same  as  Duismus,  t.  214,  p.  175. 

HINGING,  t.  122,  p.  91. 

HINGINGS,  t.  160,  p.  130,  see  Elements,  and  Bundle-Boot- Words. 

HOMOGENEITY,  represented  by  Vowel-Sounds,  t.  Ill,  p.  76. 

HOMOGENISMI,  of  Cosmos,  Spheres,  t.  145,  p.  105. 

HOMOGENISMUS,  and  Heterogenismus,  t.  133,  p.  98,  and  to  end  of  chapter; 
when  Universal  =  The  Infinite,  t.  138,  p.  101 ;  how  same  as  Unismus, 
t,  214,  p.  175. 

HUMAN  BODY,  analogy  of,  with  Edifice,  t.  14,  p.  11 ;  the,  a  Minor  Uni- 
verse, t.  62,  p.  39 ;  a  Modelic  Sphere,  t.  63,  p.  40. 

HUMAN  MIND,  the,  a  Minor  Universe,  t.  62,  p.  39. 

HwAunio,  The  Spirit-World,  Theandrismus,  t.  129,  p.  95. 

HWAUDSKI,  The  Science  of  the  Fine  Arts,  t.  210,  p.  173. 

HYBRIDITY,  lingual,  t.  25,  p.  20 ;  justified,  t.  220,  p.  180  ;  t.  248,  p.  198. 

HYPHEN,  Alwaso  uses  of,  1. 155,  p.  122. 

I. 

-!A,  termination,  t.  205,  p.  171. 

IAU,  t.  157,  p.  124. 

IAU,IO,  t.  183,  p.  155. 

ICTUS,  on  stopped  vowels,  t.  154,  p.  121. 

IDEAS,  all  possible,  may  be  classified,  t.  177,  p.  147. 

IDENTITY  OF  LAW,  t.  60,  p.  39 ;  Inherency  of  do.,  t.  62,  do. 

IDEOLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  96 

IESKI,  Table  No.  5,  t.  131,  p.  97. 

INARTICULATE  SOUNDS,  correspondence  of,  1. 125,  p.  93. 

INCLINATION,  in  Morals,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

INCONCEIVABILITY  OF  THE  OPPOSITE,  t.  174,  p.  145. 

INDEX,  pp.  203-224. 

INDIVIDUALITY,  DIVERGENT  and  CONVERGENT,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

INEXPUGNABILITY  OF  PRIME  ELEMENTS,  t.  84,  85,  p.  54. 

IXFERNOLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130.  p.  97. 

INFINITE,  The,  see  Reality;  Species  of  The  Unlimited,  t.  128,  p.  95;  t.  126, 

p.  93;  t.  127,  p.  94;  ==  Hoinogenism,  t.  138,  p.  101. 
INFINITIES,  Special,  t.  138,  p.  101. 
INHERENCY,  Aunio,  t.  185,  p.  157. 


212  INDEX. 

INHERENT  MEANINGS  of  Sounds,  see  Sounds. 

INHEREVT  NECESSITY,  t.  60,  p.  39  ;  t.  180,  p.  148. 

INITIALS,  use  of,  t.  222,  p.  181. 

INORGANISMUS,  t.  137,  p.  101 ;  t.  135,  p.  157. 

I'ISKI,  Transcendental  Ontology— Fichte,  t.  158,  p.  127,  (etc.) 

INSTINCTUAL  LANGUAGE,  see  Old  Style  Languages. 

INTEGRAL,  and  Fractional,  t.  160,  p.  130. 

INTEGRALISM,  Final  and  All-sided  Philosophy,  t.  218,  p.  178;  t.  231,  p.  185 

INTELLIGENCE,  Pure  Transcendental — Ficlite,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

INTERSPACES,  of  Silence ;  see  Silences  =  Negation,  t.  143,  p.  104. 

INTERSTICES,  =  Negation,  t.  143,  p.  104. 

INVERSE  AND  DIRECT  ORDER,  of  Sounds,  t.  157,  p.  124. 

-lo,  as  termination,  distributed,  t.  181,  182,  pp.  149-155  ;  t.  20."),  p.  171. 

-Isiius,  as  termination,  defined,  Vocabulary ;  t.  45,  p.  31. 

ITALIAN,  and  German  Languages  characterized,  t.  85,  p.  54  ;  t.  86,  p.  55. 

ITALICS,  etc.,  free  use  of,  t.  221,  p.  180. 

J. 

JUDGMENT,  see  Non-inclinism. 

K. 

KANT,  General  TranscendentaJist,  t.  153,  p.  128  ;  cited,  t.  185,  p.  156. 

KAUV,IO,  the  Specialismus,  t.  139,  p.  102. 

KEN,  or  keenness  of  mind,  t.  170,  p.  142. 

KINGDOMS,  the  Three,  of  Nature,  t.  118,  p.  80  ;  t.  14'"),  p.  103. 

KLIX-EIN,  and  £/-in-ein,  Greek,  t.  194,  p.  161. 

KKIX-EIN  krinsta,  see  yWin-ein ;  t.  194,  p.  161. 

L. 

L,  (and  E),  Inherent  Meanings  of,  illustrated  in  English,  t.  119,  pp.  82-87. 

LANGUAGE,  a  Minor  Universe,  t.  63,  p.  39  ;  the  Modelic  one,  do.,  Media- 
torial, do. ;  two  Naturismal  Methods  with,  t.  64,  65,  68,  pp.  40-43  ; 
Scientismal  Method  repeats  the  Logic  of  Naturism,  t.  69,  p.  44 ;  meas- 
ures the  distribution  of  the  Universe,  t.  71,  p.  45;  A  NEW  SCIENTIFIC 
UNIVERSAL,  t.  74,  p.  46 ;  entire,  distributed  by  the  Alphabet,  t.  80,  p.  50 ; 
distributes  the  Universe,  t.  81,  do. ;  t.  150,  p.  109 ;  only  accidentally 
the  leading  subject,  t.  215,  p.  175;  t.  216,  p.  177  ;  Angelic,  t.  224,  p.  132. 

LANGUAGES,  some  characterized  by  Vowels,  some  by  Consonants,  t.  85,  p.  54. 

LARDNER,  Dr.  Dionisius,  on  Steam  Navigation  of  the  Ocean,  t.  120,  p.  88. 

LAW,  of  Analogy,  not  understood,  t.  9,  p.  4;  Inherent  and  Necessary,  t. 
62,  p.  39  ;  the  Analogue  of  a  Line,  t.  168,  p.  141;  Essential,  Indux-llinir, 
of  all  Being,  t.  199,  p.  165  ;  Domain  of,  t.  206,  p.  171. 

•LEIIRE,  (Ger.)  equal  to  lore  or  -logy,  t.  25,  p.  20. 


INDEX.  213 

LEPSITJS,  cited,  t.  79,  p.  49 ;  1. 156,  p.  123. 

LIFE,  an  Analogue  of  Art,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

LIGHTENING,  the,  and  the  Chemical  Elements,  1. 14,  p.  11 ;  see  Dome. 

LIMITARY,  The,  Consonantal,  t.  138,  p.  101. 

LIMITATION— Kant,  1. 112,  p.  76 ;  1. 121,  p.  90  ;  t.  122,  123,  p.  91 ;  t.  124,  p. 
92. 

LIMITATIONS,  see  Fositings. 

LIMITED,  The,  see  Sounds. 

LIMITING,  The,  see  Sounds. 

LIMITOSKI,  t.  210,  p.  173. 

LINE,  an  Analogue  of  a  Career,  t.  54,  p.  34;  — k,  etc.,  t.  160,  p.  130;  de- 
fined, t.  165,  p.  138;  see  Abstractions. 

LINGUO-AETOLOGY,  see  Artology. 

LrNGUo-NATUROLOGY,  see  Naturology. 

LiNGtro-SciENTOLoaY,  see  Scientology. 

LIP-SOUNDS,  p  and/,  t.  101,  p.  65 ;  &  and  V,  t.  102,  do. 

LIQUIDITIES,  t.  137,  p.  100 ;  t.  138,  p.  101 ;  t.  143,  p.  105. 

LIQUIDS,  Table  No.  1,  t.  94,  p.  60;  t.  113,  p.  77;  1. 133,  p.  101 ;  distrib- 
uted, t.  143,  144,  p.  105. 

LITERATURE,  of  Existing  Languages,  how  affected  by  Alwato,  t.  150,  p. 
109. 

LOGIC,  a  branch  of  language,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  Science  of  Laws  and  Principles, 
embraced  in  Analogy,  t.  168,  p.  141 ;  t.  170,  p.  142. 

LOGICAL  ALPHABET,  referred  to,  t.  81,  p.  50. 

LOGOS,  the,  Title-page,  1. 19,  p.  17;  as  word-ending,  t.  20,  p.  IS;  t.  199, 
p.  165  ;  the  God-Principle,  t.  215,  216,  p.  176. 

-LoGY,  as  termination,  t.  19,  p.  17 ;  t.  20,  p.  18  ;  t.  22,  p.  19 ;  t,  25,  p.  20  ; 
for  Spencer's  Abstract,  etc.,  1. 161,  p.  136;  for  names  of  New  Sciences, 
see  An,io,  Aunio,  Tables,  Word-building. 

LONG  KUN,  t.  185,  p.  157. 

LRAUIO,  distributed,  t.  185,  p.  157. 

M. 

MAGI,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

MARGINAL  IMPERFECTION,  alluded  to,  t.  12,  p.  9. 
MARKED  Letters,  Accent,  etc.,  t.  152-156,  pp.  119-123. 
MASCULISM,  of  Science,  t.  56,  p.  36. 
MATERIALOGY,  Table  No.  4,  1. 130,  p.  9S. 
MATERIALS,  see  Homogenismus. 

MATHEMATICAL  ELEMENTS,  and  Lingual,  Analogy  of,  t.  160,  p.  130. 
MATHEMATICS,  Scientifically  Positive,  t.  170,  p.  143 ;  quarrel  of,  with  Na- 
tural Science,  t.  174,  p.  145  ;  peculiarly  true,  do. 


214  INDEX. 

MoCosH,  011  LOGIC,  Note,  t.  177,  p.  147. 

"  MEANING,"  of  Facts — Richard  Owen,  t.  17,  p.  14. 

MEANINGS,  of  Sound,  Inherent,  see  Elements,  and  Sounds. 

MECHANICS,  Pauski,  t.  139,  p.  102 ;  push,  pull,  etc.,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

MERE  PREPONDERANCE,  t.  84,  p.  54 ;  t.  85,  p.  55. 

METALS,  heavy,  t.  13,  p.  10 ;  see  Dome. 

METAPHYSICS,  of  Science,  t.  175,  p.  146. 

METAPHYSIOA-THEOLOGICAL,  see  Theologies-Metaphysical. 

METHOD,  Uuiversological,  Condensed  Statement  of,  p.  xvi.  ;  TJie  ANTIOIPA 

TORY,  t.  9,  p.  4 ;  Inductive,  Deductive,   t.  10,  11,  pp.  5,  6  ;  Universolog' 

ical,  restated,  t.  219,  p.  179. 
METHODS,  in  study  of  Language,  t.  64,  p.  40. 
MILLIONS,  of  words,  will  be  spontaneously  formed,  t.  150,  p.  108. 
MIND,  see  Human  Mind. 
MINIATURE  UNIVERSE,  see  Minor  Universe. 
MINOR  UNIVERSE,  every  Sphere  is  one,  t.  62,  p.  39 ;  Language  especially, 

t.  63,  p.  40 ;  t.  71,  p.  45  ;  t.  73,  p.  46  ;  t.  215,  p.  175. 
MISSIONARY  SOCIETY,  English  Church,  t.  79,  p.  49. 
MLAU,IO,  The  Generalismus,  t.  138,  p.  101 ;  t.  185,  p.  156  ;  distributed,  t. 

185,  p.  157. 

MODELS,  see  Patterns. 

MONOSPHEROLOGY,  defined,  t.  68,  69,  p.  44  ;  Table  No.  6,  t.  132,  p.  98. 
MONOTHEISM,  t.  217,  p.  178. 
MORALS,  see  Ethics. 
MOBPHOLOGY,  the  Science  of  Form,  t.  23,  p.  19  ;  Cosmical  Bi-trinacria,  etc., 

t.  188-195,  pp.  158-162. 
MOTHER-PRINCIPLE,  Nature,  t.  56,  p.  36. 
MOTOID,  etc..  see  Alphabet. 
MOTOLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  97. 
MOVEMENT,  Analogous  with  Art,  t.  50,  51,  p.  33. 
MUELLER,  Max,  cited,  Note,  t.  113,  p.  77. 
Music,  a  branch  of  language,  t.  64,  p.  41 ;  t.  223,  p.  181 ;  t.  225,  p.  183 ; 

will  be  reconstructed  by  Alwato,  t.  227,  p.  184. 
MYSTICS,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

N. 

NASALIZATION,  needed  in  English,  t™  93,  p.  59;  what,  how  represented,  t. 
97,  p.  62  ;  sign  of  Incomprehensibility,  t.  126,  p.  94;  twang  in  the 
t.  151,  p.  113 ;  fully  defined,  1. 153,  p.  120  ;  sign  of,  t,  156,  p.  123  ;  t. 
pp.  127,  128 ;  t.  183,  p.  155 ;  t.  205,  p.  170;  t.  210,  p.  173. 

NASALS,  see  Liquids. 


INDEX.  215 

NASCENT  STATE,  1. 183,  p.  155. 

NATION,  Great  Planetary,  of  the  Future,  t.  74,  p.  46. 

NATURALIZATION,  of  Foreign  words,  in  Alwato,  t.  203,  p.  167. 

NATURAL  SCIENCES,  inexact  terms  legitimate  in,  1. 12,  p.  10;  not  the  High 

Scientific  Domain,  t.  173,  p.  145 ;  facts  of  the,  still  true ;  how ;  t.  174, 

175,  do. 

NATURASKI,  Tables,  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  t.  211,  213,  p.  174. 
NATURE,  a  Domain  of  the  Universe,  t.  44,  p.  31 ;  corresponds  to  Unism,  t. 

47,  do. ;  defined,  t.  49,  p.  32 ;  is  Feminine,  t.  56,  p.  36  ;  irregular,  nou- 

scientoid,  1. 171,  172,  pp.  143,  144  ;  in  what  sense  true,  1. 174,  175,  p. 

145  ;  subordinate  to  Science,  t.  206,  p.  172  ;  t.  209,  p.  173  ;  see  Nature- 

Science-and-Art. 
NATURE-SciENcs-and-ART,  defined  and  shown  as  a  Primitive  Distribution 

of  the  Universe,  t.  47,  p.  31 ;  defined,  t.  49,  p.  32  ;  t.  51,  52,  p.  33  ; 

compared  to  the  parts  of  an  Edifice,  t.  53,  p.  34 ;  to  a  Line,  t.  54,  do. ; 

further  defined  ;  not  mere  Facts,  t.  55,  p.  36  ;  Nature,  Science,  and  Art, 

Indeterminate,  t.  183,  p.  155. 

NATURISMUS,  defined,  t.  45,  p.  31 ;  there  is  one  of  every  Sphere,  t.  62,  p.  39. 
NATUROLOGY,  defined,  t.  57,  p.  37 ;  its  scope,  t,  60,  p.  38 ;  t.  61,  p.  39  ;  of 

Speech,  t.  68,  p.  44 ;  t.  74,  75,  p.  47 ;  1. 130,  p.  96  (Table) ;  ASKI,  t.  157, 

p.  125;  named  and  tabulated,  Tables,  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  t.  211-213,  p.  174. 
NATUROLOGY,  SCIENTOLOGY,  and  ARTOLOGY,  various  namings  of,  t.  205- 

211,  pp.  170-174  (Tables  Nos.  9,  10,  11.) 
NATURO-METAPHYSICS,  Table  No.  5,  t.  131,  p.  97. 
NEGATION— Kant,  t.  Ill,  p.  76;  t.  121,  p.  90;  1. 122,  123,  pp.  91,  92;  t. 

123,  124,  p.  92 ;  Vocal,  t.  143,  p.  104. 
NEGATIVE,  see  Positive. 

NEW  JERUSALEM,  the,  dimensions  of,  t.  197,  p.  164. 
NOMOLOGY,  Tables,  Nos.  4,  5,  t.  130,  131,  pp.  96,  97. 
NON-INCLINISM,  defined,  t.  194,  p.  161. 
NON-METALS,  light,  t.  13,  p.  10  ;  see  Dome. 

NON-PLURALIZABLE   SUBSTANTIVES,  t.  144,  p.  105. 

"  NOTHING,"  see  Silences,  Negation,  Zero. 

NOTHINGS,   Pure,  all  Abstractions  are  so,  t.  164,  p.  138,  and  to  end  of 

chapter. 

NOTICE  TO  EEADER,  p.  x. 
NUMBER,  Elements  of,  t.  160,  p.  129 ;  t.  167,  p.  139 ;  t.  216,  p.  176. 

o. 

OBJECTIONS,  to  the  possibility  of  Universology,  answered,  t.29-40,  pp.  22-28. 

OBJECTIVE,  The,  Mau,io,  t.  185,  p.  156. 

OBJECT-TEACHING,  for  Universology  and  Alwato,  t.  198,  p.  165. 


216  INDEX. 

ODD,  and  Even,  t.  160,  p.  1'2'J. 

OLD  STYLE  LANGUAGES,  1. 150,  p.  109. 

-OLOGT,  see  -logy. 

ONE,  Two,  and  THREE,  furnish  the  naming*  of  UNISM,  DUISM,   and  TRI- 

NISM,  t.  2,  p.  1 ;  t.  46,  p.  31. 
ONTOLOGICAL  ALPHABET,  referred  to,  t.  81,  p.  51. 
ONTOLOGY,  Tables,  Nos.  4,  5, 1. 130,  131,  pp.  96,  97. 
ORDER,  the  First  or  Primitive,  and  the  "  Inverted,"  t.  53,  p.  34  ;  Keversc. 

of  Discovery,  Table  No.  9,  t.  211,  p.  174 ;  a  priori  and  a, posteriori,  Table 

No.  9,  do. 
ORDERS,  of  Vowels  and  Consonants,  t.  98,  p.  63 ;  Direct  and  Inverse  of 

do.,  1. 157,  p.  124 ;  see  Methods. 
ORGANISAIUB,  The  Grand,  subdivides  into  three  Kingdoms,  t.  137,  p.  101 ; 

1. 140,  p.  103 ;  t.  185,  p.  157. 
OPTICS,  Incidence  and  Reflection,  t.  217,  p.  177. 
OSKI,  t.  207,  p.  172. 
OVERLAPPING,  alluded  to,  1. 12,  p.  9. 
OWEN,  Eichard,  cited,  t.  17,  p.  14;  Table  No.  4, 1. 130,  p.  96. 

P. 

PAIES,  of  Sounds,  see  Elements,  and  Souncls. 

PALATAL  SOUNDS,  1. 156,  p.  123. 

PANTAROHISM,  the  Organic  Unity  and  Unitary  Polity  of  the  Humanity  of 

the  Future,  t.  218,  p.  178  ;  t.  229,  232,  p.  185 ;  see  Universal  Government. 
PARALLELISM,  1. 196,  197,  pp.  162-164. 

PARTICULARIZATION,  Individuation,  etc. ;  Hwau,io,  t.  184,  p.  156. 
PARTINGS,  and  Unitiugs,  t.  160,,  p.  130  ;  see  Elements  and  Bundle-Koot- 

Words. 

PATHOGNOMIO  LINES — Buchanan,  t.  190,  p.  159. 
PATTERNS,  Working,  for  our  Constructions,  1. 191,  p.  160. 
PERAS,  To,  see  Sounds. 
PHILOSOPHY,  Ordinary,  named,  t.  126,  p.  94;  Cardmary,  Transcendent:)!, 

or  Eational,  do. ;  Practical,  Table  No.  4,  1. 130,  p.  97  ;  Table  No.  5,  t. 

130,  p.  97  ;  named,  Table  No.  6,  1. 132,  p.  98  ;  1. 157,  pp.  125,  126  ;  Grand 

departments  of,  Fichte,  etc.,  1. 158,  p.  127. 
PHONETIC  ALPHABET,  see  Alphabet. 
PHONOGRAPHY,  Unvocalized,  to  illustrate  Undiacriticised  types,  t.  154,  p. 

122 ;  see  Pitman. 

PHONOS,  the  Something-Element  of  Speech,  t.  124,  p.  92,  see  Reality. 
PHRENOLOGY,  an  Ethnical  and  National,  a  New  Science,  how  to  be  found- 
ed, t.  226,  p.  184. 
PHYSICS,  (Fauski),  Special,  Thauski,  t.  139,  p.  102. 


INDEX.  217 

PITMAN,  Isaac,  referred  to,  t.  79,  p.  49  ;  distinguishes  Light  and  Heavy 
Sounds,  t.  103,  p.  65 ;  Extract  from  Steno-phonographic  Alphabet  of, 
Table  No.  2,  t.  107,  p.  67. 

PLAN,  of  Nature,  in  Organization,  t.  84,  p.  53  ;  in  Language,  t.  85,  p.  54. 

PLANT,  or  Tree,  Type  to  illustrate  Universal  Distribution,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

PLATO,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  96  ;  cited,  and  classified,  1. 158,  p.  128. 

PLUMULE,  of  the  Plant,  Analogue  of  Superstructure,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

PLURALITY-TERMINATIONS,  1. 160,  p.  129. 

PNEUMATISMUS,  of  Speech,  Hwaimio,  t.  214,  p.  175. 

POINT,  of  Conjunction  (Copulative),  Analogue  of  Art,  t.  54,  p.  35  ;  Ger- 
minal, do. ;  as  Pointer,  1. 160,  p.  130;  defined,  1. 165,  p.  138  ;  repeats  Unit, 
t.  167, p.  140;  Analogue  of  a  Principle,  t.  168,  p.  141 ;  see  Abstractions. 

POLITY,  the  Future  Human,  t.  218,  p.  178 ;  see  Universal  Government,  and 
Pautarcbisrn. 

POLYTHEISM,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

POSITINGS,  and  Limitations,  Abstract,  in  Space,  t.  166,  p.  139. 

POSITION,  First  Normal,  The  Perpendicular,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

POSITIVE,  and  Negative,  reversal  of,  from  Natural  and  Scientic  Standings, 
respectively,  t.  164,  p.  138 ;  t.  170,  p.  142. 

"  POSITIVE"  SCIENCE,  so  called,  rank  of;  The  Higher  ;  t.  175,  p.  145. 

POSTURE,  and  Figure,  of  Bi-trinacria,  t.  194,  p.  161 ;  see  Position. 

PRECISION,  of  Alwato,  illustrated,  t.  196,  p.  162. 

PREFACE,  pp.  iii-ix. 

PRIMITIVE  ELEMENTS,  see  Ultimate  Elements. 

PRINCIPLES,  only  Three  ;  apparent  exceptions,  t.  2,  3,  p.  1 ;  first  statement 
of,  strictly  Universal,  t.  8,  p.  3 ;  t.  46,  p.  31 ;  analogous  to  Points,  1. 168, 
p.  141  ;  Universal  Scientific,  t.  199,  p.  166 ;  GOVERNING  UNIVERSAL,  in 
various  Domains,  t.  216,  p.  176. 

PROGENISM,  of  Art,  Androgyne,  as  of  the  child  partaking  of  the  nature  of 
father  and  mother,  t.  56,  p.  36. 

PRONOUNS,  of  Alwato,  t.  203,  p.  167  ;  Table  No.  8,  t.  204,  p.  169. 

PRONUNCIATION,  of  the  Vowels,  t,  92,  p.  58 ;  t.  94,  p.  59 ;  of  Exceptional 
Letters,  t.  95,  p.  61 ;  diacriticised,  t.  152-156,  pp.  119-123. 

PROOFS,  kinds  of,  that,  Sounds  have  INHERENT  MEANINGS,  t.  114,  p.  78, 
and  to  end  of  the  chapter. 

PROPRIUM,  Aunio — Swedenborg,  t.  185,  p.  157. 

PROSTHETIC,  E,  t.  127,  p.  94. 

PUNCTUATION,  Alwaso,  t,  152-156,  pp.  119-123 ;  Endo-lexic,  t.  155,  p.  123. 

PUNCTUM  VITJS,  (Point  of  Life),  defined,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

R. 

K,  (and  L),  inherent  meanings  of,  illustrated  in  English,  t.  119,  pp.  82-87. 


218  INDEX. 

RAPP,  cited,  t.  79,  p.  49. 

READING,  art  of,  badly  taught  among  us,  t.  106,  p.  67. 

REALITY— -Kant,  the  Vowels,  t.  Ill,  p.  76 ;  t.  121,  p.  90  ;  t.  122,  123,  p.  91 ; 

t.  124,  p.  92  ;  t.  141,  p.  104 ;  t.  144,  p.  105 ;  t.  151,  p.  115 ;  t.  179,  p.  14S  ; 

t.  181,  p.  149  ;  t.  182,  p.   155  ;  t.  205,   p.  171  ;  t.  208,  p.  172  ;  t.  210,  p. 

173  ;  t.  214,  p.  175 ;  t.  216,  p.  176. 
REASON,  the  Pure,  the  Supreme  Faculty  iu  Science,  t.  175,  p.  146  ; — Comte, 

Aungio,  t.  185,  p.  157. 
RECONCILIATION,  Social,  t.  217,  p.  177;  The  Grand  Pantarchal,  t.  218,  p. 

178;  t,  241,  p.  192;  t.  244,   p.  193;    see  Pautarchism,    and   Universal 

Government. 

RECTANGTJLARITY,  see  Angularity. 
RECTITUDE,  in  Morals,  t.  217,  p.  178. 
RELATION,  converted  into  Law,  t.  206,  p.  171. 
RELATIVE,   Form  (eso)  =  Posture,  t.  193.  p.  161 ;  (i,ia),   t.   217,   p.   177; 

Number  (eso),  t.  216,  p.  176 ;  Lingual,  do.,  p.  177. 
RELIGION,  named,  Table  No.  6,  t.  132,  p.  98  ;  The  Pautarchal,  irradiating 

centre  of  all  Social  Affairs,  t.  218,  p.  178. 
RHETORIC,  a  branch  of  language,  t.  64,  p.  41. 
ROOT,  Analogue  of,  Foundation,  t.  54,  p.  35. 
ROOT-WORDS,  Two-letter  or  Bi-literal,  t.  146, -147,  p.  106  ;  Number  of,  t. 

149,  p.  108 ;  Unilateral,  t.  151,  pp.  109-113  ;  Two-Syllable,  Mere  Roots, 

t.  160,  pp.  129-135 ;  see  Elements,  Bauclle-Root-Words. 
RULE,  ruler,  see  Struightness. 

s. 

SANSCRIT,  Aspirates,  Cerebrals,  etc.,  t.  156,  p.  123  ;  Roots,  t.  160,  p.  129. 

SOUELLING,  cited  and  classified,  t.  158,  pp.  127,  128. 

SCIENCE,  must  take  on  a  new  elevation,  t.  17,  p.  14;  defined,  t.  22,  p.  18;  a 
Domain  of  Being,  t.  44,  p.  31  ;  corresponds  to  Duisrn,  t.  47,  do.  ;  again 
defined,  t.  49,  p.  32  ;  Line  or  Ferrima,  Analogue  of,  t.  54,  p.  35 ;  is 
Masculine,  t.  56,  p.  36  ;  named,  Table  No.  6,  t.  132,  p.  98  ;  The  Abstnu-t 
the  Governing  Branch  of,  t.  170,  p.  143,  why,  t.  171-173,  pp.  143-14:.; 
T7te  Only  True,  t.  171,  p.  143 ;  new  and  commanding  relation  of,  to  Gov- 
ernment, t.  109,  p.  166;  presides  over  Nature,  t.  206,  p.  172;  see  Na- 
ture-Science-and-Art. 

SCIENCES,  how  many  ?  a  difficult  question  ;  t.  26,  p.  21 ;  as  many  as  there 
are  Domains  of  Being,  t.  27,  p.  22  ;  Ending  for,  Ahvali,  in  -ski,  t.  126, 
p.  94  ;  1. 157,  pp.  125-127  ;  et  passim. 

SOIENTISMUS,  defined,  Vocabulary  ;  t.  45,  p.  31 ;  there  is  one  of  every 
Splu-re,  t.  62,  p.  39. 

SCIENTOLOGY,  defined,  t.  53,  p.  37 ;  is  new,  t.  60,  p.  38 ;  of  Language  and 


INDEX.  219 

of  the  Universe,  t.  69-81,  pp.  44-51 ;  t.  130,  p.  96  (Table)  ;  OSKI,  1. 157, 
p.  126  ;  Universological,  a  third  Abstract  Science,  t.  168,  p.  141 ;  Uni- 
versological,  asserts  the  supremacy  of  Spirit  over  Matter,  of  The  Ab- 
stract over  The  Concrete,  etc.,  1. 175,  p.  146  ;  final  triumph  of,  what  will 
be,  t.  198,  p.  165 ;  t.  210,  p.  173 ;  named,  Tables,  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  t.  211- 
213,  p.  174. 
SCIENTO-PHILOSOPHY,  Table  No.  3, 1. 130,  p.  96  ;  Table  No.  5, 1. 131,  p.  97  ; 

1. 157,  pp.  126,  127. 
SEATS,  of  Sound,  three,  Back-Mouth,  Middle-Mouth,  Front-Mouth,  t.  79, 

p.  50  ;  Table  No.  1,  t.  94,  p.  60  ;  t.  103,  p.  65. 
SEMICOLON,  Alwaso  uses  of,  t.  155,  p.  122. 
SEMITIC  GUTTURALIZATIONS,  t.  156,  p.  123. 
SENSES,  the,  opposed  to  the  Keason,  t.  175,  p.  145. 
SEQUENCES  ("  CO-SEQUENCES  "),  1. 185,  p.  157. 
SESQUISM,  =  Pneumatismus,  t.  214,  p.  175. 
SHAPE,  see  Form. 

SHAPINGS,  of  oil  things  to  be  hereafter  understood,  t.  191,  p.  160. 
SHAUBIO,  t.  184,  p.  156  ;  distributed,  t.  185,  p.  157. 
SHAUPSKI,  Abstractology — Spencer,  t.  139,  p.  102. 
-Sno,  termination,  t.  151,  p.  114. 
SHORT  HUN,  t.  185,  p.  157. 
SI,ENSKI,  see  Skiski. 
SILECNES,  in  Speech,  the  Analogue  of  Zero,  and  of  Nothing  or  NEGATION 

— Kant,  t.  Ill,  p.  76  ;  see  Negation,  and  Nothings. 
SIXTY-FOUR,  a  Typical  Number,  t.  12,  p.  9. 

-SKI,  termination  for  Science,  t.  126,  p.  94;  t.  157,  p.  125  ;  t.  161,  p.  137. 
SKISKT,  Scientology,  Tables  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  t.  211-213,  p.  174. 
-So,  termination,  t.  151,  p.  114 ;  distributed,  t.  185,  p.  156. 
SOLID,  Geometrical,  an  Abstraction,  t.  165,  p.  138 ;  t.  166,  p.  139. 
SOMETHING- ELEMENT,  represented  by  Vowels,  t.  Ill,  p.  76  ;  t.  124,  p.  92  ; 

see  Eeality. 

SONG,  a  branch  of  language,  t.  64,  p.  41. 

SOUNDS,  Elementary,  of  Speech,  not  always  represented  by  single  letters, 
t.  99,  p.  63  ;  exceptional,  as  Compound  Elements,  do. ;  LIGHT  and 
HEAVY  ;  ABSTBACT-OID  and  CONORET-OID,  t.  101, 102,  pp.  64,  65  ;  Light  and 
Slack-faced  Letters,  t.  102,  p.  65 ;  distinction  seized  on  by  Pitman,  t. 
103,  p.  65  ;  in  pairs,  do.,  t.  103,  p.  66  (Mule  and  Female);  illustrated, 
Table  No.  2,  t.  107,  p.  67  ;  INHERENT  MEANINGS  of,  t.  82,  p.  52;  t.  83,  p. 
53  ;  t.  84,  pp.  53,  54 ;  t.  85,  p.  54 ;  t.  87,  p.  55 ;  t.  108,  p.  68  ;  Table 
No.  3,  t.  109,  pp.  69-75  ;  Justification  of  the  assignments  of  do.,  1. 110- 
120,  pp.  76-89  ;  Classes  of,  =  Laws,  t.  110,  p.  76  ;  the  Vowels  plasmal 
nndhotnogeneous,  =  EEALITY — Kant,  t.  Ill,  p.  76  ;  Consonants  =  Limits, 


220  INDEX. 

Heterogeneity,  "  LIMITATION  "—Kant,  t.  112,  do. ;  The  Limited,  The 
Limiting,  to  peras,  do.,  p.  77 ;  The  Ambigu's  or  Coalescents  —  Spirit 
and  Vitality,  do. ;  names  of  Classes  of,  t.  113,  do. ;  L  and  K,  mean- 
ings of,  in  English,  t.  119,  pp.  82-88  ;  Cosmic  Correspondences  of,  1. 121, 
p.  90,  and  to  end  of  chapter;  t.  127,  p.  94;  Meaning  of  Ambigu's,  t. 
129,  p.  95  ;  Ultimate,  and  Working  Elements,  t.  146,  p.  106  ;  SHORT 
VOWELS,  Marked  Letters,  etc.,  t.  152-150,  pp.  119-123 ;  arrangement  of, 
in  composition,  t.  157,  p.  124 ;  Light  and  Heavy,  or  Thin  and  Thick, 
fitness  of,  for  naming  THE  ABSTRACT  and  THE  CONCRETE,  t.  178,  p.  147  ; 
other  namings  of,  Unintoned,  Intoned, — Elsberg,  t.  179,  p.  148  ;  Conso- 
nets  and  Cousonads,  do. ;  Vowel,  have  a  musical  basis — Helmholtz,  t. 
223,  p.  181  ;  see  Elements,  and  Seats  of  Sound. 

"SOVEREIGNTY,  of  the  Individual,"- -Warren,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

SPACE,  a  Nothing,  t.  165,  p.  138  ;  Out-,  and  In-,  1. 169,  p.  141 ;  1. 172,  p.  144. 

SPA-CE-OLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  96. 

"  SPACES."  "  Blanks  "  =  Space  =  Silences,  t.  123,  p.  92. 

SPECIALISTS,  onr  Scientists  mostly  so,  t.  10,  p.  4 ;  special  faculties  of,  need 
training,  1. 12,  p.  7  ;  in  Science,  incompetent  to  judge  Universology,  t. 
12,  pp.  7-9  ;  t.  16,  p.  12;  t.  17,  p.  13;  Universology  declines  the  juris- 
diction of,  t.  18,  p.  15 ;  are  tending  towards  Universology,  Note,  do. : 
who,  t.  139,  p.  102  ;  learned  ants,  t.  246,  p.-196. 

SPECIALITE— Balzac,  Table  No.  9,  t.  211,  p.  174. 

SPECIALIZATION,  Shaubio,  t.  184,  p.  156. 

SPECIALOGY,  t.  139,  p.  102. 

SPEECH,  Oral,  a  branch  of  language,  t.  64,  p.  41. 

SPEECH-TEMPLE,  its  Portico  and  Inner  Galleries,  t.  150,  p.  109. 

SPELLING  BY  SOUND,  t.  91,  p.  57. 

SPENCER,  Herbert,  cited,  t.  26,  p.  21 ;  his  distribution  of  the  Sciences,  t. 
139,  p.  102,  and  Note  ;  an  Echosophist,  t.  159,  p.  128;  t.  161,  p.  136;  t. 
168,  p.  141;  t.  185,  p.  157. 

"  SPHERES,"  Spiritual,  emanated,  t.  180,  p.  148. 

"SPIRIT,"  diffusive  emanation,  t,  180,  p.  148;  do.  "of  Truth,"  do. 

SPIRITUALISTIC  KEALITII  s,  rank  of,  t.  175,  p.  146. 

SPIRIT-WORLD,  Hwaunio,  1. 129,  p.  95. 

SQUEEZING,  and  Stretching,  t.  12,  p.  10. 

STAGES,  of  Mental  Evolution,  t.  9,  p.  4;  t.  10,  p.  5;  t.  12,  p.  6 ;  see  Stories. 

STATIC,  The, — Comte,  t.  185,  p.  157. 

STATOID,  etc.,  see  Alphabet,  Sounds. 

STOPPED  VOWELS,  how  represented,  t.  154,  p.  121. 

STORIES,  of  Edifice,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

STRAIGUTNESS,  test  of  Science,  t.  171,  pp.  143,  144  ;  possible  only  in  ideal, 
t.  172,  p.  144;  t.  174,  p.  145. 


INDEX.  221 

STREAMS,  see  Career. 

STUFFS,  Substances,  Materials  ;  see  Homogenismus,  and  Reality 

SUBDOMINANCE,  t.  84,  p.  54;  t.  85,  p.  55;  t.  119,  p.  82. 

SUBJECTIVE,  The,  Nauio,  t.  185,  p.  156. 

SUBSTANCE,  and  FORM,  t.  49,  p.  32 ;  FORM,  and  MOVEMENT,  =  Nature,  Sci- 
ence, and  Art,  do.;  (Substance),  defined,  t.  52,  p.  33;  Homogeneous,  t- 
141,  p.  104;  t.  166,  p.  139;  see  Eeality,  and  Homogeuisnius. 

SUPERINCUMBENCY,  its  relation  to  foundation,  t.  55,  p.  36. 

"  SUPERIOR  LETTERS,"  defined,  and  uses  of,  t.  156,  p.  123. 

SUPERNOLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  97. 

SUPERSTRUCTURE,  Analogue  of  Science,  etc.,  t.  53,  p.  34;  t.  54,  p.  35. 

SWEDENBORG,  representative  name  in  Theandrology,  t.  129,  p.  96 ;  cited 
for  proprinm,  t.  185,  p.  157  ;  Heavens  and  Hells,  or  Spiritual  Cosmogony 
of,  t.  190,  p.  159  ;  on  the  Meanings  of  the  Vowels,  in  the  Speech  of  the 
Angels,  t.  223-226,  pp.  183-184. 

SYNTAX,  of  Alwato,  (Conjugation),  t.  200-204  (Table  No.  6),  pp.  166-169. 

"  SYNTHESIS,"  of  Hegel  and  Fichte,  alluded  to,  t.  7,  p.  3. 

T. 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS,  p.  xv. 

TABLES,  No.  1 — THE  ALPHABET,  t.  94,  p.  60;  No.  2,  Pitnianian  Alphabet, 
t.  107,  p.  67 ;  No.  3,  INHERENT  MEANINGS  OF  SOUNDS,  t.  109,  p.  69 ;  No. 
4,  Elementism  and  Elaborism,  t.  130,  p.  96  ;  No.  5,  do.,  1. 131,  p.  97 ;  No. 
6,  PHILOSOPHY,  SCIENCE,  RELIGION,  t.  132,  p.  98  ;  No.  7,  CONJUGATION  OF 
THE  ALWASO  VERB,  t.  203,  p.  168;  No.  8,  The  Alwaso  Pronouns,  t.  204, 
p.  169 ;  No.  9,  Nature,  Science,  and  Art,  in  the  Order  of  Discovery,  t. 

211,  p.  174;  Nos.  10, 11,  Naturology,  Scientology,  Artology,  named,  t. 

212,  213,  p.  174. 

TAUTUS  ERUDITUS,  mental,  required,  in  Primitive  Word-building,  t.  148, 

p.  lo7. 
TECHNICALS,  adaptation  of  Alwato  to  use   for,  t.  187,  p.  158,  and  to  end 

of  chapter. 
TEMPLE,  the  Chemical,  1. 13,  p.  10;  t.  16,  p.  12 ;  of  Speech,  1. 150,  p.  109 ; 

see  Dome,  Universe. 
TEMPOROLOGY,  Table  No.  4,  t.  130,  p.  96 ;  of  the  Verb,  Tenses,  t.  200,  p. 

166. 
TERMINAL  CONVERSION  INTO  OPPO-ITES,  of  Meanings  of  Sounds,  t.  119, 

p.  82. 
TERMINATIONS,  -io,  -ia,  t.  126,  p.  93  ;  -ski,  do.,  p.  94 ;  -so,   t.  140,  p.  103 ; 

-so,  -s'lo,  -to,  -ski,  -li,  -ni,  t.  151,  pp.  114,  115;  for  Plurality,  t.  160,  p. 

129. 


222  INDEX. 

TH,  and  DH,  two  Sounds  of  th,  in  English,  t.  104,  105,  p.  66. 

TlIALLATOSPHERE,  t.  145,  p.  105. 

THEANDRISMUS,  Hwaunio,  t.  129,  p.  95. 

THEOLOGIOA- METAPHYSICAL,  First  Essay,  yielding,  t.  175,  p.  146. 

"  THESIS,"  of  Hegel  and  Fichte,  alluded  to,  t.  7,  p.  3. 

THIN,  Things,  t.  176,  p.  146 ;  Sounds,  t.  178,  p.  147 ;  Thick,  do. ;  see 
Sounds,  and  Elements. 

THOUGHT-LINE,  referred  to,  t.  54,  p.  34;  defined,  t.  163,  p.  140;  =  Laws, 
t.  168,  p.  141 ;  1. 170,  p.  142. 

THOUGHT-POINTS,  t.  168,  p.  140 ;  t.  169,  p.  141 ;  t.  170,  pp.  142,  143. 

THOUGHT-RELATIONS — Kant,  Hegel,  t.  158,  p.  127. 

THOUGHT-SPACE,  t.  168,  p.  140;  t.  169,  p.  141 ;  t.  170,  p.  143. 

THOUGHT-SURFACES,  t.  168,  p.  140 ;  t.  170,  p.  142. 

TIKIWA,  see  Alwato. 

TIME,  an  Abstraction,  or  Nothing,  t.  165,  p.  138. 

TITLE-PAGE,  p.  1. 

-To,  termination,  t.  151,  p.  114;  distributed,  t.  185,  p.  156. 

TOTISMUS,  how  same  as  Trinismus,  t.  214,  p.  175 ;  see  Whole. 

TRANSCENDENTAL,  The,  t.  126,  p.  94 ;  t.  128,  p.  95. 

TREE,  or  Plant,  Type  to  illustrate  Universal  Distribution,  t.  54,  p.  35. 

TRINISM,  introduced,  and  naming  of,  t.  2,  p.  1  ^  signifies  Totality,  t.  6,  p.  2  ; 
Jdnge-UTce,  do.,  t.  7,  p.  3;  Compound;  deficit  of  namings  of,  do.,  (t.  7,  p. 
3);  =  "Synthesis"  do.,  referred  to,  t.  8,  p.  4;  t.  46,  p.  31;  echoes  to 
Art,  t.  47,  do.;  the  Third  Universal  Principle,  related  to  the  Number 
Three,  t.  82,  p.  52 ;  various  names  of,  t.  214,  p.  175 ;  see  CarJinism,  Art- 
ism,  Artismus,  Artology,  and  Unism-Duism-and-Trinism. 

TraNisMrs,  how  same  as  Totismus,  t.  214,  p.  175. 

TRINITARIANISM,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

TRUTH,  is  of  two  kinds,  t.  175,  p.  145. 

TWANG,  in  the  Nose  of  the  Religious  Enthusiast,  meaning  of,  1. 151,  p.  113. 

TWO-LETTER  ROOT-WORDS,  t.  146,  147,  p.  106. 

TYPE,  the  Line  a,  of  a  Career,  t.  54,  p.  34;  Primal  and  Universal  of  Being, 
t.  55,  p.  36 ;  Language  a,  of  the  Universe,  t.  63,  p.  40 ;  the  Ether  is  so 
of  Homogenism,  t.  136,  p.  100 ;  see  Tree,  or  Plant. 

TJ. 

ULTERIOR  AND  REACTIONARY  CONSEQUENCE,  Lau,io,  1. 185,  p.  157. 
ULTIMATE  ELEMENTS,  defined,  t.  146,  p.  106. 
UNCONDITIONED,  The — Sir  Wrn.  Hamilton,  t.  128,  p.  95. 
UNDIFFERENTIATED,  The,  defined,  t.  133,  p.  98. 
UNEUPHONEOUS  NAMINGS,  justified,  Note,  t.  139,  p.  102. 


INDEX.  223 

UNISM,  introduced,  and  naming  of,  t.  2,  p.  1 ;  various  namings  of,  t.  4,  p. 
2;  referred  to,  t.  8,  p.  4;  t.  46,  p.  31 ;  echoes  to  Nature,  t.  47,  do. ;  the 
First  Universal  Principle,  related  to  the  Number  One;  hence  Elementis- 
nius,  t.  82,  p.  52  ;  t.  214,  p.  175;  various  names  of,  do. 

UNTSM-DIKSM-AND-TRINISM,  t.  79,  p.  50;  Sociological,  t.  217,  p.  177. 

UNISMUS,  how  same  as  Homogenismus,  (au)  t.  210,  t.  173  ;  t.  214,  p.  175. 

UNIT,  a  Thought-point,  repeats  Point  and  Thing,  t.  167,  p.  140  ;  in  a  Sum, 
t.  163,  do. ;  t.  169,  p.  141 ;  see  Thought-Point. 

UNITARIANISM-,  t.  217,  p.  178. 

UNITINQS,  see  Partings. 

UNITY  OF  SYSTEM,  in  Education,  Preface,  p.  vii ;  in  the  Universe,  1. 11,  p. 
5;  Lingual,  t.  150,  p.  109;  in  Science,  Philosophy,  Government,  Ee- 
ligion,  t.  218,  p.  178;  see  University. 

UNIVERSAL  ANALOGY,  basis  of  Universology,  t.  8,  p.  3 ;  t.  9,  p.  4 ;  t.  62, 
p.  39. 

UNIVERSAL  GOVERNMENT,  to  result  from  Universology,  Preface,  viii ;  t. 
218,  p.  178 ;  t.  232,  p.  185 ;  see  Pantarchism. 

UNIVERSE,  The,  the  largest  Domain  of  Existence,  t.  24,  p.  20;  Subject  to 
Classification,  do.  ;  not  easy  to  condense  the  consideration  of,  t.  42,  p. 
29  ;  an  Edifice  with  Stories,  a  Tri-Unity,  t.  53,  p.  34  ;  Minor,  see  Minor 
Universe. 

UNIVERSITY,  The  Pantarchal,  a  New  Grand  Institutional  Centre  of  Learn- 
ing, demanded,  Preface,  p.  viii,  t.  218,  p.  178 ;  an  Incipient  Working, 
already  founded,  t.  244,  p.  195. 

UNIVERSOLOGICAL  METHOD,  CONDENSED  STATEMENT  of,  p.  xv  ;  t.  219,  p. 
79 ;  t.  239,  p.  191 ;  t.  242,  p.  193. 

UNIVERSOLOGY,  "  Basic  Outline  of,"  Preface,  p.  iii ;  a  Card  respecting,  p. 
v ;  defined,  p.  8,  t.  3 ;  how  based,  do.,  1. 11,  p.  6  ;  accounts  for  irregu- 
larity in  Nature,  t.  16,  p.  13  ;  declines  the  jurisdiction  of  Specialists,  t. 
18,  p.  15 ;  further  defined,  t.  28,  p.  22  ;  Objections  to  the  possibility  of, 
answered,  t.  29-39,  pp.  22-28 ;  the  fact  of,  t.  41,  p.  29  ;  t.  62,  p.  39 ;  what 
it  does  in  Speech,  t.  70,  p.  44;  Sublime  office  of,  to  interpret  other 
Philosophies,  t.  159,  p.  128;  (do.,  through  Alwato,  do.,  and  t.  199,  p. 
165) ;  higher  departments  of,  1. 170,  p.  142,  and  t.  198,  p.  165  ;  definitely 
characterized,  t.  218,  p.  178;  a  Science  and  a  METHOD,  t.  219,  p.  179; 
farther  defined  and  characterized,  t.  229,  230,  p.  185;  basis  of,  mathe- 
matical, t.  233,  p.  186  ;  its  First  Principles  of,  t.  234,  p.  187  ;  BASIC  OUT- 
LINE of,  described,  t.  236-251,  p.  251. 

UNLIMITED,  The,  1. 128,  p.  95  ;  see  Hamilton,  and  Reality. 

USE,  (Construction  and  Occupancy,  Analogue  of  Art),  t.  ."/;,  p.  C4. 

USKI,  t.  207,  p.  172. 


224  INDEX. 

V. 

VALUES,    of  Sounds,  Direct  and  Inverse,   t.   157,   p.   124 ;    see    Sounds, 

Alphabet,  Elements. 
VEGETABLE  KINGDOM,  the,  a  Minor  Universe,  t.  62,  p.  39  ;  named,  t.  140, 

p.  103 ;  t.  185,  p.  157 ;  see  Minor  Universe. 
VERNACULAR,  of  the  World,  Ahvato,  t.  74,  p.  46 ;  t.  150,  p.  109 ;  t.  235, 

p.  188. 

VESTIBULE,  of  Speech,  the  Alphabet,  t.  87,  p.  56. 
VISCERISM,  t.  214,  p.  175. 
"  VISIBLE  SPEECH,"  Bell,  t.  79,  p.  49. 
VOCABULARY,  pp.  xi-xiii. 

VOCALITY,  Vowel-Element  =  Something,  t.  124,  p.  92;  see  Keality. 
VOWELS,  represented  by  au,  t.  92,  p.  58 ;  t.  126,  p.  93  ;  t.  127,  p.  94 ;  t. 

157,  p.  124:  as  Verb-endings  (i,  a,  o,  etc.),  t.  202,  p.  167  ;  t.  203,  p.  168  ; 

t.  205,  p.  170 ;  t.  206,  p.  171 ;  t.  207,  p.  172  ;  the  Unismus  of  Speech,  t. 

214,  p.  175  ;  Swedenborg's  account  of  Meanings  of,  t.  223-226,  pp.  181- 

183  ;  see  Elements,  Alphabet,  Sounds. 
VOWEL  SCALE,  (8),  t.  154,  p.  121. 

w. 

WHINE,  see  Twang. 

WHITNEY,  Prof.  Wm.  Dwight,  his  views  adverse  to  Inherency  of  Mean- 
ing in  Sounds,  t.  120,  p.  88,  and  Note. 

WHOLE,  is  the  Triuismus,  t.  82,  p.  52 ;  t.  210,  p.  173  ;  t.  214,  p.  175. 

"WORD,"  see  Logos  ;  used  for  "Scriptures,"  t.  225,  p.  182. 

WORD-BUILDING,  instanced,  t.  21,  p.  18 ;  Primitive,  from  Two-letter  Roots, 
difficult,  t.  147,  148,  p.  107  ;  from  Working  Elements,  easy,  t.  149,  150, 
p.  108;  ILLUSTRATIONS  of,  t.  151,  pp.  110-119. 

WORDS,  formed  by  the  million,  needing  no  dictionary,  t.  150,  p.  108  ; 
others  requiring  one,  do. ;  meaning  of,  how  rendered  definite,  t.  151, 
Note,  p.  110  ;  Compounding  of,  t.  155,  p.  122  ;  Two-letter,  not  so  much 
Words  as  Roots,  t.  160,  p.  129. 

WORLD  CATHEDRAL,  see  Dome. 

WORKING  ELEMENTS,  defined,  t.  146,  p.  106. 

z. 

ZERO,  see  Silences. 

ZIIAUBIO,  t.  184,  p.  156. 

ZHAUBSKI,  Concretology — Spencer,  t.  139,  p.  102. 


HOME  USE 

CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

MAIN  LIBRARY 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  pr.or 
to  due  date. 


- 


KO.  CIS. 


OCT  1  7  2007 


. 

BJBJI 

• 

I  • 

. 


LD'21       A-40m-8,'75 
(S7737L) 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


•r 
^H 


I 

-;    .  • 


s 

,  :  ': 

B 


I 

:•  . 


OOO   A  S 

£<£o4o 


005^3360^ 


•  /    \N 


»!>;>}}>;  >)K>ty. 
W>$$$W 

•->:W'>W'>; 

f    v*  /    v*  /    O  /*    \. *  y    v*  /     \^  >     * 

'>V'>W4 

O  /    v  /    v  /    v  /    v  '    N    '    •• 

"  I*  ».  /  o  t  /  *' 

'>:>){>:  •-.-•          -» 

\vV^Vr 


• 


.' 


:>)'  •